GE Digital Energy

345 Transformer Protection System
Transformer protection and control

Instruction manual
345 revision: 1.5x Manual P/N: 1601-9098-A7 GE publication code: GEK-113568F Copyright © 2012 GE Digital Energy GE Digital Energy 650 Markland Street, Markham, Ontario Canada L6C 0M1 Tel: +1 905 927 7070 Fax: +1 905 927 5098 Internet: http://www.gedigitalenergy.com
GE Multilin's Quality Management System is registered to ISO9001:2008 QMI # 005094

*1601-9098-A7*

© 2012 GE Digital Energy Incorporated. All rights reserved. GE Digital Energy 345 Transformer Protection System instruction manual for revision 1.5x. 345 Transformer Protection System, EnerVista, EnerVista Launchpad, and EnerVista SR3 Setup are registered trademarks of GE Digital Energy Inc. The contents of this manual are the property of GE Digital Energy Inc. This documentation is furnished on license and may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the permission of GE Digital Energy. The content of this manual is for informational use only and is subject to change without notice. Part number: 1601-9098-A7 (September 2012)

Note

GENERAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS - 345 • Failure to observe and follow the instructions provided in the equipment manual(s) could cause irreversible damage to the equipment and could lead to property damage, personal injury and/or death. • Before attempting to use the equipment, it is important that all danger and caution indicators are reviewed. • If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer or functions abnormally, proceed with caution. Otherwise, the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired and can result in Impaired operation and injury. • Caution: Hazardous voltages can cause shock, burns or death. • Installation/service personnel must be familiar with general device test practices, electrical awareness and safety precautions must be followed. • Before performing visual inspections, tests, or periodic maintenance on this device or associated circuits, isolate or disconnect all hazardous live circuits and sources of electric power. • Failure to shut equipment off prior to removing the power connections could expose you to dangerous voltages causing injury or death. • All recommended equipment that should be grounded and must have a reliable and un-compromised grounding path for safety purposes, protection against electromagnetic interference and proper device operation. • Equipment grounds should be bonded together and connected to the facility’s main ground system for primary power. • Keep all ground leads as short as possible. • At all times, equipment ground terminal must be grounded during device operation and service. • In addition to the safety precautions mentioned all electrical connections made must respect the applicable local jurisdiction electrical code. • Before working on CTs, they must be short-circuited.

This product cannot be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste in the European Union. For proper recycling return this product to your supplier or a designated collection point. For more information go to www.recyclethis.info.

Safety words and definitions
The following symbols used in this document indicate the following conditions
Note

Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates practices not related to personal injury.

Note

Note

Note

Table of Contents
1. INTRODUCTION
Overview ............................................................................................................................ 1 - 1 Description of the 345 Transformer Protection System .............................. 1 - 2 345 order codes.............................................................................................................. 1 - 6 Specifications................................................................................................................... 1 - 7
Password security................................................................................................................1 - 7 Protection.................................................................................................................................1 - 7 Metering....................................................................................................................................1 - 9 Data capture ..........................................................................................................................1 - 9 Controls.....................................................................................................................................1 - 10 Inputs/Outputs ......................................................................................................................1 - 10 Power supply ..........................................................................................................................1 - 11 Communications ..................................................................................................................1 - 12 Testing and certification ...................................................................................................1 - 13

2. INSTALLATION

Mechanical installation ............................................................................................... 2 - 1
Dimensions..............................................................................................................................2 - 1 Product identification .........................................................................................................2 - 3 Mounting ..................................................................................................................................2 - 4
Standard panel mount .....................................................................................................2 - 4

Drawout unit withdrawal and insertion.....................................................................2 - 7

Electrical installation .................................................................................................... 2 - 8
Terminal identification .......................................................................................................2 - 10
Wire range .............................................................................................................................2 - 13

Phase sequence and transformer polarity...............................................................2 - 13 Current inputs ........................................................................................................................2 - 13 Ground and sensitive ground CT inputs ....................................................................2 - 14 Zero sequence CT installation ........................................................................................2 - 15 Control power ........................................................................................................................2 - 15 Contact inputs .......................................................................................................................2 - 16 Trip1 and Trip2 output relays..........................................................................................2 - 16 Serial communications ......................................................................................................2 - 19 IRIG-B .........................................................................................................................................2 - 20

3. INTERFACES

Front control panel interface.................................................................................... 3 - 2
Description ..............................................................................................................................3 - 3 Display .......................................................................................................................................3 - 3
Working with the Keypad................................................................................................3 - 3

LED status indicators..........................................................................................................3 - 5 Relay messages ....................................................................................................................3 - 6
Target messages.................................................................................................................3 - 6 Self-test errors......................................................................................................................3 - 7 Flash messages ...................................................................................................................3 - 8

Software setup ................................................................................................................ 3 - 9
Quick setup - Software interface ..................................................................................3 - 9 EnerVista SR3 Setup Software........................................................................................3 - 9
Hardware and software requirements.....................................................................3 - 10 Installing the EnerVista SR3 Setup software..........................................................3 - 10

Connecting EnerVista SR3 Setup to the relay ........................................................3 - 13
Configuring serial communications...........................................................................3 - 13 Using the Quick Connect feature ................................................................................3 - 14

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

..................3 ..............................................4 Output relays ......Configuring Ethernet communications ...5 Remote outputs ...........6 ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................5 ..................3 ......3 .................................... 4 ...................................30 Clear event record....17 Engaging a device ................................................. 4 ..................................................5 Remote inputs ............................................................................................ 3 ...........................11 Event records............................................2 Logic diagrams .................................................3 Setting text abbreviations......................1 Setpoint entry methods ..............................................24 Loading new relay firmware....................... 6 ...................29 Password security ........... 4 .................3 ......................................................................................................23 Loading setpoints from a file......... 4 .....................................................................................19 Adding setpoints files to the environment .............18 Downloading and saving setpoints files ...30 4...................................................................... 4 ................................22 Printing actual values from a connected device ..................................3 ........................................................................... 3 ............21 Printing setpoints and actual values ..........................................................................................................................3 ............................3 ........................................................................................ 4 .............................................................4 ........... ACTUAL VALUES Actual values....................11 Transient records ................................................................................4 ......................................... 4 .................6 Logic elements summary.............................................................................................6 GOOSE HDR status ........ 6 ...........................................................5 Virtual inputs .......................................................................30 Clear transient record.............................................31 5.....................................................18 Using setpoints files...........................................................................3 ....4 Logic elements ................................... 4 ................................................................2 Common setpoints.......................................................4 ...... 4 ............24 Upgrading relay firmware ............................... 4 ...........................26 Transient recorder (Waveform capture)..............................................20 Upgrading setpoint files to a new revision .........................................................3 ...................................................................................... QUICK SETUP FRONT CONTROL PANEL 6....3 ...................24 Advanced EnerVista SR3 Setup features ................................3 ......................4 Contact inputs ......................................................3 Setpoints Main Menu .................................................................................... 4 .........................6 GOOSE status........................................................................................4 ......................................................................................... 4 ............................................................................................................................................................ 4 ...3 .................1 A1 Status.........................................................5 Output relays summary ...................7 A2 Metering .....3 .................................................................5 Contact inputs summary.....................4 .....3 ............................................................................................................................................ 6 .............................................................................................................................19 Creating a new setpoint file ......3 ...................................................................17 File support ...............8 A3 Records....................... 3 ..16 Working with setpoints and setpoint files ...............................................................................30 Clear thermal capacity record................................................................................................................................................. 6 ......... 4 .......................................................................................................3 ............................3 ..................................................................................................................................................................... 4 ........................................................................................... 4 ...........................................................................................................3 Clock.........................................................................................................30 A4 Target messages....................................................................... SETPOINTS Quick Setup menu ...............................26 Protection summary..............15 Connecting to the relay...............................3 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL ................................................ 4 .........17 Entering setpoints.....................................................

.............................................6 .......................... 6 .......................................................40 Event recorder ....................46 Power system...........................................................................6 ......................64 Transformer instantaneous differential ......................................................................108 Virtual inputs...45 Current sensing ........................................................................................................................................................................................................130 Output Relay 2 ..............................................111 Winding breaker failure..........6 .....91 Ground instantaneous overcurrent protection ...................................................................6 ......6 ..........6 ......................6 .....................................81 Phase instantaneous overcurrent protection .....................135 Remote outputs..............................................6 ..........6 ...............................125 S5 Inputs/Outputs................................6 ..............................................................6 .......................5 Password security........................62 Setpoint group 1(2) .............................5 W1 (W2) Breaker trip coil ....................................................................................................................................................................................................128 Contact inputs .....................................................104 S4 Controls ..............................................................................................................6 .........................................................................................................................110 Logic elements...............................................................12 IEC 60870-5-103 serial communication ......................................................128 Output relays...................101 Negative sequence timed overcurrent protection....................................................................59 S3 Protection..................................................6 .............................. 7 .......................................................................................11 Modbus....6 ...........................6 .......................7 Passwords .........10 Ethernet...W1 breaker "Trip" ............................S1 Relay setup ...............................................................................9 M5 Relay maintenance. 7 ..6 .......................6 .....................................6 ..........................................6 ..................6 .......6 ...............................................6 .....3 M3 Breaker maintenance......................42 Front panel ..............6 .................................. 6 ..78 Phase timed overcurrent protection ................................................27 SR3 IEC 61850 GOOSE details .....................71 Restricted ground fault ..............................................25 DNP communication ...............................................................................................W2 breaker "Trip" .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................10 RS485 interface ...........................................................................................................................................................................48 Winding breakers ...........................................47 Transformer .....................................13 IEC60870-5-104 protocol.....................................................6 ....47 Transformer setup phase & magnitude compensations ...........................95 Neutral timed overcurrent protection......43 Installation ...........................................................................................98 Neutral instantaneous overcurrent protection ............................................................................6 ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 7 ...........................6 ................6 ...........10 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL ............................................................................6 ..........................................................................................................................130 Auxiliary Output Relays 3 to 6....................................6 ...............................................................................................................................6 ................129 Output Relay 1 ...............6 . 6 ..............................................9 Communications ..6 ...6 ................................................5 M4 Breaker monitor ....41 Transient recorder .......................6 .....................................................................................................................................................133 Virtual inputs...........................................................6 ............................................................................................................63 Transformer percent differential .............................................................................................6 .............................................6 ................................................................................6 .........................................................................................88 Ground timed overcurrent protection .......................................................7 ............................................6 ..........5 Clock ....................................................................................... MAINTENANCE M1 Relay information.........................6 ................ 6 ................... 6 ...............................................................................................................6 ...............6 ....................6 ..............................................................135 7............................................................................................................................................108 Change setpoint group......... 7 .................44 S2 System Setup...............................73 Transformer thermal protection...........................................................6 .......................................................................133 Remote inputs..........................................................................

............................... 7 ..................................................................... Appendix .............................................................1 Manual Revision history....................Appendix ........................10 APPENDIX......Ambient temperature ......................................... Change notes .....................................................................1 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL ...

advanced features. USB. Large four-line LCD display. Fast setup (Quick Setup) menu for power system configuration and protection. monitoring. operation. IEC608705-103. Multiple protection groups with the flexibility to switch through a wide selection of main and backup transformer protections and controls. The 345 relay has a small footprint and is withdrawable for easy mounting into either new or retrofit installations. and alarm events. The 345 relay provides the following key benefits: • • • • • Withdrawable small footprint – saves on rewiring and space. The relay provides advanced algorithms for automatic magnitude and phase compensation for more than twenty types of twowinding transformers. IEC 61850 GOOSE. and the EnerVista SR3 Setup program. makes the relay superior for total transformer metering. LEDs. the 345 relay is the best-in-class for either MCCs. pickup. 60870-5-104. The combination of proven hardware. as well as a wide selection of protocols such as Modbus. and Ethernet ports. neutral and negative sequence currents overcurrent elements. SCADA or inter-relay communications.0. ground. and the flexibility to set any of the phase.345 Transformer Protection System Chapter 1: Introduction Introduction Overview The 345 is a microprocessor-based relay for primary and backup protection of small to medium size distribution transformers. The 345 provides excellent accessibility and transparency with regard to power system conditions and events. DNP3. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1–1 . protection and control. through both its fourline 20 character display. Conveniently located LEDs indicate the relay status. and keypad Multiple communication protocols and simultaneous access with easy integration into monitoring and control systems. as well as the status of each winding breaker. and communications. good sensitivity for the detection of winding ground faults. Equipped with serial (RS485).

Analog Input Waveform Capture Magnetic transformers are used to scale-down the incoming analog signals from the source instrument transformers. These ‘raw’ samples are scaled in software. power. thus emulating a fault recorder. The signals are converted to digital values by a 12-bit A/D converter before finally being passed on to the CPU for analysis. all harmonic components are removed.DESCRIPTION OF THE 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION Description of the 345 Transformer Protection System CPU Relay functions are controlled by two processors: a Freescale MPC5554 32-bit microprocessor measures all analog signals and digital inputs and controls all output relays. one that will not overreach. The protection elements use RMS current. The Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) uses exactly one sample cycle to calculate a phasor quantity which represents the signal at the fundamental frequency. RMS. All subsequent calculations (e. voltage signals bypass the DC Offset Filter. then placed into the waveform capture buffer. protection is impervious to both harmonics and DC transients. Both current and voltage are sampled thirty-two times per power frequency cycle. and Harmonics Current waveforms are processed twice every cycle with a DC Offset Filter and a Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT). Protection Elements The protection elements are processed four times per power cycle. 1–2 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . Processing of AC Current Inputs The DC Offset Filter is an infinite impulse response (IIR) digital filter. based on the magnitude of the phasor. The waveforms can be retrieved from the relay via the EnerVista SR3 Setup software for display and diagnostics. The analog signals are then passed through a 960 Hz low pass anti-aliasing filter. All signals are then simultaneously captured by sample and hold buffers to ensure there are no phase shifts. a Freescale MPC520B 32-bit microprocessor controls all the Ethernet communication protocols. etc.) are based upon the current and voltage phasors. This filter ensures no overreach of the overcurrent protection.g. Hence. Transients. such that the resulting values have no harmonic components. This results in an overcurrent relay that is extremely secure and reliable. This is done for all current signals used for overcurrent protection. Phasors. which removes the DC component from the asymmetrical current present at the moment a fault occurs. The resulting phasors have fault current transients and all harmonics removed.

CDR 1–3 .CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION DESCRIPTION OF THE 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM Figure 1: Single line diagram Winding 1 Winding 2 50P 51P 50BF 51_2 50N 51N 49P 87G 50G 50G 50P 51P 50BF 51_2 50N 51N Calculate Restraint Current 50G/ 51G 51G 50G/ 51G 51G 87G Calculate Differential Currents 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 345 RELAY 50/87 BLOCK Calculate Harmonics 2nd and 5th 87T Metering 897743.

Setpoint group 2 can be activated by programming the conditions under S4 Control/Change Setpoint Group menu. and Neutral TOC1(2). one Thermal Model. Neutral Timed Overcurrent elements. Ground-. two Restricted Ground Fault elements. Some of the protection elements are common for the transformer protection: Percent and Instantaneous differential elements. the Phase-. and the Negative Sequence TOC1(2) elements. and two Negative Sequence Timed Overcurrent elements. one Instantaneous Differential element. and Neutral IOC1(2). Ground-. The full set of protection elements will be available in the setpoint group. 1–4 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . By default setpoint group 1 will be active. and others are generic with programmable AC inputs from either winding currents: the Restricted Ground Fault 1(2). the type and number of protection elements per setpoint group changes. and Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent elements. two of each Phase-. if the “Advanced configuration (letter M) is selected in the order code. Ground-. Depending on the relay order code. with the same set of protection elements. Ground-. the Phase-. two of each Phase-. two Breaker Failure elements. This includes one Transformer Percent Differential element. Thermal Model.DESCRIPTION OF THE 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION Table 1: Protection Elements ANSI Device 87T 50/87 87G 49 50P 50G 50N 50BF 51P 51G 51N 51_2 Description Percent Differential Instantaneous Differential Restricted Ground Fault Thermal Model Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent Ground/Sensitive Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent Breaker Failure Phase Timed Overcurrent Ground/Sensitive Ground Timed Overcurrent Neutral Timed Overcurrent Negative Sequence Timed Overcurrent The 345 relay has two identical setpoint groups.

CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION DESCRIPTION OF THE 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM Figure 2: Main menu XFMR PERCENT DIFF PCNT DIFF FUNCTION ▼ MINIMUM PICKUP SLOPE 1 BREAKPOINT 1 BREAKPOINT 2 QUICK SETUP RELAY STATUS ▼ NOMINAL FREQUENCY W1 PH CT PRIMARY W1 PH CT SECONDARY W1 GND CT PRIMARY W1 GND CT SECONDARY W2 PH CT PRIMARY W2 PH CT SECONDARY W2 GND CT PRIMARY W2 GND CT SECONDARY TRANSFORMER TYPE XFMR RATED LOAD W1 NOM VOLTAGE W1 GROUNDING W2 NOM VOLTAGE W2 GROUNDING XFMR PERCENT DIFF PH TOC1 FUNCTION GND TOC1 FUNCTION PH IOC1 FUNCTION GND IOC1 FUNCTION SETPOINTS S1 RELAY SETUP S2 SYSTEM SETUP S3 PROTECTION ▼ S4 CONTROLS S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS MAINTENANCE 897756A2.cdr ACTUAL VALUES QUICK SETUP SETPOINTS MAINTENANCE ACTUAL VALUES A1 STATUS A2 METERING A3 RECORDS ▼ A4 TARGET MESSAGES SLOPE 2 PHASE TOC1 PHASE TOC1 FUNCTION ▼ PHASE CT INPUT PH TOC1 PICKUP PH TOC1 CURVE PH TOC1 TDM RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR GROUND TOC1 GND TOC1 FUNCTION ▼ GND CT INPUT GND TOC1 PICKUP GND TOC1 CURVE GND TOC1 TDM RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR PHASE IOC1 PHASE IOC1 FUNCTION ▼ PH CT INPUT PH IOC1 PICKUP RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR GROUND IOC1 GROUND IOC1 FUNCTION ▼ GND CT INPUT GND IOC1 PICKUP RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR M1 RELAY INFO M3 BKR MAINTENANCE ▼ M4 BKR MONITOR M5 RELAY MAINT M6 FACTORY SERVICE 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1–5 .

MTRJ).1 A) 5 A 3-phase CTs (Winding 1 . 50P(1).1 A.0. IEC 61850 GOOSE Standard + Ethernet (Copper & Fiber . DNP3. 51P(2). 51P(1). 50N(2). Modbus TCP/IP. 50BF(1).MTRJ).1 A. 87T-50. Winding 2 . 50N(2). Winding 2 . DNP3.1 A) 5 A sensitive ground CTs (Winding 1 . IEC 61850 Protection Relay with drawout design Protection Relay with non-drawout design None Harsh Environment Conformal Coating Ground Currents* G1 | Power Supply Current Protection Communications Case Design Harsh Environment * The ground CT tap selection must match the selected Phase CT tap. 87T-50.1 A) 5 A standard ground CTs (Winding 1 . 51P(2). 51N(1). The selection of the P5 phase CT option enables only the selection of the G5 or S5 ground CT option. 50BF(2).0. IEC 60870-5-104. 50G(1). Modbus TCP/IP. IEC 60870-5-104 Standard + Ethernet (Copper & Fiber . 51G(1).0. 49P. 51G(2). 51N(2). RGF(1). 897800A3. Winding 2 . IEC60870-5-103 Standard + Ethernet (Copper & Fiber .5 A) 1 A sensitive ground CTs (Winding 1 .MTRJ). DNP3. 51N(2). The selection of the P1 phase CT option enables only the selection of the G1 or S1 ground CT option. 50N(1) Extended configuration: 87T. 51_2(2) . DNP3. Winding 2 .1 A. Winding 2 . 50G(2). Winding 2 . 50P(2).PDF 1–6 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . Modbus TCP/IP. The selected phase and ground CTs apply to both windings. 49P Advanced configuration: 87T. IEC 60870-5-104. Rear RS485: Modbus RTU.5 A) 24 to 48 V DC 110 to 250 V DC/110 to 230 V AC Standard configuration: 87T.5 A. RGF(2) Standard: Front USB. Figure 3: Order Codes 345 345 * – E Interface Phase Currents * * | | P1 | P5 | G5 S1 S5 * | | | | | | L H E * | | | | | | | | | S E M N N * | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | S 1 2 3 * | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | N E E E * | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | D N * | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | N H 345 Transformer Protection Relay 1 A 3-phase CTs (Winding 1 . 50P(2).5 A. 87T-50.5 A) 1 A standard ground CTs (Winding 1 . 51G(2).5 A.0.345 ORDER CODES CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION 345 order codes The information to specify a 345 relay is provided in the following Order Code figure. 50G(2).

........................................................................005 to 3...........................................................CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION SPECIFICATIONS Specifications NOTE: Specifications are subject to change without notice.....................0........................97 to 99% of Pickup @ I > 0.....................01 x CT Dropout Level: ..............................................................................Instantaneous... NOTE Password security PASSWORD SECURITY Master Reset Password: .0...................................per CT input SENSITIVE GROUND TIMED OVERCURRENT (51SG) Ground Current:.......per CT input 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1–7 ..............02 x CT @ I < 1 x CT Curve Shape:.... whichever is greater Level Accuracy:....................Instantaneous............................................................1 s base curve) IEC Curve A/B/C/Short IAC Extremely/Very/Inverse/Short Curve Multiplier:..................................97 to 99% of Pickup @ I > 1 x CT Pickup ..........0................1 Reset Time: .. Linear Time Delay Accuracy: .................................................0.....Fundamental Pickup Level:......05 to 20.........................................Fundamental Pickup Level:....... Linear Time Delay Accuracy: ..0................01 Reset Time: ..1 x CT Pickup ...........001 x CT Dropout Level: ..............................3 to 10 alpha-numeric characters for local and remote access Protection PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND/NEGATIVE SEQUENCE TIMED OVERCURRENT (51P/51N/51G/ 51_2) Ground Current:............05 to 20................000 x CT in steps of 0...........8 to 10 alpha-numeric characters Settings Password:..................................02 x CT @ I < 0..............±3% of expected inverse time or 1 cycle................... whichever is greater Level Accuracy:.................................................1 x CT Curve Shape:.......3 to 10 alpha-numeric characters for local and remote access Control Password:..............................±3% of expected inverse time or 1 cycle.........................00 x CT in steps of 0................0.........05 to 20................00 in steps of 0..0 in steps of 0...................ANSI Extremely/Very/Moderately/Normally Inverse Definite Time (0.......................................ANSI Extremely/Very/Moderately/Normally Inverse Definite Time IEC Curve A/B/C/Short IAC Extreme/Very/Inverse/Short Curve Multiplier:...........................

..................................................05 to 1..01 0..........15 to 100% in steps of 1% Slope 2 Range: .......002 to 2......................... per current inputs RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT Number of Elements: ..................02 x CT @ I <1 x CT Time Delay:.............000 xCT (with sensitive CTs) Dropout Level:............................................................ 97 to 99% of Pickup @ I > 1 x CT Pickup .....................1 x CT Time Delay:..........0 s in steps of 0....................01 Kneepoint 2: ........................................ 1....01 Slope 1 Range: ...................................................0 to 40...... 0...50 to 4...00 sec in steps of 0.02 to 20............ 1........... Dual Slope............. No time delay) Time Delay Accuracy:..002 x CT @ I < 0............ Average 5th Harmonic Inhibit Level:...................00 xCT in steps of 0............00 x CT in steps of 0................................. <30 ms Level Accuracy:..................0% insteps of 0.................00 sec in steps of 0... 0.....0.............................. 1....................................................................................... 97 to 98% of Pickup Operate Time: ................................ 97 to 98% of Pickup Operate Time: ............. 0 to 1 cycle (Time Delay selected) Level Accuracy:.......... < 30 ms @ 0 ms time delay Level Accuracy:.....000 x CT in steps of 0............... 0................ 0.............................................. No time delay) <35 ms @ 50Hz (I > 2.............................................................................................. 3................................. <30 ms @ 60Hz (I > 2........... 2 Pickup Level: ..........002 to 2................................................ 97 to 98% of Pickup Slope Range: ..00 x CT in steps of 0......................................... per current inputs 1–8 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL ..............................01 Operate Time: ......................................................1% 2nd Harmonic Inhibit Mode:.....0 x PKP........................................... 0..................02 to 20...................1% Dropout Level:..........00 x CT in steps of 0..............00 to 20............0 to 40.............. per CT input SENSITIVE GROUND INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (50SG) Pickup Level (Gnd IOC):........................................... < 20 ms (no harmonics inhibits selected) < 30 ms (harmonics inhibits selected) Level Accuracy:........ 0 to 1 cycle (Time Delay selected) Level Accuracy:.........................0 x PKP..0 x PKP...... 0.00 to 600.. Fundamental Pickup Accuracy:...50 to 100% in steps of 1% Kneepoint 1: ...0% insteps of 0.............001 x CT Dropout Level:.......................... per CT input TRANSFORMER THERMAL PROTECTION (49) Current:...... <30 ms @ 60Hz (I > 2..............00 to 10.........1 x CT Pickup .......... ±3% of expected time........01 Operate Time: ..............................05 to 20.......00 to 300........00xCT in steps of 0..........01 2nd Harmonic Inhibit Level:.. No time delay) <35 ms @ 50Hz (I > 2..................... No time delay) Time Delay Accuracy:...01 x CT Dropout Level:...........................................................................................00 to 300..01 0.................................................................................. 0..................................................5 x PKP TRANSFORMER PERCENT DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION (87T) Differential/Restraint Characteristic:.................... Dual Breakpoint Minimum Pickup Level: ................. or 30 ms (whichever is greater) @ I > 1....00 xCT in steps of 0. Per-phase....... 0..01xCT Dropout Level:.......................0................................................................01 Operate Time: ... Fundamental Pickup Level: ...................SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND/NEGATIVE SEQUENCE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (50P/50N/50G/50_2) Current:............................ 0......00 x CT in steps of 0.................... per current inputs Timing Accuracy:....0 x PKP......................................... 0 to 100% in steps of 1 Pickup Delay: ...................................... per current inputs TRANSFORMER INSTANTANEOUS DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION (50/87) Pickup Level: ..............005 to 3. 97 to 99% of Pickup @ I > 0..... 2-out-of-three....000 xCT (with sensitive CTs) GND Supervision Level:.......................

...................RAM ..........................................relay name...................... retained for 3 days 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1–9 .. per-phase differential current................................... negative sequence current..........................2 to 20 × CT ±20% of reading from 0.........1 A or 5 A (must be specified with order P1G1 or P5G5) Configurable 1 A or 5 A (must be specified with order P0G0) Nominal frequency: ...................battery backed up................................1 second at 100 × rated current 2 seconds at 40 × rated current continuous at 3 × rated current Data capture TRANSIENT RECORDER Buffer size:........50/60 Hz Burden: ........ order code......1 to 6000 A Range: .............. restraint current............................................................. of channels:..........0.............................002 to 0...................RAM ....................................................3 s No..............±1% of reading at 1× CT ±3% of reading from 0.........19 × CT CT withstand: ....002 to 3 × CT Input type: ............. ground current...............32 samples per cycle Triggers:...................... date of event.......AC input channels Contact input state Contact output state Virtual input state Logic element state Data storage:........event number..................1 second at 100 × rated current 2 seconds at 40 × rated current continuous at 3 × rated current SENSITIVE GROUND CURRENT INPUT CT Primary:........................................ ground differential current...........................................................1× CT ±3% of reading from 0.................................. firmware revision Content:......................<0..................................... sensitive ground current............................02 to 3 × CT ±20% of reading from 0............0...............................................................battery backed-up.....................................................................................±1% of reading at 0................................... of buffers: ................... cause of event............ perphase differential second harmonic current..........................1x192.................. 6x32 No.......................................................1 to 600 A Range: ........................................1 VA at rated load Accuracy: .......Manual Command Contact Input Virtual Input Logic Element Element Pickup/Trip/Dropout/Alarm Data:....... thermal capacity Data Storage:..... 3x64...............................................................................................CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION SPECIFICATIONS Metering PHASE & GROUND CURRENT INPUTS CT Primary:..........................50/60 Hz Burden: ........ retained for 3 days EVENT RECORDER Number of events:....14 Sampling rate:......019 × CT CT withstand: . neutral current...............................................................1 VA at rated load Accuracy: ...........................02 to 0....................256 Header: ..........................................................................................02 to 20 × CT Input type: ..<0............1 A or 5 A (must be specified with order P1S1 or P5S5) Configurable 1 A or 5 A (must be specified with order P0S0) Nominal frequency: .................................per-phase current........................

........ Date and time Daylight Saving Time IRIG-B: ........... 300 VDC........................................................... 1 to 60 min in steps of 1 min Temperature Dropout:......... 97 to 98% of pickup Timer 1 Delay: ............................05 to 20...... 84........SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION CLOCK Setup: ........................ wet contact 1–10 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL ................... 10 Selectable thresholds: ........................................................ 2 mA.................... Timer 2) Level Accuracy:..... Auto-detect (DC shift or Amplitude Modulated) Amplitude modulated: 1 to 10 V pk-pk DC shift: 1 to 10 V DC Input impedance: 40 kOhm ± 10% RTC Accuracy: ± 1 min / month at 25°C Controls LOGIC ELEMENTS Number of logic elements:.... 1/2 cycle Debounce time: ..............................00 s in steps of 0......00 to 1.................03 to 1.............................. connected to Class 2 source Type: .................................... 166 VDC Recognition time:....................... 20°C to 80°C in steps of 1°C Low Temperature Pickup: ......00 s in steps of 0........................... 0 to 60000 ms in steps of 1 ms Dropout timer:.................................................................... 0 to 1 cycle (Timer 1................................ 17....................................... NOT..................................01 s Timer 2 Delay: .............01 x CT Dropout Level:.00 x CT in steps of 0. 0........... in steps of 1 ms Maximum input voltage & continuous current draw:............................................................. 0.............................................. 0............ ±1 second Inputs/Outputs CONTACT INPUTS Inputs: ........................................ 3 Supported operations: ......................................................... AND............................................................................. Pickup / Dropout timers Pickup timer: ........... Configurable 90 to 98% of pickup Temperature Accuracy: ............................................... -40°C to 20°C in steps of 1°C Time Delay:..... opto-isolated inputs External switch: ... 33............................. 1 to 64 ms................................................. ±10°C Timing Accuracy:.................... selectable....... 3 Block inputs per element: ..................................................... 0 to 60000 ms in steps of 1 ms BREAKER FAILURE Pickup Level: ...01 s Time Delay Accuracy:............................................ OR..... per CT input AMBIENT TEMPERATURE High Temperature Pickup:.................................... 16 Trigger source inputs per element: ................................................................................

.<8 ms Continuous current:...................10 A Make and carry for 0......................................................10 A Make and carry for 0.............................silver-alloy Operate time:.....................................24 V / 10 A 48 V / 6 A 125 V / 0...........................2s:.0...................15 W nominal.........60 to 300 VAC (50 and 60 Hz) 84 to 300 VDC Ride-through time: ..30 A per ANSI C37...............................................24 V / 10 A 48 V / 6 A 125 V / 0...............................99 s in steps of 0................................01 Power supply HIGH RANGE POWER SUPPLY Nominal:................................ 28 VA maximum 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1–11 ..1 to 2........................................................20 to 60 VDC ALL RANGES Voltage withstand: .........................................................................................................5 A 125 V / 0.................5 A 250 V / 0....277 VAC / 10 A TRIP SEAL-IN Relay 1 trip seal-in:...........2 A Break (DC resistive):........silver-alloy Operate time:.........3 A Break (AC inductive): .30 A per ANSI C37.....00 to 9......................................................................277 VAC / 10 A FORM-A VOLTAGE MONITOR Applicable voltage:...................................0..3 A 250 V / 0......................................................24 V / 1 A 48 V / 0.....................20 to 250 VDC Trickle current:............5 mA FORM-C RELAYS Configuration:.... L/R=40 ms):........................................CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION SPECIFICATIONS FORM-A RELAYS Configuration:..............01 Relay 2 trip seal-in:...................................5 A 125 V / 0..........................2s:.3 A Break (AC inductive): .2 × highest nominal voltage for 10 ms Power consumption: .....................120 to 240 VAC 125 to 250 VDC Range: ...................24 to 48 VDC Range: ...................................3 A 250 V / 0.......................................35 ms LOW RANGE POWER SUPPLY Nominal:.......99 s in steps of 0........<8 ms Continuous current:...........................................5 (five) electromechanical Contact material: ........90 Break (DC inductive...90 Break (DC inductive........5 A 250 V / 0..... L/R=40 ms):...................................720 VA @ 250 VAC Pilot duty A300 Break (AC resistive): .....720 VA @ 250 VAC Pilot duty A300 Break (AC resistive): ...............................2 (two) electromechanical Contact material: .................................................................................................24 V / 1 A 48 V / 0...2 A Break (DC resistive):..00 to 9............................................................................................................ 20 W maximum 20 VA nominal..................................

. 115 kbps 1–12 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL ............... 1 ms typical Parity: ... Modbus TCP..................................................................0 Data transfer rate: .............................................................................................................................0...................................................... None.......................................SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION Communications SERIAL RS485 port: .............................................................................. up to 115 kbps Response time: ............................................................. 9 dB Maximum input power:....... iec 60870-5-104......... iec 60870-5-104.......... IEC 61850 GOOSE Transmit power: ..................... -20 dBm Receiver sensitivity: .......... Odd............. DNP3.....................................................................................8 dBm Typical distance: ............................................................ IEC 61850 GOOSE ETHERNET (FIBER) Fiber type: ......................................................................................... Compliant with USB 2.......... -31 dBm Power budget:........................ Opto-coupled Baud rates: ....0.........25 miles) Duplex:.................................... 100 MB Multi-mode Wavelength:............................ 1300 nm Connector: ....... -11.......... half/full USB Standard specification:.......................... Modbus TCP................................................... 2 kV ETHERNET (COPPER) Modes: .... DNP 3.... RJ-45 Protocol:............... 1200 m (4000 feet) Isolation: ....... IEC 60870-5-103 Maximum distance:.......... MTRJ Protocol:......................................................................................................0....................... Modbus RTU.......................... Even Protocol:. 2 km (1................................................................................................ DNP3............ 10/100 MB (auto-detect) Connector: ........

250/300cycle interrupts 2.3 UL508 UL C22.70.90.1Mhz 20V/m 80-1Ghz 8KV CD/ 15KV AD e83849 NKCR e83849 NKCR7 e83849 NKCR 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1–13 .5KV CM.5Khz 2.80% dips.1 IEEE/ANSIC37.90.1 IEEE/ANSI C37. 1KV DM Level 4 Level 3 Class A and B Level 3 & 4 Level 3 Class A & B 15% ripple . 200ms interupts Class A Class 1 Class 1 Class 2 Level 5 Level 4 Level 4 0.2-14 UL1053 REFERENCE STANDARD TEST LEVEL 2.5KV. 2. 1KV DM Level 4 15% ripple IP40 front . IP10 Back -40C 16 hrs 85C 16hrs 6day variant 2 4KV.90.90.CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION SPECIFICATIONS Testing and certification TESTING AND CERTIFICATION TEST Dielectric voltage withstand Impulse voltage withstand Damped Oscillatory Electrostatic Discharge RF immunity Fast Transient Disturbance Surge Immunity Conducted RF Immunity Power Frequency Immunity Voltage interruption and Ripple DC Radiated & Conducted Emissions Sinusoidal Vibration Shock & Bump Seismic Power magnetic Immunity Pulse Magnetic Immunity Damped Magnetic Immunity Voltage Dip & interruption Damped Oscillatory Conducted RF Immunity 0150khz Voltage Ripple Ingress Protection Environmental (Cold) Environmental (Dry heat) Relative Humidity Cyclic EFT Damped Oscillatory RF Immunity ESD Safety EN60255-5 IEC61000-4-18IEC60255-22-1 EN61000-4-2/IEC60255-22-2 EN61000-4-3/IEC60255-22-3 EN61000-4-4/IEC60255-22-4 EN61000-4-5/IEC60255-22-5 EN61000-4-6/IEC60255-22-6 EN61000-4-7/IEC60255-22-7 IEC60255-11 CISPR11 /CISPR22/ IEC60255-25 IEC60255-21-1 IEC60255-21-2 IEC60255-21-3 IEC61000-4-8 IEC61000-4-9 IEC61000-4-10 IEC61000-4-11 IEC61000-4-12 IEC61000-4-16 IEC61000-4-17 IEC60529 IEC60068-2-1 IEC60068-2-2 IEC60068-2-30 IEEE/ANSI C37.2 IEEE/ANSIC37.3KV 5KV 2.40.5KV CM.

No 14 ISO9001 1–14 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .SPECIFICATIONS CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION APPROVALS Applicable Council Directive Low voltage directive CE compliance EMC Directive According to EN60255-5 / EN60255-27 / EN61010-1 EN60255-26 / EN50263 EN61000-6-2 UL508 North America ISO cULus Manufactured under a registered quality program UL1053 C22.2.

Additional dimensions for mounting and panel cutouts are shown in the following sections. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2–1 . including dimensions for mounting and information on module withdrawal and insertion. Dimensions The dimensions of the 345 are shown below.345 Transformer Protection System Chapter 2: Installation Installation Mechanical installation This section describes the mechanical installation of the 345 system.

MECHANICAL INSTALLATION CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION Figure 1: 345 dimensions – Drawout 2–2 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

firmware revision.CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION MECHANICAL INSTALLATION Figure 2: 345 dimensions .Non-drawout unit Product identification The product identification label is located on the side panel of the 345 . and date of manufacture. serial number. Figure 3: 345 label 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2–3 . This label indicates the product model.

MECHANICAL INSTALLATION CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION Mounting Standard panel mount CAUTION: The standard panel mount and cutout dimensions are illustrated below.Drawout 2–4 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . Figure 4: Standard panel mounting . To avoid the potential for personal injury due to fire hazards. ensure the unit is mounted in a safe location and/or within an appropriate enclosure.

The relay can now be inserted and can be panel wired. 2. 3. slide the empty case into the cutout until the bottom tab clicks into place (see above). From the rear of the panel screw the case into the panel at the 8 screw positions shown above. These tabs are located on the sides of the case and appear as shown above. bend the retaining "V"tabs outward. to about 90°. If added security is required. From the front of the panel.CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION MECHANICAL INSTALLATION Figure 5: Standard Panel mounting .Non-drawout Figure 6: Mounting tabs (optional) “V” TABS BOTTOM TAB 1. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2–5 .

25mm) 4.9 mm ±0.000” ±0.010” (104.010” (101.6 mm ±0.MECHANICAL INSTALLATION CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION Figure 7: Panel cutout dimensions 5.000” ±0.25 mm) 2–6 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .25 mm) C L 6.25 mm) C Φ 0.100” ±0.010” (152.350” ±0.3 mm ±0.25 mm) 4.200” (5.1 mm) L 6.010” (175.900” ±0.1 mm ±0.4 mm ±0.010” (135.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2–7 . IF THIS IS NOT THE CASE. (QTY:8) TIGHTENING TORQUE: 15 IN LB THE HANDLE MUST BE ROTATED 90⁰ WHILE SLIDING THE 345 DRAW-OUT UNIT INTO THE CAPTIVE UNIT KEEP THE HANDLE IN ITS ROTATED POSITION UNTIL THE DRAW-OUT UNIT IS INSERTED COMPLETELY PUSH THE HANDLE DOWN AND TIGHTEN THE SCREW UNTIL THE HANDLE IS PARALLEL WITH THE FRONT PANEL SURFACE NOTE: IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE USER TO ENSURE THAT THE EQUIPMENT IS INSTALLED. THEN THE SAFETY PROTECTION PROVIDED BY THE EQUIPMENT MAY BE IMPAIRED. AND USED FOR ITS INTENDED FUNCTION. IN THE MANNER SPECIFIED BY THE MANUFACTURER.CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION MECHANICAL INSTALLATION Drawout unit withdrawal and insertion Figure 8: Unit withdrawal and insertion diagram 8 . OPERATED.32X3/8IN P/HD PHIL BLK GE PART # 1408-0306.

CDR 2–8 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION Electrical installation Figure 9: Typical wiring diagram – Drawout TWO WINDING TRANSFORMER WINDING 2 WINDING 1 A B C E5 D5 E6 D6 E7 D7 E8 D8 E9 D9 E10 D10 E11 D11 E12 D12 IA IA IB IB IC IC IG IG IA IA IB IB IC IC IG IG POWER SUPPLY B1 A1 345 Transformer Protection System Winding 1 Breaker 52a Aux Contacts 52b Winding 2 Breaker Aux Contacts 52b 52a - + CONTROL .POWER chassis B2 gnd GROUND BUS A2 + C1 52a W1 BKR (CI #1) C2 52b W1 BKR (CI #2) C3 52a W2 BKR (CI #3) C4 52b W2 BKR (CI #4) C5 INPUT 5 C6 INPUT 6 C7 INPUT 7 C8 INPUT 8 C9 INPUT 9 C10 INPUT 10 C11 COMMON C12 CHASSIS GND Front Panel USB TYPE B GND STUD + 52a W1 BKR TRIP COIL DIGITAL INPUTS 1 TRIP V B3 A3 B4 A4 V TRIP CIRCUIT W1 BKR + 52a W2 BKR TRIP COIL 2 TRIP TRIP CIRCUIT W2 BKR B5 A5 B6 A6 B7 A7 B8 A8 3 AUXILIARY 4 AUXILIARY OUTPUT CONTACTS SHOWN WITH NO CONTROL POWER USB 4 WIRE USB 5 AUXILIARY Rear Panel ETHERNET RJ45 mTRJ B9 A9 B10 A10 B11 A11 B12 A12 COMMUNICATIONS 6 AUXILIARY 7 CRITICAL FAILURE RELAY IRIG-B 10/100 BASE-T100 BASE-FX RS485 4 WIRE ETHERNET .+ .+ OPTIONAL F2 F1 F5 F4 F3 F6 GROUND BUS 897744.

+ .+ OPTIONAL C2 C1 C5 C4 C3 C6 GROUND BUS 897745.CDR 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2–9 .POWER GND STUD + GROUND BUS A1 + TRIP COIL 52a W1 BKR DIGITAL INPUTS 1 TRIP V A2 A3 A4 A5 V TRIP CIRCUIT W1 BKR + 52a W2 BKR TRIP COIL 2 TRIP TRIP CIRCUIT W2 BKR A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 3 AUXILIARY 4 AUXILIARY OUTPUT CONTACTS SHOWN WITH NO CONTROL POWER USB 4 WIRE USB 5 AUXILIARY Rear Panel ETHERNET RJ45 mTRJ A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 COMMUNICATIONS 6 AUXILIARY 7 CRITICAL FAILURE RELAY IRIG-B 10/100 BASE-T100 BASE-FX RS485 4 WIRE ETHERNET .CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION Figure 10: Typical wiring diagram .Non-drawout TWO WINDING TRANSFORMER WINDING 2 WINDING 1 A B C E5 D5 E6 D6 E7 D7 E8 D8 E9 D9 E10 D10 E11 D11 E12 D12 IA IA IB IB IC IC IG IG IA IA IB IB IC IC IG IG POWER SUPPLY L N 345 Transformer Protection System Winding 1 Breaker 52a Aux Contacts 52b Winding 2 Breaker 52a Aux Contacts 52b B1 52a W1 BKR (CI #1) B2 52b W1 BKR (CI #2) B3 52a W2 BKR (CI #3) B4 52b W2 BKR (CI #4) B5 INPUT 5 B6 INPUT 6 B7 INPUT 7 B8 INPUT 8 B9 INPUT 9 B10 INPUT 10 B11 COMMON B12 CHASSIS GND Front Panel USB TYPE B chassis gnd + CONTROL .

1 2 3 SCREW WASHER TERMINAL BLOCK LOWER TERMINAL DIVIDER Figure 12: CORRECT INSTALLATION METHOD 2–10 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .. both lugs should be "right side up" as shown in the picture below. This is to ensure the adjacent lower terminal block does not interfere with the lug body. Figure 11: Orient the lugs correctly..ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION Terminal identification NOTE: NOTE When installing two lugs on one terminal.

CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION Figure 13: INCORRECT INSTALLATION METHOD (lower lug reversed) 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2–11 .

Drawout F 1 POWER SUPPLY 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 W1 TRIP N/O W1 TRIP OPTV W2 TRIP COM AUX 3 N/C AUX 3 N/O AUX 4 COM AUX 5 N/C AUX 5 N/O AUX 6 COM CRIT FAIL N/C CRIT FAIL N/O POWER SUPPLY + CHASSIS GND W1 TRIP COM W2 TRIP N/O W2 TRIP OPTV AUX 3 COM AUX 4 N/C AUX 4 N/O AUX 5 COM AUX 6 N/C AUX 6 N/O CRIT FAIL COM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4 INPUT 5 INPUT 6 INPUT 7 INPUT 8 INPUT 9 INPUT 10 INPUT COM CHASSIS GND W1 PHASE A CT W1 PHASE B CT W1 PHASE C CT W1 GND CT W2 PHASE A CT W2 PHASE B CT W2 PHASE C CT W2 GND CT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 IRIG-B + IRIG-B RS485 + RS485 RS485 COM CHASSIS GND RESERVED RESERVED ■W1 PHASE A CT 5 ■W1 PHASE B CT 6 ■W1 PHASE C CT 7 ■W1 GND CT 8 ■W2 PHASE A CT 9 ■W2 PHASE B CT 10 ■W2 PHASE C CT 11 ■W2 GND CT 12 A B C D E 2–12 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION Figure 14: Terminal Identification .

Note the solid square markings shown with all instrument transformer connections. The phase sequence is user programmable for either ABC or ACB rotation.3 mm2): Single wire termination with/without 9. E (Non-drawout case design).1 mm 2 to 0.: • • • • 12 AWG to 22 AWG (3. CAUTION: 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2–13 . Suggested wiring screw tightening torque. and terminal blocks D. IMPORTANT: The phase and ground current inputs will correctly measure up to 20 times the current input’s nominal rating.Non-drawout POWER SUPPLY + CHASSIS GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 POWER SUPPLY - W1 TRIP COM W2 TRIP N/O W2 TRIP OPTV AUX 3 COM AUX 4 N/C AUX 4 N/O AUX 5 COM AUX 6 N/C AUX 6 N/O CRIT FAIL COM W1 TRIP N/O W1 TRIP OPTV W2 TRIP COM AUX 3 N/C AUX 3 N/O AUX 4 COM AUX 5 N/C AUX 5 N/O AUX 6 COM CRIT FAIL N/C CRIT FAIL N/O 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4 INPUT 5 INPUT 6 INPUT 7 INPUT 8 INPUT 9 INPUT 10 INPUT COM CHASSIS GND 5 W1 PHASE A CT 6 W1 PHASE B CT 7 W1 PHASE C CT 8 W1 GND CT W1 PHASE A CT W1 PHASE B CT W1 PHASE C CT W1 GND CT W2 PHASE A CT W2 PHASE B CT W2 PHASE C CT W2 GND&T ■ 5 ■ 6 ■ 7 ■ 8 ■ 9 ■ 10 ■ 11 ■ 12 9 W2 PHASE A CT 10 W2 PHASE B CT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 IRIG-B + IRIG-B RS485 + RS485 RS485 COM CHASSIS GND RESERVED RESERVED 11 W2 PHASE C CT 12 W2 GND&T Wire range Use the following guideline when selecting wires or lugs to connect to terminal blocks A.53 mm (0. shown in the Typical Wiring Diagram. tighten to 12 in-lb (1.375”) maximum diameter ring terminals. This becomes apparent if the pickup level is set above the nominal CT rating.53 mm (0. 14 AWG to 22 AWG (2. each with an isolating transformer. 14 AWG to 22 AWG (2.375”) maximum diameter ring terminals.3 mm2): Multiple wire termination with matching wire sizes and stranding. Current inputs The 345 relay has eight (8) channels for AC current inputs. Current transformers with 1 to 6000 A primaries may be used.3 mm2 to 0.CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION Figure 15: Terminal Identification . Time overcurrent curves become horizontal lines for currents above the 20 × CT rating. Two wires maximum per circuit.35 N-m). There are no internal ground connections on the current inputs. Unmatched CTs may result in equipment damage or inadequate protection.CD. Two ring terminals maximum per circuit. CAUTION: Verify that the relay’s nominal input current of 1 A or 5 A matches the secondary rating of the connected CTs. the user must follow the instrument transformer polarities.3 mm2): Multiple wire termination with 9.B. E (Drawout case design).1 mm2 to 0. Phase sequence and transformer polarity For correct operation of the relay features.

CDR 2–14 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . On ungrounded systems it is connected residually with the phase current inputs. NOTE The ground CT wiring in the figure below. The ground inputs (Terminals D8 and E8 for W1. The Winding 2 ground CT wiring (terminals D12. Figure 16: Ground/Sensitive Ground wiring Transformer Winding 1 A B C E5 E6 E7 A D5 B D6 C D7 SR345 PHASE CURRENT INPUTS D8 N E8 IG E8 IG D8 N E8 IG D8 N GROUND GROUND GROUND GROUND CURRENT INPUT GROUND CURRENT INPUT WITH ZERO SEQUENCE CT GROUND CURRENT INPUT WITH RESIDUAL CONNECTION 897730. E12) is similar. In cases where the relay is equipped with sensitive ground CT (terminals D8 and E8 for W1. NOTE: The Sensitive Ground input must only be used on systems where the maximum ground current does not exceed 100 times the rated current for 1 second. When using the residual connection set the GROUND CT PRIMARY setpoint to a value equal to the PHASE CT PRIMARY setpoint. shows 3 possible ways for wiring the Winding 1 ground CT (terminals D8.one per winding . Before making ground connections. Time overcurrent curves become horizontal lines for currents above the 20 × CT rating. they MUST be short circuited. consider that the relay automatically calculates the neutral (residual) current from the sum of the three phase current phasors. The sensitive ground current input can be connected to a Zero Sequence CT for increased sensitivity and accuracy when physically possible in the system. E8). and D12 and E12 for W2) the sensitive ground current input is intended for use with a CT in a source neutral of a high-impedance grounded system. or in the neutral of wye-connected source CTs. the SENSTV GND CT PRIMARY setpoint should be programmed to a value equal to the PHASE CT PRIMARY setpoint. In this case. or on ungrounded systems. This becomes apparent if the pickup level is set above the nominal CT rating. The following figures show three possible ground connections (or three possible sensitive ground connections). and D12 and E12 for W2) are used in conjunction with a Zero Sequence CT as source. Before working on CTs. CAUTION: Ground and sensitive ground CT inputs Two ground inputs .ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION CAUTION: IMPORTANT: The phase and ground current inputs will correctly measure up to 20 times the current input’s nominal rating.are referred to throughout this manual as the Ground Current or Sensitive Ground Current inputs.

NOTE CAUTION: NOTE: 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2–15 .CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION For Winding 2 ground CT. or other protective device must be connected near to the equipment. The installed power supply’s operating range will be one of the following: LO: 24 to 48 V DC (Range: 20 to 60 V DC) HI: 125 to 250 V DC/120 to 240 V AC (Range: 84 to 250 V DC/66 to 265 V AC) CAUTION: The relay should be connected directly to the ground bus. must be on load side 898733. Figure 17: Zero sequence core balance (CT) installation UNSHIELDED CABLE Source B C Ground connection to neutral must be on the source side N G A SHIELDED CABLE Source B C Stress cone shields A Ground outside CT LOAD To ground.CDR LOAD Control power CAUTION: Control power supplied to the relay must match the installed power supply range. Belden catalog number 8660 is suitable. Isolate power prior to servicing. All grounds MUST be connected for safe. shielding and bonding cable should be used. normal operation regardless of control power supply type. As a minimum. braided. using the shortest practical path. An external switch. damage to the unit may occur. are shown in the figure below. Zero sequence CT installation The various CT connections and the exact placement of a Zero Sequence CT. The label found on the relay specifies its order code or model number. circuit breaker. Twisted pair cabling on the Zero Sequence CT is recommended. 96 strands of number 34 AWG should be used. for ground fault current detection. use relay terminals D12-E12 in the same wiring configuration as shown above for Winding 1. A tinned copper. If the applied voltage does not match.

In addition. A wet contact has one side connected to the positive terminal of an external DC power supply. The maximum external source voltage for this arrangement is 300 V DC. The other side of this contact is connected to the required contact input terminal. four general purpose relays (Auxiliary Relays 3 to 6). CAUTION: Ensure correct polarity on contact input connections and do not connect any contact input circuits to ground or else relay hardware may be damaged. These contacts are wet only. The special purpose relays have fixed operating characteristics and the general purpose relays can be configured by the user.CDR Contact inputs External contacts can be connected to the relay’s ten (10) digital inputs. the negative side of the external source must be connected to the relay’s DC negative rail at Terminal C11. Figure 19: Wet contact connections Wet Contact Connection 345 RELAY Contact Input 1 C1 V DC Power Supply Contact Input Common C11 LOGICIN. 84. The inputs can be programmed to different thresholds depending on the DC voltage (17. 2–16 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . and a Critical Failure relay.ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION Figure 18: Control power connection CONTROL POWER + - HEAVY COPPER CONDUCTOR OR BRAIDED WIRE SWITCHGEAR GROUND BUS B2 CHASSIS GROUND A1 - B1 + CONTROL POWER RELAY 898735. 166). 33.CDR Trip1 and Trip2 output relays The 345 relay is equipped with seven electromechanical relays: two special relays designed for Winding 1 Breaker trip and Winding 2 Breaker trip.

the circuit integrity for the Trip coil is effectively normal. NOTE 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2–17 . it will remain operational until the requested change of breaker state is confirmed by a breaker auxiliary contact and the initiating condition has reset. 52b Contact Configured Yes No Yes No Relay Operation Trip Relay remains operational until 52b indicates an open breaker. Example 1: The figures below show the two different connections of the breaker Trip coil to the relay’s trip output #1 terminals (output #2 Trip coil monitoring) for both no voltage monitoring and voltage monitoring of the trip circuit integrity. • The Trip relays reset after the breaker is detected in a state corresponding to the command. use the relay terminals B4 and A4 to connect the Trip coil. If the initiating feature resets. The voltage monitor is connected across each of the two Form A contacts. the Trip Relay is de-energized after either the delay programmed in the Breaker Failure feature. or 100 ms after the feature causing the trip resets. As long as the current through the Voltage Monitor is above the threshold of the trickle currents (see Technical Specification for Form A output relays).CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION Operation of the two Trip output relays is designed to be controlled by the state of the circuit breaker as monitored by a 52a or 52b contact. If neither of the breaker auxiliary contacts. Trip Relay remains operational until 52a indicates an open breaker. • • • 52a Contact Configured Yes Yes No No Breaker monitoring (Trip coil monitoring) is performed by a built-in voltage monitor on Form A output relays: #1 Trip. is programmed to a contact input. NOTE: To monitor the Trip coil circuit integrity. and the relay effectively detects healthy current through the circuit. 52a nor 52b. a Trip alarm will be set and the “ALARM” and “MAINTENANCE” LEDs will be on. Trip Relay operates until either the Breaker Failure delay expires (if the Breaker Failure element is enabled). and provide a jumper between terminals A2 (optional voltage) and A3. and #2 Trip. but the breaker does not change state. and B5 for #2 Trip coil monitoring. or if in general a high resistance is detected in the circuitry. In order to do this. an external jumper must be connected between terminals A2 and A3 for #1 Trip coil monitoring. or/and B4. use the relay terminals A2 and B3 to connect the Trip coil. If the Trip coil circuit gets disconnected. When a relay feature sends a command to one of these special relays. Trip Relay remains operational until 52b indicates an open breaker. or a default interval of 100 ms after the initiating input resets. Note that the default setting for the seal-in time is 40 ms. NOTE NOTE: To monitor the Trip coil circuit integrity. the output relay will be reset after a default interval of 2 seconds. and provide a jumper between terminals B4 (optional voltage) and B5. If a delay is programmed for the Trip contact seal-in time. then this delay is added to the reset time.

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION Figure 20: Relay #1 Trip and Relay #2 Trip circuits with no voltage monitoring DC + DC + Output Relay 1 (TRIP) A2 B3 Output Relay 2 (TRIP) B4 A4 V A3 V B5 52a contact 52a contact Trip Coil Trip Coil 897785. NOTE Figure 21: Relay #1 Trip and Relay #2 Trip circuits with voltage monitoring DC + DC + Output Relay 1 (TRIP) A2 B3 External jumper Output Relay 2 (TRIP) B4 A4 External jumper V A3 V B5 52a contact 52a contact Trip Coil 897786.cdr Trip Coil DC - DC - 2–18 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .cdr DC NOTE: DC - All AUX contacts are shown when the breaker is open.

Correct polarity is also essential. PLC. Suitable cable should have a characteristic impedance of 120 ohms (for example.) IED ZT (*) RS485 + RS485 COMMON LAST DEVICE 897738. additional serial channels must be added. The last device at each end of the daisy-chain should be terminated with a 120 ohm ¼ watt resistor in series with a 1 nF capacitor across the positive and negative terminals. Commercially available repeaters will allow for transmission distances greater than 1200 meters. Voltage differences between remote ends of the communication link are not uncommon. OR PERSONAL COMPUTER GROUND THE SHIELD AT THE SCADA/PLC/COMPUTER ONLY OR THE 350C ONLY E3 COMMON RS485 + (*) TERMINATING IMPEDANCE AT EACH END (typically 120 ohms and 1 nF) RS485 - IED COMMON UP TO 32 350C OR OTHER IEDs.). Internally. it is imperative that the common terminals of each RS485 port are tied together and grounded only once. either internally or externally.CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION Serial communications Figure 22: RS485 wiring diagram SHIELD TWISTED PAIR ZT (*) OPTOCOUPLER 345 IED E2 D2 RS485 + OPTOCOUPLER RS485 DATA DATA COM SCADA. For this reason. CAUTION: To ensure that all devices in a daisy-chain are at the same potential. Failure to do so may result in intermittent or failed communications. Ground the shield at one point only. Up to 32 345 IEDs can be daisy-chained together on a communication channel without exceeding the driver capability. at the master or at the 345 . Avoid star or stub connected configurations.CDR One two-wire RS485 port is provided. The source computer/PLC/SCADA system should have similar transient protection devices installed. Observing these guidelines will ensure a reliable communication system immune to system transients. to avoid ground loops. an isolated power supply with an optocoupled data interface is used to prevent noise coupling. Each relay must be daisy-chained to the next one. The 345 IEDs must be wired with all the positive (+) terminals connected together and all the negative (–) terminals connected together. For larger systems. MAXIMUM CABLE LENGTH OF 1200 m (4000 ft. surge protection devices are internally installed across all RS485 terminals. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 2–19 . as shown in the figure above. Commercially available repeaters can also be used to add more than 32 relays on a single channel. Belden #9841) and total wire length should not exceed 1200 meters (4000 ft.

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION IRIG-B IRIG-B is a standard time code format that allows time stamping of events to be synchronized among connected devices within 1 millisecond. The IRIG time code formats are serial. this equipment may use a GPS satellite system to obtain the time reference so that devices at different geographic locations can also be synchronized.CDR TO OTHER DEVICES 2–20 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . width-modulated codes which can be either DC level shift or amplitude modulated (AM) form. Third party equipment is available for generating the IRIG-B signal. Figure 23: IRIG-B connection GPS SATELLITE SYSTEM GPS CONNECTION OPTIONAL IRIG-B TIME CODE GENERATOR (DC SHIFT OR AMPLITUDE MODULATED SIGNAL CAN BE USED) RG58/59 COAXIAL CABLE GE MULTILIN 345 RELAY E1 IRIG-B(+) RECEIVER + – D1 IRIG-B(-) 897741. The type of form is auto-detected by the 345 relay.

etc. For additional details on interface parameters (for example. Interfacing via the EnerVista SR3 Setup software. settings.). actual values. refer to the individual chapters. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–1 . This section provides an overview of the interfacing methods available with the 345 using the relay control panels and EnerVista SR3 Setup software.Digital Energy 345 Transformer Protection System Chapter 3: Interfaces Interfaces There are two methods of interfacing with the 345 Transformer Protection System. • • Interfacing via the relay keypad and display.

FRONT CONTROL PANEL INTERFACE CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES Front control panel interface Figure 1: Transformer Protection System Front Panel GE Multilin SR345 Transformer Protection System IN SERVICE TROUBLE SETPOINT GROUP 1 SETPOINT GROUP 2 TRIP ALARM PICKUP MAINTENANCE W1 BREAKER OPEN W1 BREAKER CLOSED W2 BREAKER OPEN W2 BREAKER CLOSED △ ◁ ▽ USB ▷ ▲ ENTER MENU ▼ ESCAPE RESET 897351A1.cdr 3–2 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

Pressing the Menu key during the display of default message returns the display to the last message shown before the default message appeared. The control keys are used to select the appropriate message for entering setpoints or displaying measured values. and Maintenance. system information is displayed after a user-defined period of inactivity. When the keypad and display are not being used. Quick Setup. Setpoints. pages. Any trip. The display and status indicators show the relay information automatically. LED status indicators. The USB program port is also provided for connection with a computer running the EnerVista SR3 Setup software. control keys. Use the MESSAGE ▲ and MESSAGE ▼ keys to scroll through the Page headers. Working with the Keypad The 345 display messages are organized into a Main Menu. Display The 80-character liquid crystal display (LCD) allows visibility under varied lighting conditions.CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES FRONT CONTROL PANEL INTERFACE Description The relay front panel provides an interface with a liquid crystal display. automatically overriding the default message. There are four main menus labeled Actual Values. and a USB program port. and sub-pages. Pressing the MENU key followed by the MESSAGE key scrolls through the four Main Menu headers. or pickup is displayed immediately. which appear in sequence as follows: Figure 2: The four Main Menu headers █ ACTUAL VALUES QUICK SETUP SETPOINTS MAINTENANCE Pressing the MESSAGE ► key or the ENTER key from these Main Menu pages will display the corresponding menu Page. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–3 . alarm.

. The Autoreclose Scheme is also reset with the shot counter being returned to zero and the lockout condition being cleared. latched Trip LEDs. 3–4 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL ▼ ▼ ▶ ▽ ACTUAL VALUES █ A1 STATUS A2 METERING A3 RECORDS △ ▶ 1 click A1 STATUS █ CLOCK CONTACT INPUTS OUTPUT RELAYS Back ▷ Back ▷ . The MESSAGE ◄ key can also be used to exit sub-pages and to cancel setpoint changes. They also decrement and increment numerical setpoints. The ESCAPE key is also dual purpose. The MESSAGE ▲ and MESSAGE ▼ keys are used to navigate through the sub-pages. It is used to exit the sub-pages and to cancel a setpoint change. Click to end A1 STATUS █ LOGIC ELEM SUMMARY When the display shows SETPOINTS.FRONT CONTROL PANEL INTERFACE CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES Figure 3: Typical paging operation from Main Menu selection Back ◁ 2 clicks ▼ A1 STATUS CLOCK CONTACT INPUTS █ OUTPUT RELAYS ◁ ▼ . pressing the MESSAGE ► key or the ENTER key will display the page headers of programmable parameters (referred to as setpoints in the manual). breaker operation failure. It is used to enter the sub-pages and to store altered setpoint values into memory to complete the change. The ENTER key is dual purpose. The VALUE keys are used to scroll through the possible choices of an enumerated setpoint. A summary of the setpoints and actual values pages can be found in the Chapters : Setpoints and Actual Values. Each page is broken down further into logical sub-pages of messages. This includes resetting latched output relays. pressing the MESSAGE ► key or the ENTER key displays the page headers of measured parameters (referred to as actual values in the manual). respectively. . and trip / close coil failures. When the display shows ACTUAL VALUES. The RESET key resets any latched conditions that are not currently active. The MESSAGE ► key can also be used to enter sub-pages but not to store altered setpoints.

The settings for each protection element can be edited and displayed regardless of the active group. NOTE The 345 provides also detecting the breaker status by using only one contact: either 52a or 52b. • SETPOINT GROUP 1. operating. when the relay is not programmed (Not Ready) state under S1 RELAY SETUP/INSTALLATION/RELAY STATUS. closed breaker status is determined by closed 52a contact and opened 52b contact. However. this indicator will be on continuously. • PICKUP: Amber This indicator will light ON upon pickup condition generated by any of the relay features. this indicator will be on continuously. The LED will remain steady “ON”. BREAKER CLOSED: Red/Green/Orange – programmable When the breaker is closed. The LED will reset by initiating a reset command from either the RESET pushbutton Breaker Control. The relay will turn back to “IN-SERVICE” if no major self-test error is present. • TRIP: Red This indicator turns on when the relay detects a fault and sends a trip command to the trip output relay. due to a breaker being racked out from the switchgear. • TROUBLE: Amber This LED will turn “ON”. • ALARM: Amber This LED will flash upon detection of an alarm condition. in all cases after the fault condition has cleared. The LED will automatically turn off if the alarm condition clears. unless another contact from the breaker is wired to the relay. or upon detection of a major self-test error. NOTE: It is strongly recommended to detect the breaker status by using both 52a and 52b contacts. The protection elements from group 2 will be inactive. LED status indicators • IN SERVICE: Green This LED will be continuously “ON”. If both 52a and 52b contacts are open. or latched. The indicator will turn off if no pickup condition is detected. 2: Green These LEDs indicate the group of active protection elements. and no major self-test errors have been detected. With both contacts wired to the relay. when the relay is set to “Ready” under S1 RELAY SETUP/INSTALLATION/RELAY STATUS. or communications. one should be aware that in such cases. • • BREAKER OPEN: Red/Green/Orange – programmable When the breaker is open. both the Breaker Open and Breaker Closed LED Indicators will be off. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–5 . with element functions selected as “alarm”. If setpoint group 1 is lit green.CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES FRONT CONTROL PANEL INTERFACE The MESSAGE ▲ and MESSAGE ▼ keys scroll through any active conditions in the relay. it would be impossible to distinguish between a breaker open state and breaker racked out state. if the function of the operated protection was selected as "latched alarm". only the protection elements under group 1 will be active. Breaker status indication is based on the breaker’s 52a and 52b contacts. Diagnostic messages are displayed indicating the state of protection and monitoring elements that are picked up. Visa-versa the open breaker status is determined by opened 52a contact and closed 52b contact.

The following shows the format of a typical Target Message: Figure 4: Typical target message A4 TARGET MESSAGES Cause <function> State: Operate ▼ Phase: Figure 5: Example of a Phase IOC1 Operation .Phase A Function: Trip A4 TARGET MESSAGES Ph IOC1 Trip State: Operate ▼ Phase:A Cause <Function> The first line contains information of the cause of operation (the name of the operated element). Phase: A The last line from the display shows the phase that picked up or operated. or alarms. and the element function. When the breaker is racked out. The LED will turn on upon operation of a maintenance element. If a RESET command is not performed but any of the other faceplate pushbuttons is pressed. a single 52a or 52b contact will show both breaker states. Operated. The Target Messages can be reviewed by pressing either the MESSAGE UP or MESSAGE DOWN key. the BKR CONNECTED function under SETPOINTS/S2 SYSTEM SETUP/S2 BREAKER should be programmed to an additional contact input. 3–6 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . Relay messages Target messages Target messages are automatically displayed for any active condition on the relay such as pickups. The relay displays the most recent event first. that will start timing out from the last pressed pushbutton. where they can be reviewed. • MAINTENANCE: Amber This LED may indicate both breaker or relay maintenance depending on the programmed maintenance elements.FRONT CONTROL PANEL INTERFACE CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES To clarify this ambiguity. and after 5 seconds will start rolling up the other target messages until the conditions clear and/or the RESET command is initiated. both breaker status indicators will be off. they will reappear on the screen after the time specified under the SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > S1 FRONT PANEL > MESSAGE TIMEOUT setting. When this additional input is closed. this additional breaker connected input should be open. Alarm. the display will not show the target messages unless the user navigates to ACTUAL VALUES > A4 TARGET MESSAGES. State: Operate This line from the display shows the state of the element: Pickup. In this case. trips. If the target messages have not been cleared before the user presses a pushbutton different from “RESET”.

CAUTION: Upon detection of a major problem. Major errors indicate a problem with the relay which takes it out of service. De-energize critical failure relay (Output Relay 7). Inhibit operation of all other output relays (1 to 6). physical damage or perform continuity test). Otherwise monitor reccurences as errors are detected and self-reset. How Often the Test is Performed Every 5 seconds* What to do Ensure IRIG-B cable is connected. Every 5 seconds* Every 5 seconds* Detected Instantaneously 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–7 . Self-Test Warnings may indicate a serious problem with the relay hardware! Upon detection of a minor problem. Minor problems indicate a problem with the relay that does not compromise protection of the power system. Record the major self-test failure in the Event Recorder. There are two types of self-test warnings indicating either a minor or major problem. If alert doesn’t self-reset. Check Ethernet cable and Ethernet connection. Check status of external routers and switches. If none of these apply. Set the date and time in PRODUCT SETUP. MAINTENANCE No ALERT: Clock Not Set MAINTENANCE No ALERT: Comm Alert 1. ensure IRIG-B receiver is functioning. Display the cause of major self-test failure. check cable functionality (i. Display the error on the relay display. and continuously as a background task to ensure that the hardware and software are functioning correctly. then contact factory. Flash the "ALARM" LED. or 3 MAINTENANCE No ALERT: Ethernet Link Fail Clock time is the same as the default time. Record the minor self-test error in the Event Recorder. the relay will: Figure 6: Typical Self-test warning A4 TARGET MESSAGES UNIT FAILURE: Contact Factory: Error code:1 Table 1: Minor Self-test Errors Self-test Error Latched Description of Message Target Problem Message? MAINTENANCE No ALERT: IRIG-B Failure A bad IRIG-B input signal has been detected. contact the factory. 2. Check health of the network. Turn off the "IN SERVICE" LED. Communication error between 345 and Network. the relay will: • • • • • • • • • Turn on the "TROUBLE" LED at the same time as the "IN SERVICE" LED is on.CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES FRONT CONTROL PANEL INTERFACE Self-test errors The relay performs self diagnostics at initialization (after power up). and check input signal level (it may be less than specification). turn on the "TROUBLE" LED. Communication error between CPU and Comms board.e.

Figure 7: Typical Flash message S3 PHASE IOC BLOCK 1 Logic Element 8 <SETPOINT STORED> SETPOINT STORED This flash message is displayed in response to the ENTER key while on any setpoint message (see example above). COMMAND EXECUTED This flash message is displayed in response to executing a command: ON. 3–8 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . RELAY NOT READY: Check Settings No Program all required settings then set the PRODUCT SETUP INSTALLATION setting to "Programmed". or general information messages displayed in response to pressing certain keys. Flash messages Flash messages are warning.that is. PRODUCT SETUP INSTALLATION setting indicates that relay is not in a programmed state. 1. OFF. This warning is Every 5 seconds1 caused by a unit hardware failure. Failure code (XXXX) is shown. INVALID PASSWORD This flash message appears upon an attempt to enter an incorrect password. NO. The edited value was stored as entered. On power up and whenever the PRODUCT SETUP INSTALLATION setting is altered. after 25 seconds.Failure is logged after the detection of 5 consecutive failures . etc. YES.FRONT CONTROL PANEL INTERFACE CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES Table 2: Major Self-test Errors Self-test Error Latched Description of Message Target Problem Message? UNIT FAILURE: Contact Factory Yes How Often the Test is Performed What to do Contact the factory and provide the failure code. error. The factory default flash message time is 4 seconds. as part of password security.

Quick Setup window options are available for a single device or a file. The EnerVista SR3 Setup software is available from GE Multilin to make this as convenient as possible. With EnerVista SR3 Setup running.CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES SOFTWARE SETUP Software setup Quick setup . a PC can be used to download setpoints through the communications port. it is possible to: • • • • • • Program and modify settings Load and save setting files to and from a disk Read actual values Monitor status Read pre-trip data and event records Get help on any topic 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–9 . EnerVista SR3 Setup Software Although settings can be entered manually using the control panel keys.Software interface • • • The Quick Setup window allows you to configure important settings from different screens in the relay by adding them to a common window. The Quick Setup Window option is accessed from the "Tree" which launches on clicking.

com. upgrade the relay firmware.GEmultilin. 4. The EnerVista SR3 Setup software can be installed from either the GE EnerVista CD or the GE Multilin website at http://www. In addition. If a 345 is connected to a PC and communications are enabled. 3. At least 100 MB of hard disk space is available. settings may be saved to a file for future use. status and trip messages can be displayed with the actual value screens. measured values. Click the Install Now button and follow the installation instructions to install the nocharge EnerVista software on the local PC.SOFTWARE SETUP CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES • Upgrade the 345 firmware The EnerVista SR3 Setup software allows immediate access to all 345 features with easy to use pull down menus in the familiar Windows environment. start the EnerVista Launchpad application. Installing the EnerVista SR3 Setup software After ensuring the minimum requirements indicated earlier. 1. use the following procedure to install the EnerVista SR3 Setup software from the enclosed GE EnerVista CD. Insert the GE EnerVista CD into your CD-ROM drive. When installation is complete. 2. 3–10 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . and write and edit setting files. the 345 can be programmed from the setting screens. • • • Microsoft Windows™ 7 / XP is installed and running properly. Click the IED Setup section of the LaunchPad toolbar. At least 256 MB of RAM is installed. The EnerVista SR3 Setup software can run without a 345 connected to the computer. This section provides the necessary information to install EnerVista SR3 Setup . In this case. Hardware and software requirements The following requirements must be met for the EnerVista SR3 Setup software.

8. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–11 . Click on Next to begin the installation. A status window with a progress bar will be shown during the downloading process. Select the Web option to ensure the most recent software release. including the new directory name. or select CD if you do not have a web connection. and the installation program will automatically create icons and add EnerVista SR3 Setup software to the Windows start menu. 6. The files will be installed in the directory indicated. Select the complete path. then click the Add Now button to list software items for the 345. the USB driver will be loaded into the computer.CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES SOFTWARE SETUP 5. In the EnerVista Launchpad window. click the Add Product button and select the 345 Feeder Protection System as shown below. 7. EnerVista Launchpad will obtain the latest installation software from the Web or CD and automatically start the installation process. where the EnerVista SR3 Setup software will be installed.

Launch EnerVista SR3 Setup from LaunchPad. If you are going to communicate from your computer to the 345 Relay using the USB port: 10.SOFTWARE SETUP CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES 9. 12. 11. Plug the USB cable into the USB port on the 345 Relay then into the USB port on your computer. as shown below. In EnerVista > Device Setup: 3–12 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . The 345 device will be added to the list of installed IEDs in the EnerVista Launchpad window.

9. 3. Proceed to Connecting to the Relay below. we will use “New Site 1” as the site name. The new site will appear in the upper-left list in the EnerVista SR3 Setup window. Click on the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window and click the Add Site button to define a new site. For RS485 communications. Enter the desired name in the "Device Name" field and a description (optional) of the device. 1. 8. see Configuring Ethernet Communications below. verify that the cable is properly connected to either the USB port on the front panel of the device (for USB communications) or to the RS485 terminals on the back of the device (for RS485 communications). Click OK when the relay order code has been received. Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the 345 device and upload the order code.CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES SOFTWARE SETUP 13. If desired. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–13 . 5. See the previous section for the installation procedure. Refer to the F485 manual for additional details. The 345 Site Device has now been configured for USB communications. 4. To configure the relay for Ethernet communications. 6. Select USB as the Interface type. 2. to begin communications. the GE Multilin F485 converter will be required. Click the Add Device button to define the new device. This example demonstrates an USB connection. Select 345 Relay as the USB device. a short description of the site can also be entered. Connecting EnerVista SR3 Setup to the relay Configuring serial communications Before starting. Select “Serial” from the Interface drop-down list. The new device will be added to the Site List window (or Online window) located in the top left corner of the main EnerVista SR3 Setup window. Install and start the latest version of the EnerVista SR3 Setup software (available from the GE Multilin web site). 7. Enter the desired site name in the "Site Name" field. 14. In this example.

SOFTWARE SETUP

CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES

Using the Quick Connect feature

The Quick Connect button can be used to establish a fast connection through the front panel USB port of a 345 relay, or through the Ethernet port. The following window will appear when the QuickConnect button is pressed:

As indicated by the window, the "Quick Connect" feature can quickly connect the EnerVista SR3 Setup software to a 345 front port if the USB is selected in the interface drop-down list. Select "345 Relay" and press the Connect button. Ethernet can also be used as the interface for Quick Connect as shown above. When connected, a new Site called “Quick Connect” will appear in the Site List window.

3–14

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES

SOFTWARE SETUP

The 345 Site Device has now been configured via the Quick Connect feature for either USB or Ethernet communications. Proceed to Connecting to the Relay below, to begin communications.

Configuring Ethernet communications
NOTE:

Before starting, verify that the Ethernet cable is properly connected to the RJ-45 Ethernet port. 345 supports a maximum of 3 TCP/IP sessions.

NOTE

1. 2. 3.

Install and start the latest version of the EnerVista SR3 Setup Setup software (available from the GE EnerVista CD). See the previous section for the installation procedure. Click on the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window and click the Add Site button to define a new site. Enter the desired site name in the "Site Name" field. If desired, a short description of the site can also be entered. In this example, we will use “Substation 1” as the site name. The new site will appear in the upper-left list. Click the Add Device button to define the new device. Enter the desired name in the "Device Name" field, and a description (optional). Select “Ethernet” from the Interface drop-down list. This will display a number of interface parameters that must be entered for proper Ethernet functionality.

4. 5. 6. 7.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

3–15

SOFTWARE SETUP

CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES

8. 9.

Enter the IP address, slave address, and Modbus port values assigned to the 345 relay (from the S1 RELAY SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > ETHERNET menu). Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the 345 and upload the order code. If a communications error occurs, ensure that the Ethernet communication values correspond to the relay setting values.

10. Click OK when the relay order code has been received. The new device will be added to the Site List window (or Online window) located in the top left corner of the main EnerVista SR3 Setup window. The 345 Site Device has now been configured for Ethernet communications. Proceed to the following section to begin communications.

Connecting to the relay

Now that the communications parameters have been properly configured, the user can easily communicate with the relay. 1. 2. Expand the Site list by double clicking on the site name or clicking on the «+» box to list the available devices for the given site. Desired device trees can be expanded by clicking the «+» box. The following list of headers is shown for each device: Device Definition Actual Values Quick Setup Setpoints Maintenance. Expand the SETTINGS > RELAY SETUP list item and double click on Front Panel to open the "Front Panel" settings window as shown below:

3.

3–16

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES

SOFTWARE SETUP

4. 5.

The "Front Panel" settings window will open with a corresponding status indicator on the lower left of the EnerVista SR3 Setup window.

If the status indicator is red, verify that the serial, USB, or Ethernet cable is properly connected to the relay, and that the relay has been properly configured for communications (steps described earlier). The "Front Panel" settings can now be edited, printed, or changed. Other setpoint and command windows can be displayed and edited in a similar manner. "Actual Values" windows are also available for display. These windows can be arranged, and resized at will.

Working with setpoints and setpoint files
Engaging a device
The EnerVista SR3 Setup software may be used in on-line mode (relay connected) to directly communicate with a relay. Communicating relays are organized and grouped by communication interfaces and into sites. Sites may contain any number of relays selected from the product series. The System Setup page will be used as an example to illustrate the entering of setpoints. Inthis example, we will be changing the power system setpoints. 1. 2. 3. Establish communications with the relay. Select the Setpoint > System Setup > Transformer menu item. Select the Transformer Rating setpoint by clicking anywhere in the parameter box. This will display three arrows: two to increment/decrement the value, and another to launch the numerical keypad.

Entering setpoints

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

3–17

SOFTWARE SETUP

CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES

4.

Clicking the arrow at the end of the box displays a numerical keypad interface that allows the user to enter a value within the setpoint range displayed near the top of the keypad: Click = to exit from the keypad and keep the new value. Click on X to exit from the keypad and retain the old value.

5.

For setpoints requiring non-numerical pre-set values (e.g. Transformer type below), clicking anywhere within the setpoint value box displays a dropdown selection menu arrow. Select the desired value from this list.

6. 7.

For setpoints requiring an alphanumeric text string (e.g. "relay name"), the value may be entered directly within the setpoint value box. In the Setpoint > System Setup > Transformer dialog box, click on Save to save the values into the 345 . Click YES to accept any changes and exit the window. Click Restore to retain previous values. Click Default to restore Default values.

File support

Opening any EnerVista SR3 Setup file will automatically launch the application or provide focus to the already opened application. If the file is a settings file (has a ‘SR3’ extension) which had been removed from the Settings List tree menu, it will be added back to the Settings List tree. New files will be automatically added to the tree. The EnerVista SR3 Setup software interface supports three ways of handling changes to relay settings: • • • In off-line mode (relay disconnected) to create or edit relay settings files for later download to communicating relays. Directly modifying relay settings while connected to a communicating relay, then saving the settings when complete. Creating/editing settings files while connected to a communicating relay, then saving them to the relay when complete.

Using setpoints files

3–18

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

4. A new entry will be added to the tree. Select the desired device from the site list. The corresponding file extension will be automatically assigned. Use the following procedure to add an existing file to the list. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–19 . The setpoint files in the EnerVista SR3 Setup window are accessed in the Files Window. Use the following procedure to download and save setpoint files to a local PC. Ensure that the site and corresponding device(s) have been properly defined and configured as shown in Connecting EnerVista SR3 Setup to the Relay. 2. Downloading and saving setpoints files Setpoints must be saved to a file on the local PC before performing any firmware upgrades. Press Receive to complete the process. Select the Online > Read Device Settings from Device menu item. The EnerVista SR3 Setup displays relay setpoints with the same hierarchy as the front panel display. Saving setpoints is also highly recommended before making any setpoint changes or creating new setpoint files. or right-click on the device and select Read Device Settings to obtain settings information from the device. above. 3.CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES SOFTWARE SETUP Settings files are organized on the basis of file names assigned by the user. Adding setpoints files to the environment The EnerVista SR3 Setup software provides the capability to review and manage a large group of setpoint files. After a few seconds of data retrieval. the software will request the name and destination path of the setpoint file. 1. A settings file contains data pertaining to the following types of relay settings: • • • • • • Device Definition Relay Setup System Setup Protection Control Inputs/Outputs Factory default values are supplied and can be restored after any changes. in the File pane. showing path and file name for the setpoint file.

In the files pane. right-click on Files and select the Add Existing Setting File item as shown: 2. The new file and complete path will be added to the file list. As for any other MS Windows® application. The following procedure illustrates how to create new setpoint files. 3–20 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . prompting the user to select a previously saved setpoint file. The Open dialog box will appear.SOFTWARE SETUP CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES 1. These can be uploaded to a relay at a later date. Creating a new setpoint file The EnerVista SR3 Setup software allows the user to create new setpoint files independent of a connected device. browse for the file to be added then click Open.

This is illustrated in the following procedure: 1. Click OK to complete the process. will be added to the EnerVista SR3 Setup software environment. 4. 2. select the saved setpoint file. It is important to define the correct firmware version to ensure that setpoints not available in a particular version are not downloaded into the relay. Adding Setpoints Files to the Environment. Establish communications with the 345 relay. 3. select the Offline > Edit Settings File Properties menu item and note the File Version of the setpoint file. To select a file name and path for the new file. In the File pane. 3. In the File pane. and Order Code options for the new setpoint file. 5. Upgrading setpoint files to a new revision It is often necessary to upgrade the revision for a previously saved setpoint file after the 345 firmware has been upgraded. If this version is different from the Firmware Revision noted in step 2. Select the Firmware Version. the new file. The following box will appear. Select the file name and path to store the file. with a complete path. or select any displayed file name to replace an existing file. Select the Maintenance > M1 Relay Info menu item and record the Firmware Revision. 5. Once this step is completed. ‘transformer1. enter some useful information in the Description box to facilitate the identification of the device and the purpose of the file. Load the setpoint file to be upgraded into the EnerVista SR3 Setup environment as described in the section. 6. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–21 . For future reference. click the button beside the File Name box.SR3’). right click on File and select the New Settings File item.CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES SOFTWARE SETUP 1. allowing for the configuration of the setpoint file for the correct firmware version. select a New File Version that matches the Firmware Revision from the pull-down menu. All 345 setpoint files should have the extension ‘SR3’ (for example. 4. From the main window menu bar. 2.

For example. Select a previously saved setpoints file in the File pane or establish communications with a 345 device. 3–22 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .000 (Firmware Revision 1. Use the following procedure to print a list of setpoints: 1. 2.20) and the current setpoint file revision is 1. change the setpoint file revision to “1. if the firmware revision is L0L01MA120.SOFTWARE SETUP CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES 6. 8. 9. click OK to convert the setpoint file to the desired revision. for instructions on loading this setpoint file into the 345 .2x”.10. Enter any special comments about the setpoint file in the "Description" field. select the Offline > Export Settings File menu item. Select the desired firmware version from the "New File Version" field. Printing setpoints and actual values The EnerVista SR3 Setup software allows the user to print partial or complete lists of setpoints and actual values. From the main window. See Loading Setpoints from a File below. When complete. 7.

Setpoint lists can be printed in the same manner by right clicking on the desired file (in the file list) or device (in the device list) and selecting the Print Device Information or Print Settings File options. 3. select the Online > Print Device Information menu item The Print/Export Options dialog box will appear. Printing actual values from a connected device A complete list of actual values can also be printed from a connected device with the following procedure: 1.CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES SOFTWARE SETUP 3. From the main window. The process for Offline > Print Preview Settings File is identical to the steps above. 4. Select Settings in the upper section and select either Include All Features (for a complete list) or Include Only Enabled Features (for a list of only those features which are currently used) in the filtering section and click OK. Establish communications with the desired 345 device. 2. Select Actual Values in the upper section and select either Include All Features (for a complete list) or Include Only Enabled Features (for a list of only those features which are currently used) in the filtering section and click OK. The Print/Export Options dialog box will appear. 5. Actual values lists can be printed in the same manner by right clicking on the desired device (in the device list) and selecting the Print Device Information option 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–23 .

After the firmware has been upgraded. Adding Setpoints Files to the Environment. for instructions on changing the revision number of a setpoint file. If the versions are not identical. above. follow the procedures listed in this section. 3. an "Incompatible Device" error will occur: If there are no incompatibilities between the target device and the settings file. Right-click on the selected file and select the Write Settings File to Device item. the 345 will have new firmware installed with the factory default setpoints. The following procedure illustrates how to load setpoints from a file. Loading new firmware into the 345 flash memory is accomplished as follows: 1. above. Upon successful completion of this procedure.GEmultilin. Select the Maintenance > Update Firmware menu item. If the firmware has been upgraded since saving the setpoint file. it must first be added to the EnerVista SR3 Setup environment as described in the section. Connect the relay to the local PC and save the setpoints to a file as shown in Downloading and Saving Setpoints Files. 2. see Upgrading Setpoint Files to a New Revision. Select the Offline > Edit Settings File Properties menu item and verify that the corresponding file is fully compatible with the hardware and firmware version of the target relay. 2. Refer to Downloading and Saving Setpoints Files for details on saving relay setpoints to a file. see Upgrading Setpoint Files to a New Revision.The latest firmware files are available from the GE Multilin website at http:// www. Loading new relay firmware 3–24 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . 4.com. Select the target relay from the list of devices shown and click Send. An indication of the percentage completed will be shown in the bottom of the main window. NOTE NOTE: NOTE Before upgrading firmware. 1. it will be necessary to load this file back into the 345 . Before loading a setpoints file. NOTE: EnerVista SR3 Setup software prevents incompatible firmware from being loaded into a 345 relay. for details on changing the setpoints file version. the data will be transferred to the relay. Upgrading relay firmware To upgrade the 345 firmware. Select the previously saved setpoints file from the File pane of the EnerVista SR3 Setup software main window. If there is an incompatibility. it is very important to save the current 345 settings to a file on your PC.SOFTWARE SETUP CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES Loading setpoints from a file CAUTION: An error message will occur when attempting to download a setpoint file with a revision number that does not match the relay firmware.

5. The firmware filename has the following format: L3 L01 M A 130 . a status box appears showing how much of the new firmware file has been transferred and the upgrade status. The 345 front panel will momentarily display "SR BOOT PROGRAM Waiting for Message. Cycling power to the relay is recommended after a firmware upgrade.CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES SOFTWARE SETUP 3. 000 Modification Number (000 = none) Firmware Rev # Board Assembly Rev # Code Type in Memory Device PCB Code Number Product Reference Code (L3 = 345) 4. The EnerVista SR3 Setup software will request the new firmware file. the relay will not be in service and will require setpoint programming. Locate the folder that contains the firmware files to load into the 345 . EnerVista SR3 Setup software now prepares the 345 to receive the new firmware file. the communication settings may have to be manually reprogrammed.” indicating that it is in upload mode. After successfully updating the 345 firmware. The EnerVista SR3 Setup software will notify the user when the 345 has finished loading the file. Carefully read any displayed messages and click OK to return the main screen. When communications is established. The entire transfer process takes approximately 10 minutes. 6. the saved setpoints must be reloaded back into the relay. See Loading Setpoints from a File for details. While the file is being loaded into the 345 . To communicate with the relay. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–25 .

• Click on Trigger Waveform to trigger a waveform capture. data type. A detailed Waveform Capture window will appear as shown below. select the Actual Values > A3 Records > Transient Records menu item to open the Transient Recorder Viewer window. Click on the Save to File button to save the selected waveform to the local PC. • • • 3–26 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . trip. and corresponding data items (i. To view a previously saved COMTRADE file.e. Waveform file numbering starts with the number zero in the 345 . click on the Launch Viewer button. Advanced EnerVista SR3 Setup features Transient recorder (Waveform capture) The EnerVista SR3 Setup software can be used to capture waveforms (or view trace memory) from the relay at the instance of a pickup. To view the captured waveforms. • With EnerVista SR3 Setup software running and communications established." The other file is a "DAT" file. click the Open button and select the corresponding COMTRADE file. features. settings. and item size) may change slightly from version to version of firmware. with the extension "CFG. required by the COMTRADE file for proper display of waveforms.SOFTWARE SETUP CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES Modbus addresses assigned to firmware modules. so that the maximum trigger number will always be one less than the total number of triggers available. default values. requesting the file name and path. The addresses are rearranged when new features are added or existing features are enhanced or modified. or other condition. min/max values. One file is saved as a COMTRADE file. alarm. A new window will appear.

in order to change the graph attributes. The date and time of the trigger are displayed at the top left corner of the window. FILE NAME Indicates the file name and complete path (if saved). The event record will provide additional information on the cause and system conditions at the time of the event. TRIGGER LINE Indicates the point in time for the trigger. Cursor lines are identified by their colors. DELTA Indicates time difference between the two cursor lines. • • The red vertical line indicates the trigger point. • 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–27 . VECTOR DISPLAY SELECT Click here to open a new graph to display vectors.CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES SOFTWARE SETUP TRIGGER TIME & DATE Displays the time and date of the Trigger. CURSOR LINE POSITION Indicates the cursor line position in time with respect to the beginning of the buffer. make note of the time and date shown in the graph. press the Preference button to open the COMTRADE Setup page. To match the captured waveform with the event that triggered it. then find the event that matches the same time in the event recorder. locate the mouse pointer over the cursor line. CURSOR LINES To move lines. Display graph values at the corresponding cursor line. From the window main menu bar. then click and drag the cursor to the new position.

The Waveform Capture window will reappear based on the selected graph attributes.SOFTWARE SETUP CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES Preference Button The following window will appear: Change the color of each graph as desired. and to close the window. To view a vector graph of the quantities contained in the waveform capture. press the Vector Display button to display the following window: 3–28 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . and select other options as required. by checking the appropriate boxes. Click OK to store these graph attributes.

CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES SOFTWARE SETUP Protection summary Protection Summary is a single screen which holds the summarized information of different settings from Grouped Elements. Protection Summary Screen allows the User to: • • • • view the output relay assignments for the elements modify the output relay assignments for the elements view the enable/disable status of Control Elements navigate to the respected Protection Element screen on a button click. Control Elements and Maintenance screens. The Protection Summary screen is as follows: 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–29 .

The new Master Reset Password must be 8 to 10 3–30 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . the user must first change the Master Reset Password from the initial Null setting. 345 devices shipped from the factory are initially set with security disabled. For more details on the password security feature. In cases where operational security is required as well as a central administrative authority then the use of the password system is highly encouraged. This is accomplished through a Master level access password which can be used for resetting lower level access passwords and higher level privileged operations. If the password security feature is to be used. this can only be done over communications. refer to Password Security in Chapter 6. The password system has been designed to facilitate a hierarchy for centralized management. not from the front panel keypad. 1. This section describes how to perform the initial setup. The feature robustness of this system requires it to be managed exclusively through the EnerVista setup software.SOFTWARE SETUP CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES Password security Password security is an optional feature of the 345 which can be setup using the SR3 EnerVista Setup software.

The Master Level permits setup of the Remote and Local Passwords. 2. and must have minimum 2 letters and 2 numbers. Remote Passwords must be 3 to 10 characters in length. 3. enter the new Master Reset Password again to confirm.CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES SOFTWARE SETUP characters in length. or change the Master Reset Password. then select Change Password. enter it again to log in to the Master Access level. These passwords are initially set to a Null value. and can only be set or changed from a remote user over RS485 or Ethernet communications. Now that the Master Reset Password has been programmed. record the Encrypted Key and contact the factory to have it decrypted. 4. After entering a valid Master Reset Password. The letters are case sensitive. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 3–31 . the user may disable password security altogether. With Master Level access. If the Master Reset Password has been lost. The Master Access level allows programming of the Remote Setpoint and Remote Control passwords.

The access level turns off after a period of 5 minutes of inactivity. the user is now logged into that access level over that interface only. If changing Local Passwords is permitted locally. If Overwrite Local Passwords is set to YES. 3–32 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .SOFTWARE SETUP CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES 5. 6. The same logic applies to the Local passwords. Local Passwords must be 3 to 10 characters in length. if control power is cycled. 7. or if the user enters an incorrect password. the user will be prompted to enter the appropriate password depending on the interface being used (remote or local). If Overwrite Local Passwords is set to NO. Local passwords can be changed locally only (over USB or keypad). the keypad user can only change the Local Passwords if they have been changed from the initial NULL value to a valid one. and the nature of the change being made (setpoint or control). If any Remote password has never been set. Local passwords can be changed remotely only (over RS485 or Ethernet). If the correct password is entered. that level will not be attainable except when logged in as the Master Level. Initial setup of the Local Setpoint and Local Control passwords requires the Master Access level. When passwords have been set.

and fault analysis information are accessed in Actual Values mode.Digital Energy 345 Transformer Protection System Chapter 4: Actual values Actual values Actual values All measured values. Actual value messages are organized into logical groups for easy reference as shown below. the status of digital inputs and outputs. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–1 .

INPUTS SUMMARY OUT RELAYS SUMMARY LOGIC ELEM SUMMARY GOOSE STATUS GOOSE HDR.ACTUAL VALUES CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES Figure 1: Actual Values main menu ACTUAL VALUES A1 STATUS A2 METERING A3 RECORDS ▼ A1 STATUS CLOCK CONTACT INPUTS OUTPUT RELAYS ▼ LOGIC ELEMENTS VIRTUAL INPUTS REMOTE INPUTS REMOTE OUTPUTS C. A3 CLEAR EVENT REC EVENT RECORDS CLEAR A3 CLEAR TRANST REC TRANSIENT RECORDS CLEAR A3 CLEAR THERMAL CAP EVENT RECORDS CLEAR 897760A1. Date A2 XMFR DIFF CURRENTS PH A DIFF CURRENT ▼ PH A REST CURRENT DIFF 2 HARM PH A DIFF 5 HARM PH A PH B DIFF CURRENT PH B REST CURRENT A3 TRANSIENT RECORDS FORCE TRIGGER? ▼ TOTAL RECORDS AVAILABLE RECORDS LAST CLEARED DIFF 2 HARM PH B DIFF 5 HARM PH B PH C DIFF CURRENT PH C REST CURRENT DIFF 2 HARM PH C DIFF 5 HARM PH C A2 XFMR THERM CAP THERM CAP PH A ▼ THERM CAP PH B THERM CAP PH C Record Time ▼ E29. . Date Record Time A4 TARGET MESSAGES A2 METERING WINDING 1 CURRENTS WINDING 2 CURRENTS XFMR DIFF CURRENTS ▼ XFMR THERM CAP A3 RECORDS EVENT RECORDS TRANSIENT RECORDS CLEAR EVENT REC ▼ CLEAR TRANST REC CLEAR THERM CAP A4 TARGET MESSAGES ▲ PH IOC1 TRIP ▼ PH TOC TRIP . STATUS A2 WINDING 1 CURRENTS W1 PH A CURRENT ▼ W1 PH B CURRENT W1 PH C CURRENT W1 NTRL CURRENT W1 [SNS] GND CURRENT W1 NEG SEQ CURRENT W1 GND DIFF CURRENT A2 WINDING 2 CURRENTS W2 PH A CURRENT ▼ W2 PH B CURRENT W2 PH C CURRENT W2 NTRL CURRENT W2 [SNS] GND CURRENT W2 NEG SEQ CURRENT W2 GND DIFF CURRENT A3 EVENT RECORDS E30.cdr 4–2 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . .

... ..... RLY4 ..... 52b CI2 .cdr A1 CLOCK CURRENT DATE: ▼ CURRENT TIME: ▼ R2 TRIP: OUTPUT RELAY 3 . RLY6 .... R2 TRIP .. REMOTE OUTPUT 32 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–3 .. CONTACT INPUT 10 A1 OUTPUT RELAYS R1 TRIP: A1 GOOSE HDR STATUS GOOSE 1 H... LE4 . VIRTUAL INPUT 32 LE5 .CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A1 STATUS A1 Status Figure 2: Status menu A1 STATUS CLOCK CONTACT INPUTS OUTPUT RELAYS ▼ LOGIC ELEMENTS VIRTUAL INPUTS REMOTE INPUTS REMOTE OUTPUTS C. GOOSE 8 H. LE2 . CI6 .... RLY3 .. R1 TRIP . 897763A1.. LE6 . REMOTE INPUT 32 CI5 . Le16[8] .STATUS A1 LOGIC ELEMENTS LOGIC ELEMENT 1 ▼ A1 GOOSE STATUS 61850 STATUS GOOSE 1 STATUS ▼ GOOSE 2 STATUS GOOSE 3 STATUS ..... 52a CI3 . CI7 .. 52a CI1 ... LOGIC ELEMENT 16 A1 VIRTUAL INPUTS VIRTUAL INPUT 1 ▼ VIRTUAL INPUT 2 . CI10 ... RLY7 .. 52b CI4 ..STATUS GOOSE 3 H... RLY5 . LE3 ...... ▼ CI9 ... INPUTS SUMMARY OUT RELAYS SUMMARY LOGIC ELEM SUMMARY GOOSE STATUS GOOSE HDR STATUS A1 CONTACT INPUTS 52a W1 BRK (CI#1) ▼ 52b W1 BRK (CI#2) 52a W2 BRK (CI#3) 52b W2 BRK (CI#4) CONTACT INPUT 5 .. A1 REMOTE INPUTS REMOTE INPUT 1 ▼ REMOTE INPUT 2 .. OUTPUT RELAY 7 LOGIC ELEMENT 2 ......STATUS ..... A1 REMOTE OUTPUTS REMOTE OUTPUT 1 ▼ REMOTE OUTPUT 2 ... GOOSE 8 STATUS LE1 ..STATUS ▼ GOOSE 2 H....... CI8 ....

On The “ON” state of Output Relay #1 (W1 TRIP) shows that a TRIP command has been sent to the W1 breaker. CURRENT TIME 09:17:12 Range: Time in format shown Indicates the current time of day. On Message displays the state of the contact input.A1 STATUS CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES Clock PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > CLOCK CURRENT DATE Feb 12 2009 Range: Date in format shown Indicates today’s date. Contact inputs PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > CONTACT INPUTS 52a W1 BRK (CI#1) (Contact Input 1) OFF Range: Off. On The status of this contact shows the W1 breaker close/open state. when wired to a 52a breaker auxiliary contact. when wired to a 52b breaker auxiliary contact. CONTACT INPUT 5 to 10 OFF Range: Off. On The status of this contact shows the W2 breaker close/open state. 4–4 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . and message “OFF” indicates a de-energized contact. 52b W2 BRK (CI#4) (Contact Input 4) OFF Range: Off. On The status of this contact shows the W2 breaker close/open state. 52b W1 BRK (CI#2) (Contact Input 2) OFF Range: Off. when wired to a 52b breaker auxiliary contact. On The status of this contact shows the W1 breaker close/open state. Output relays PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > OUTPUT RELAYS RELAY 1 TRIP (Output Relay #1) OFF Range: Off. The message “ON” indicates that the contact input is energized. when wired to a 52a breaker auxiliary contact. 52a W2 BRK (CI#3) (Contact Input 3) OFF Range: Off.

OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6 (Auxiliary Output Relays) OFF Range: Off. On OUTPUT RELAY 7 (Critical Failure Relay) Range: Off. Logic elements PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > LOGIC ELEMENTS LOGIC ELEMENT 1 to 16 OFF Range: Off. On The state “ON” or “OFF” for each logic element depends on its programmed logic: triggering inputs. PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > VIRTUAL INPUTS VIRTUAL INPUTS 1 to 32 OFF Range: Off. INPUTS SUMMARY 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–5 . On Remote outputs The state of all active remote outputs is displayed here. and/or reset time delay. On The “ON” state of Output Relay #2 (W2 TRIP) shows that a TRIP command has been sent to the W2 breaker. PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > REMOTE INPUTS REMOTE INPUTS 1 to 32 OFF Range: Off. plus any pickup. PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > REMOTE OUTPUTS REMOTE OUTPUTS 1 to 32 OFF Range: Off. Virtual inputs The state of all active virtual inputs is displayed here. On Contact inputs summary PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > C. On The "ON" state indicates that the relay is in-service. On Remote inputs The state of all active remote inputs is displayed here.CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A1 STATUS RELAY 2 TRIP (Output Relay #2) OFF Range: Off. blocking inputs.

NOTE: NOTE Output relay #7 is the Critical Failure relay. This output relay shows the status "ON" when the 345 relay is powered up and set to "Ready" and no self-test alarms are active. Logic elements summary PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > LOGIC ELEM SUMMARY LOGIC ELEM SUMMARY LE#1 LE#2 LE#3 LE#4 LE#5 LE#6 LE#7 LE#8 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF LE#9 LE#10 LE#11 LE#12 LE#13 LE#14 LE#15 LE#16 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF This display shows a summary of the states of all logic elements. INPUTS SUMMARY 52a 52b 52a 52b CI#9 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF CI#5 CI#6 CI#7 CI#8 CI#10 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF The display shows a summary of the states of all contact inputs. under SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > S1 INSTALLATION > RELAY STATUS. Output relays summary PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > OUT RELAYS SUMMARY OUTPUT RELAYS SUMMARY R1 TRIP R2 TRIP RLY#3 RLY#4 OFF OFF OFF OFF RLY#5 RLY#6 RLY#7 OFF OFF ON This display shows a summary of the states of all output relays.A1 STATUS CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES C. used to indicate the correct functioning of the 345 relay. GOOSE status PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > GOOSE STATUS 4–6 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A1 STATUS GOOSE 1 TO 8 Status Range: OFF. ON Default: OFF GOOSE HDR status PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > GOOSE HDR STATUS GOOSE 1 TO 8 H. ON Default: OFF 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–7 .Status Range: OFF.

All quantities are recalculated every power system cycle and perform protection and monitoring functions. symmetrical components. 0 to 359o lag W1 GND CURRENT 0. Displayed metered quantities are updated approximately three (3) times a second for readability. 0 to 359o lag W1 PH C CURRENT 0. All phasors and symmetrical components are referenced to the phase A current phasor.00 x CT 0o lag 4–8 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .0 A 0o lag Range: 1 to 6000 A. 0 to 359o lag W1 GND DIFF CURRENT 0. 0 to 359o lag W1 NTRL CURRENT 0.0 A 0o lag Range: 1 to 6000 A.0 A 0o lag Range: 1 to 600 A. differential and restraint currents are derived. 0 to 359o lag W1 NEG SEQ CURRENT 0.0 A 0o lag Range: 1 to 6000 A.0 A 0o lag Range: 1 to 6000 A. all metered values as follows: WINDING 1 CURRENT W1 PH A CURRENT 0. 0 to 359o lag W1 SENS GND CURRENT 0. Other values like neutral current.A2 METERING CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A2 Metering The relay measures fundamental frequency phase and ground currents. and all auxiliary analog inputs. 0 to 359o lag W1 PH B CURRENT 0. By scrolling the Up/Down keys the relay shows one-by-one.0 A 0o lag Range: 1 to 6000 A.0 A 0o lag Range: 1 to 6000 A.

0 to 359o lag W2 NEG SEQ CURRENT 0. 0 to 359o lag W2 SENS GND CURRENT 0.0 A 0o lag Range: 1 to 600 A.0 A 0o lag Range: 1 to 6000 A. 0 to 359o lag W2 GND CURRENT 0.0 A 0o lag Range: 1 to 6000 A.CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A2 METERING WINDING 2 CURRENT W2 PH A CURRENT 0.0 A 0o lag Range: 1 to 6000 A. 0 to 359o lag W2 GND DIFF CURRENT 0. 0 to 359o lag W2 NTRL CURRENT 0.00 x CT 0o lag 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–9 . 0 to 359o lag W2 PH C CURRENT 0.0 A 0o lag Range: 1 to 6000 A. 0 to 359o lag W2 PH B CURRENT 0.0 A 0o lag Range: 1 to 6000 A.0 A 0o lag Range: 1 to 6000 A.

0 % f0 DIFF 5 HARM PH A 0.0% Range: 1 to 150% THERM CAP PH B 0.0 % f0 TRANSFORMER THERMAL CAPACITY CURRENTS THERM CAP PH A 0.00 x CT 0o lag PH B RESTR CURRENT 0.0 % f0 PH C DIFF CURRENT 0.0 % f0 PH B DIFF CURRENT 0.00 x CT 0o lag DIFF 2 HARM PH B 0.0 % f0 DIFF 5 HARM PH C 0.00 x CT 0o lag DIFF 2 HARM PH A 0.0% Range: 1 to 150% THERM CAP PH C 0.00 x CT 0o lag PH A RESTR CURRENT 0.00 x CT 0o lag DIFF 2 HARM PH C 0.0% Range: 1 to 150% 4–10 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .0 % f0 DIFF 5 HARM PH B 0.00 x CT 0o lag PH C RESTR CURRENT 0.A2 METERING CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES TRANSFORMER DIFFERENTIAL AND RESTRAINT CURRENTS PH A DIFF CURRENT 0.

All event records are stored in memory such that information is maintained for up to 3 days even after losing relay control power.00 x CT 0° Lag ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W2 Ib x CT(W2)0.03 x CT ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W2 Ia x CT(W2)0.08 x CT 0° Lag ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W1 Ib x CT(W1)0. The event number is incremented for each new event. even in the case where control power is lost.00 x CT 0° Lag ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W1 Ic x CT(W1)0. The events are displayed from newest to oldest event.08 x CT ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W1 Igr x CT(W1)0.00 x CT 0° Lag ▼ 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–11 . Shown below is an example of an event record caused by a Breaker Open operation. Each event has a header message containing a summary of the event that occurred. Event records The Event Recorder runs continuously.CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A3 RECORDS A3 Records The 345 has an event recorder which runs continuously. All events are stored in non-volatile memory where the information is maintained.08 x CT 0° Lag ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W1 Igd x CT(W1)0. and is assigned an event number equal to the number of events that have occured since the recorder was cleared.376 E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W1 Ia x CT(W1)0.08 x CT ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OPW1 I_2 x CT(W1)0.00 x CT 0° Lag ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W1 Ig x CTg(W1)0.00 x CT 0° Lag ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W1 In x CT(W1)0.00 x CT 0° Lag ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W2 Ic x CT(W2)0. capturing and storing the last 256 events. and the recorded information at the time of this record. 10 ▶ Ph IOC1 Trip OP 17:32:28. PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A3 RECORDS > EVENT RECORDS Table 1: Example of Event Record A3 EVENT REC T:5655 E5655 Jan 05.

ground differential current.0% fo ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP 2nd Harm Ph C Diff0. and contains information such as per-phase current.00 x CT 0° Lag ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OPW2 In x CT(W2)0.08 ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP Ph BDiff.0% Each event is saved with event number.00 x CT ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W2 Igr x CT(W2)0.00 ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP Ph C Rest.00 x CT ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W2 I_2 x CT(W1)0. x CT(W1)0.00 ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP 2nd Harm Ph A Diff6.0% fo ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP Therm Cap Ph A1. neutral current. x CT(W1)0. ground current or sensitive ground current. date and time.2% fo ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP 2nd Harm Ph B Diff0. per-phase differential and restraint currents.00 ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP Ph C Diff.A3 RECORDS CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W2 Ig x CTg(W2)0. x CT(W1)0.00 x CT 0° Lag ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP W2 Igd x CT(W2)0.1% fo ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP Therm Cap Ph B0.00 ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP Ph B Rest.00 ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP Ph A Rest. x CT(W1)0.0% ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP Therm Cap Ph C0. 4–12 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . x CT(W1)0. negative sequence current.00 x CT ▼ E5655 TRIP Ph IOC1 Trip OP Ph A Diff. x CT(W1)0.

INPUT L. The following table provides a list of the event types: Table 2: Event type Event Type General Events Pickup Events Trip Events Alarm and Latched Alarm Events Control Events Dropout Events Contact Input Events Virtual Input Events Remote Input Events Logic Element Events Self-Test Warning Events Display None PICKUP: TRIP: ALARM: CONTROL: DROPOUT: C. INPUT: V. Pwr Lost Ctrl. from the 345 Communications Guide. Alert 3 Ethernet Link Fail High ENET Traffic Ambient Temp. shows the list of Event Causes. Alert 2 Comm. ELEMENT SELF-TEST WARNING Description Events that occur when specific operation takes place These are events that occur when a protection element picks up These are events that occur when a breaker trip is initiated These are events that occur when an alarm is initiated These are events that occur when a control element is activated These are events that occur when a protection element drops out after a corresponding pickup event These are events that occur when a contact input changes its state These are events that occur when a virtual input changes its state These are events that occur when a remote input changes its state These are events that occur when a logic element changes its state These are events that occur when a selftest warning is detected. The Event Recorder can be cleared from ACTUAL VALUES > A3 RECORDS > CLEAR EVENT REC setpoint. INPUT R. All per Winding 1 and 2. Pwr Applied Date or Time Set Reset Factory Reload Clock Not Set IRIG-B Failure Reset Trip Counter BKR Status Unknown Clear Event Rec Clear Transt Rec Clear Therm Cap Comm. Code FC134 0 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 21 Type unsigned 16 bits Definition Cause of Event No Evnt/Trp ToDate Ctrl. Alert 1 Comm. The following table.CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A3 RECORDS Second and fifth harmonic per-phase differential current. >80C BKR2 Status Unkwn 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–13 .

A3 RECORDS CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES Code 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 0x0040 0x0041 0x0042 0x0043 0x0044 0x0045 0x0046 0x0047 0x0048 0x0049 0x0060 0x0061 0x0062 0x0063 0x0064 0x0065 0x0066 0x0067 0x0068 0x0069 0x0080 0x0081 0x0082 0x0083 0x0084 0x0085 0x0086 0x0087 0x0088 0x0089 Type Definition Trace Mem. Trigger Rx Goose 1 ON Rx Goose 1 OFF Rx Goose 2 ON Rx Goose 2 OFF Rx Goose 3 ON Rx Goose 3 OFF Rx Goose 4 ON Rx Goose 4 OFF Rx Goose 5 ON Rx Goose 5 OFF Rx Goose 6 ON Rx Goose 6 OFF Rx Goose 7 ON Rx Goose 7 OFF Rx Goose 8 ON Rx Goose 8 OFF Contact IN 1 On Contact IN 2 On Contact IN 3 On Contact IN 4 On Contact IN 5 On Contact IN 6 On Contact IN 7 On Contact IN 8 On Contact IN 9 On Contact IN 10 On Contact IN 1 Off Contact IN 2 Off Contact IN 3 Off Contact IN 4 Off Contact IN 5 Off Contact IN 6 Off Contact IN 7 Off Contact IN 8 Off Contact IN 9 Off Contact IN 10 Off Virtual IN 1 On Virtual IN 2 On Virtual IN 3 On Virtual IN 4 On Virtual IN 5 On Virtual IN 6 On Virtual IN 7 On Virtual IN 8 On Virtual IN 9 On Virtual IN 10 On 4–14 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A3 RECORDS Code 0x008A 0x008B 0x008C 0x008D 0x008E 0x008F 0x0090 0x0091 0x0092 0x0093 0x0094 0x0095 0x0096 0x0097 0x0098 0x0099 0x009A 0x009B 0x009C 0x009D 0x009E 0x009F 0x00A0 0x00A1 0x00A2 0x00A3 0x00A4 0x00A5 0x00A6 0x00A7 0x00A8 0x00A9 0x00AA 0x00AB 0x00AC 0x00AD 0x00AE 0x00AF 0x00B0 0x00B1 0x00B2 0x00B3 0x00B4 0x00B5 0x00B6 0x00B7 0x00B8 Type Definition Virtual IN 11 On Virtual IN 12 On Virtual IN 13 On Virtual IN 14 On Virtual IN 15 On Virtual IN 16 On Virtual IN 17 On Virtual IN 18 On Virtual IN 19 On Virtual IN 20 On Virtual IN 21 On Virtual IN 22 On Virtual IN 23 On Virtual IN 24 On Virtual IN 25 On Virtual IN 26 On Virtual IN 27 On Virtual IN 28 On Virtual IN 29 On Virtual IN 30 On Virtual IN 31 On Virtual IN 32 On Virtual IN 1 Off Virtual IN 2 Off Virtual IN 3 Off Virtual IN 4 Off Virtual IN 5 Off Virtual IN 6 Off Virtual IN 7 Off Virtual IN 8 Off Virtual IN 9 Off Virtual IN 10 Off Virtual IN 11 Off Virtual IN 12 Off Virtual IN 13 Off Virtual IN 14 Off Virtual IN 15 Off Virtual IN 16 Off Virtual IN 17 Off Virtual IN 18 Off Virtual IN 19 Off Virtual IN 20 Off Virtual IN 21 Off Virtual IN 22 Off Virtual IN 23 Off Virtual IN 24 Off Virtual IN 25 Off 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–15 .

A3 RECORDS CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES Code 0x00B9 0x00BA 0x00BB 0x00BC 0x00BD 0x00BE 0x00BF 0x01C0 0x01C1 0x01C2 0x01C3 0x01C4 0x01C5 0x01C6 0x01C7 0x01C8 0x01C9 0x01CA 0x01CB 0x01CC 0x01CD 0x01CE 0x01CF 0x01D0 0x01D1 0x01D2 0x01D3 0x01D4 0x01D5 0x01D6 0x01D7 0x01D8 0x01D9 0x01DA 0x01DB 0x01DC 0x01DD 0x01DE 0x01DF 0x01E0 0x01E1 0x01E2 0x01E3 0x01E4 0x01E5 0x01E6 0x01E7 Type Definition Virtual IN 26 Off Virtual IN 27 Off Virtual IN 28 Off Virtual IN 29 Off Virtual IN 30 Off Virtual IN 31 Off Virtual IN 32 Off Remote IN 1 On Remote IN 2 On Remote IN 3 On Remote IN 4 On Remote IN 5 On Remote IN 6 On Remote IN 7 On Remote IN 8 On Remote IN 9 On Remote IN 10 On Remote IN 11 On Remote IN 12 On Remote IN 13 On Remote IN 14 On Remote IN 15 On Remote IN 16 On Remote IN 17 On Remote IN 18 On Remote IN 19 On Remote IN 20 On Remote IN 21 On Remote IN 22 On Remote IN 23 On Remote IN 24 On Remote IN 25 On Remote IN 26 On Remote IN 27 On Remote IN 28 On Remote IN 29 On Remote IN 30 On Remote IN 31 On Remote IN 32 On Remote IN 1 Off Remote IN 2 Off Remote IN 3 Off Remote IN 4 Off Remote IN 5 Off Remote IN 6 Off Remote IN 7 Off Remote IN 8 Off 4–16 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A3 RECORDS Code 0x01E8 0x01E9 0x01EA 0x01EB 0x01EC 0x01ED 0x01EE 0x01EF 0x01F0 0x01F1 0x01F2 0x01F3 0x01F4 0x01F5 0x01F6 0x01F7 0x01F8 0x01F9 0x01FA 0x01FB 0x01FC 0x01FD 0x01FE 0x01FF 0x8041 0x8042 0x8044 0x8049 0x804A 0x804C 0x8051 0x8052 0x8054 0x8061 0x8062 0x8064 0x84C1 0x84C2 0x84C4 0x8501 0x8502 0x8504 0x8541 0x8542 0x8544 0x8581 0x8582 Type Definition Remote IN 9 Off Remote IN 10 Off Remote IN 11 Off Remote IN 12 Off Remote IN 13 Off Remote IN 14 Off Remote IN 15 Off Remote IN 16 Off Remote IN 17 Off Remote IN 18 Off Remote IN 19 Off Remote IN 20 Off Remote IN 21 Off Remote IN 22 Off Remote IN 23 Off Remote IN 24 Off Remote IN 25 Off Remote IN 26 Off Remote IN 27 Off Remote IN 28 Off Remote IN 29 Off Remote IN 30 Off Remote IN 31 Off Remote IN 32 Off Therm O/L Trip PKP Therm O/L Trip OP Therm O/L Trip DPO Therm PhA Trip PKP Therm PhA Trip OP Therm PhA Trip DPO Therm PhB Trip PKP Therm PhB Trip OP Therm PhB Trip DPO Therm PhC Trip PKP Therm PhC Trip OP Therm PhC Trip DPO LE 1 Trip PKP LE 1 Trip OP LE 1 Trip DPO LE 2 Trip PKP LE 2 Trip OP LE 2 Trip DPO LE 3 Trip PKP LE 3 Trip OP LE 3 Trip DPO LE 4 Trip PKP LE 4 Trip OP 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–17 .

A3 RECORDS CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES Code 0x8584 0x85C1 0x85C2 0x85C4 0x8601 0x8602 0x8604 0x8641 0x8642 0x8644 0x8681 0x8682 0x8684 0x9001 0x9002 0x9004 0x9009 0x900A 0x900C 0x9011 0x9012 0x9014 0x9021 0x9022 0x9024 0x9041 0x9042 0x9044 0x9081 0x9082 0x9084 0x90C1 0x90C2 0x90C4 0x90C9 0x90CA 0x90CC 0x90D1 0x90D2 0x90D4 0x90E1 0x90E2 0x90E4 0x9101 0x9102 0x9104 0x9141 Type Definition LE 4 Trip DPO LE 5 Trip PKP LE 5 Trip OP LE 5 Trip DPO LE 6 Trip PKP LE 6 Trip OP LE 6 Trip DPO LE 7 Trip PKP LE 7 Trip OP LE 7 Trip DPO LE 8 Trip PKP LE 8 Trip OP LE 8 Trip DPO Ph IOC1 Trip PKP Ph IOC1 Trip OP Ph IOC1 Trip DPO Ph A IOC1 Trip PKP Ph A IOC1 Trip OP Ph A IOC1 Trip DPO Ph B IOC1 Trip PKP Ph B IOC1 Trip OP Ph B IOC1 Trip DPO Ph C IOC1 Trip PKP Ph C IOC1 Trip OP Ph C IOC1 Trip DPO Ntrl IOC1 Trip PKP Ntrl IOC1 Trip OP Ntrl IOC1 Trip DPO Gnd IOC1 Trip PKP Gnd IOC1 Trip OP Gnd IOC1 Trip DPO Ph TOC1 Trip PKP Ph TOC1 Trip OP Ph TOC1 Trip DPO Ph A TOC1 Trip PKP Ph A TOC1 Trip OP Ph A TOC1 Trip DPO Ph B TOC1 Trip PKP Ph B TOC1 Trip OP Ph B TOC1 Trip DPO Ph C TOC1 Trip PKP Ph C TOC1 Trip OP Ph C TOC1 Trip DPO Ntrl TOC1 Trip PKP Ntrl TOC1 Trip OP Ntrl TOC1 Trip DPO Gnd TOC1 Trip PKP 4–18 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES

A3 RECORDS

Code 0x9142 0x9144 0x9181 0x9182 0x9184 0x9189 0x918A 0x918C 0x9191 0x9192 0x9194 0x91A1 0x91A2 0x91A4 0x91C1 0x91C2 0x91C4 0x9201 0x9202 0x9204 0x9241 0x9242 0x9244 0x9249 0x924A 0x924C 0x9251 0x9252 0x9254 0x9261 0x9262 0x9264 0x9281 0x9282 0x9284 0x92C1 0x92C2 0x92C4 0x9301 0x9302 0x9304 0x9641 0x9642 0x9644 0x9681 0x9682 0x9684

Type

Definition Gnd TOC1 Trip OP Gnd TOC1 Trip DPO Ph IOC2 Trip PKP Ph IOC2 Trip OP Ph IOC2 Trip DPO Ph A IOC2 Trip PKP Ph A IOC2 Trip OP Ph A IOC2 Trip DPO Ph B IOC2 Trip PKP Ph B IOC2 Trip OP Ph B IOC2 Trip DPO Ph C IOC2 Trip PKP Ph C IOC2 Trip OP Ph C IOC2 Trip DPO Ntrl IOC2 Trip PKP Ntrl IOC2 Trip OP Ntrl IOC2 Trip DPO Gnd IOC2 Trip PKP Gnd IOC2 Trip OP Gnd IOC2 Trip DPO Ph TOC2 Trip PKP Ph TOC2 Trip OP Ph TOC2 Trip DPO Ph A TOC2 Trip PKP Ph A TOC2 Trip OP Ph A TOC2 Trip DPO Ph B TOC2 Trip PKP Ph B TOC2 Trip OP Ph B TOC2 Trip DPO Ph C TOC2 Trip PKP Ph C TOC2 Trip OP Ph C TOC2 Trip DPO Ntrl TOC2 Trip PKP Ntrl TOC2 Trip OP Ntrl TOC2 Trip DPO Gnd TOC2 Trip PKP Gnd TOC2 Trip OP Gnd TOC2 Trip DPO SGnd TOC1 Trip PKP SGnd TOC1 Trip OP SGnd TOC1 Trip DPO SGnd IOC1 Trip PKP SGnd IOC1 Trip OP SGnd IOC1 Trip DPO SGnd IOC2 Trip PKP SGnd IOC2 Trip OP SGnd IOC2 Trip DPO

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

4–19

A3 RECORDS

CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES

Code 0x9701 0x9702 0x9704 0x9709 0x970A 0x970C 0x9711 0x9712 0x9714 0x9721 0x9722 0x9724 0x9741 0x9742 0x9744 0x9781 0x9782 0x9784 0x97C1 0x97C2 0x97C4 0x9801 0x9802 0x9804 0x9841 0x9842 0x9844 0x99C1 0x99C2 0x99C4 0x9C01 0x9C02 0x9C04 0x9C41 0x9C42 0x9C44 0x9C81 0x9C82 0x9C84 0x9CC1 0x9CC2 0x9CC4 0x9D01 0x9D02 0x9D04 0x9D41 0x9D42

Type

Definition Pcnt Diff Trip PKP Pcnt Diff Trip OP Pcnt Diff Trip DPO Ph Diff A Trip PKP Ph Diff A Trip OP Ph Diff A Trip DPO Ph Diff B Trip PKP Ph Diff B Trip OP Ph Diff B Trip DPO Ph Diff C Trip PKP Ph Diff C Trip OP Ph Diff C Trip DPO RGF1 Trip PKP RGF1 Trip OP RGF1 Trip DPO RGF2 Trip PKP RGF2 Trip OP RGF2 Trip DPO Inst Diff Trip PKP Inst Diff Trip OP Inst Diff Trip DPO NSeq TOC1 Trip PKP NSeq TOC1 Trip OP NSeq TOC1 Trip DPO NSeq TOC2 Trip PKP NSeq TOC2 Trip OP NSeq TOC2 Trip DPO SGnd TOC2 Trip PKP SGnd TOC2 Trip OP SGnd TOC2 Trip DPO LE 9 Trip PKP LE 9 Trip OP LE 9 Trip DPO LE 10 Trip PKP LE 10 Trip OP LE 10 Trip DPO LE 11 Trip PKP LE 11 Trip OP LE 11 Trip DPO LE 12 Trip PKP LE 12 Trip OP LE 12 Trip DPO LE 13 Trip PKP LE 13 Trip OP LE 13 Trip DPO LE 14 Trip PKP LE 14 Trip OP

4–20

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES

A3 RECORDS

Code 0x9D44 0x9D81 0x9D82 0x9D84 0x9DC1 0x9DC2 0x9DC4 0xA049 0xA04A 0xA04C 0xA051 0xA052 0xA054 0xA061 0xA062 0xA064 0xA482 0xA4C1 0xA4C2 0xA4C4 0xA501 0xA502 0xA504 0xA541 0xA542 0xA544 0xA581 0xA582 0xA584 0xA5C1 0xA5C2 0xA5C4 0xA601 0xA602 0xA604 0xA641 0xA642 0xA644 0xA681 0xA682 0xA684 0xABC1 0xABC2 0xABC4 0xAC01 0xAC02 0xAC04

Type

Definition LE 14 Trip DPO LE 15 Trip PKP LE 15 Trip OP LE 15 Trip DPO LE 16 Trip PKP LE 16 Trip OP LE 16 Trip DPO Therm PhA Alrm PKP Therm PhA Alrm OP Therm PhA Alrm DPO Therm PhB Alrm PKP Therm PhB Alrm OP Therm PhB Alrm DPO Therm PhC Alrm PKP Therm PhC Alrm OP Therm PhC Alrm DPO Relay Not Ready LE 1 Alarm PKP LE 1 Alarm OP LE 1 Alarm DPO LE 2 Alarm PKP LE 2 Alarm OP LE 2 Alarm DPO LE 3 Alarm PKP LE 3 Alarm OP LE 3 Alarm DPO LE 4 Alarm PKP LE 4 Alarm OP LE 4 Alarm DPO LE 5 Alarm PKP LE 5 Alarm OP LE 5 Alarm DPO LE 6 Alarm PKP LE 6 Alarm OP LE 6 Alarm DPO LE 7 Alarm PKP LE 7 Alarm OP LE 7 Alarm DPO LE 8 Alarm PKP LE 8 Alarm OP LE 8 Alarm DPO HI Amb Temp PKP HI Amb Temp OP HI Amb Temp DPO LO Amb Temp PKP LO Amb Temp OP LO Amb Temp DPO

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

4–21

A3 RECORDS

CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES

Code 0xAC42 0xAD01 0xAD02 0xAD04 0xAD41 0xAD42 0xAD44 0xAD81 0xAD82 0xAD84 0xADC2 0xAEC1 0xAEC2 0xAF41 0xAF42 0xAF44 0xB001 0xB002 0xB004 0xB009 0xB00A 0xB00C 0xB011 0xB012 0xB014 0xB021 0xB022 0xB024 0xB041 0xB042 0xB044 0xB081 0xB082 0xB084 0xB0C1 0xB0C2 0xB0C4 0xB0C9 0xB0CA 0xB0CC 0xB0D1 0xB0D2 0xB0D4 0xB0E1 0xB0E2 0xB0E4 0xB101

Type

Definition Self Test Alarm OP R1 CoilMonAlrm PKP R1 CoilMonAlrm OP R1 CoilMonAlrm DPO R2 CoilMonAlrm PKP R2 CoilMonAlrm OP R2 CoilMonAlrm DPO BKR1 Fail Alrm PKP BKR1 Fail Alrm OP BKR1 Fail Alrm DPO BKR Stat Fail OP BKR2 Stat Fail PKP BKR2 Stat Fail OP BKR2 Fail Alrm PKP BKR2 Fail Alrm OP BKR2 Fail Alrm DPO Ph IOC1 Alarm PKP Ph IOC1 Alarm OP Ph IOC1 Alarm DPO Ph A IOC1 Alrm PKP Ph A IOC1 Alrm OP Ph A IOC1 Alrm DPO Ph B IOC1 Alrm PKP Ph B IOC1 Alrm OP Ph B IOC1 Alrm DPO Ph C IOC1 Alrm PKP Ph C IOC1 Alrm OP Ph C IOC1 Alrm DPO Ntrl IOC1 Alrm PKP Ntrl IOC1 Alrm OP Ntrl IOC1 Alrm DPO Gnd IOC1 Alarm PKP Gnd IOC1 Alarm OP Gnd IOC1 Alarm DPO Ph TOC1 Alarm PKP Ph TOC1 Alarm OP Ph TOC1 Alarm DPO Ph A TOC1 Alrm PKP Ph A TOC1 Alrm OP Ph A TOC1 Alrm DPO Ph B TOC1 Alrm PKP Ph B TOC1 Alrm OP Ph B TOC1 Alrm DPO Ph C TOC1 Alrm PKP Ph C TOC1 Alrm OP Ph C TOC1 Alrm DPO Ntrl TOC1 Alrm PKP

4–22

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES

A3 RECORDS

Code 0xB102 0xB104 0xB141 0xB142 0xB144 0xB181 0xB182 0xB184 0xB189 0xB18A 0xB18C 0xB191 0xB192 0xB194 0xB1A1 0xB1A2 0xB1A4 0xB1C1 0xB1C2 0xB1C4 0xB201 0xB202 0xB204 0xB241 0xB242 0xB244 0xB249 0xB24A 0xB24C 0xB251 0xB252 0xB254 0xB261 0xB262 0xB264 0xB281 0xB282 0xB284 0xB2C1 0xB2C2 0xB2C4 0xB301 0xB302 0xB304 0xB641 0xB642 0xB644

Type

Definition Ntrl TOC1 Alrm OP Ntrl TOC1 Alrm DPO Gnd TOC1 Alarm PKP Gnd TOC1 Alarm OP Gnd TOC1 Alarm DPO Ph IOC2 Alarm PKP Ph IOC2 Alarm OP Ph IOC2 Alarm DPO Ph A IOC2 Alrm PKP Ph A IOC2 Alrm OP Ph A IOC2 Alrm DPO Ph B IOC2 Alrm PKP Ph B IOC2 Alrm OP Ph B IOC2 Alrm DPO Ph C IOC2 Alrm PKP Ph C IOC2 Alrm OP Ph C IOC2 Alrm DPO Ntrl IOC2 Alrm PKP Ntrl IOC2 Alrm OP Ntrl IOC2 Alrm DPO Gnd IOC2 Alarm PKP Gnd IOC2 Alarm OP Gnd IOC2 Alarm DPO Ph TOC2 Alarm PKP Ph TOC2 Alarm OP Ph TOC2 Alarm DPO Ph A TOC2 Alrm PKP Ph A TOC2 Alrm OP Ph A TOC2 Alrm DPO Ph B TOC2 Alrm PKP Ph B TOC2 Alrm OP Ph B TOC2 Alrm DPO Ph C TOC2 Alrm PKP Ph C TOC2 Alrm OP Ph C TOC2 Alrm DPO Ntrl TOC2 Alrm PKP Ntrl TOC2 Alrm OP Ntrl TOC2 Alrm DPO Gnd TOC2 Alarm PKP Gnd TOC2 Alarm OP Gnd TOC2 Alarm DPO SGnd TOC1 Alrm PKP SGnd TOC1 Alrm OP SGnd TOC1 Alrm DPO SGnd IOC1 Alrm PKP SGnd IOC1 Alrm OP SGnd IOC1 Alrm DPO

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

4–23

A3 RECORDS CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES Code 0xB681 0xB682 0xB684 0xB701 0xB702 0xB704 0xB709 0xB70A 0xB70C 0xB711 0xB712 0xB714 0xB721 0xB722 0xB724 0xB741 0xB742 0xB744 0xB781 0xB782 0xB784 0xB7C1 0xB7C2 0xB7C4 0xB801 0xB802 0xB804 0xB841 0xB842 0xB844 0xB9C1 0xB9C2 0xB9C4 0xBC01 0xBC02 0xBC04 0xBC41 0xBC42 0xBC44 0xBC81 0xBC82 0xBC84 0xBCC1 0xBCC2 0xBCC4 0xBD01 0xBD02 Type Definition SGnd IOC2 Alrm PKP SGnd IOC2 Alrm OP SGnd IOC2 Alrm DPO Pcnt Diff Alrm PKP Pcnt Diff Alrm OP Pcnt Diff Alrm DPO Ph Dif A Alarm PKP Ph Dif A Alarm OP Ph Dif A Alarm DPO Ph Dif B Alarm PKP Ph Dif B Alarm OP Ph Dif B Alarm DPO Ph Dif C Alarm PKP Ph Dif C Alarm OP Ph Dif C Alarm DPO RGF1 Alarm PKP RGF1 Alarm OP RGF1 Alarm DPO RGF2 Alarm PKP RGF2 Alarm OP RGF2 Alarm DPO Inst Diff Alrm PKP Inst Diff Alrm OP Inst Diff Alrm DPO NSeq TOC1 Alrm PKP NSeq TOC1 Alrm OP NSeq TOC1 Alrm DPO NSeq TOC2 Alrm PKP NSeq TOC2 Alrm OP NSeq TOC2 Alrm DPO SGnd TOC2 Alrm PKP SGnd TOC2 Alrm OP SGnd TOC2 Alrm DPO LE 9 Alarm PKP LE 9 Alarm OP LE 9 Alarm DPO LE 10 Alarm PKP LE 10 Alarm OP LE 10 Alarm DPO LE 11 Alarm PKP LE 11 Alarm OP LE 11 Alarm DPO LE 12 Alarm PKP LE 12 Alarm OP LE 12 Alarm DPO LE 13 Alarm PKP LE 13 Alarm OP 4–24 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A3 RECORDS Code 0xBD04 0xBD41 0xBD42 0xBD44 0xBD81 0xBD82 0xBD84 0xBDC1 0xBDC2 0xBDC4 0xC042 0xC082 0xC0C2 0xC102 0xC142 0xC182 0xC184 0xC1C2 0xC1C4 0xC202 0xC2C2 0xC4C1 0xC4C2 0xC4C4 0xC501 0xC502 0xC504 0xC541 0xC542 0xC544 0xC581 0xC582 0xC584 0xC5C1 0xC5C2 0xC5C4 0xC601 0xC602 0xC604 0xC641 0xC642 0xC644 0xC681 0xC682 0xC684 0xC882 0xCA02 Type Definition LE 13 Alarm DPO LE 14 Alarm PKP LE 14 Alarm OP LE 14 Alarm DPO LE 15 Alarm PKP LE 15 Alarm OP LE 15 Alarm DPO LE 16 Alarm PKP LE 16 Alarm OP LE 16 Alarm DPO Output Relay 3 On Output Relay 4 On Output Relay 5 On Output Relay 6 On Self-Test Rly 7 On Output Relay 1 On Output Relay 1 Off Output Relay 2 On Output Relay 2 Off BKR Connected BKR2 Connected LE 1 PKP LE 1 OP LE 1 DPO LE 2 PKP LE 2 OP LE 2 DPO LE 3 PKP LE 3 OP LE 3 DPO LE 4 PKP LE 4 OP LE 4 DPO LE 5 PKP LE 5 OP LE 5 DPO LE 6 PKP LE 6 OP LE 6 DPO LE 7 PKP LE 7 OP LE 7 DPO LE 8 PKP LE 8 OP LE 8 DPO Setpoint Group2 On 52a Contact OP 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–25 .

A3 RECORDS CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES Code 0xCA42 0xCA44 0xCA82 0xCCC2 0xCD02 0xCD42 0xD001 0xD002 0xD004 0xD041 0xD042 0xD044 0xD081 0xD082 0xD084 0xD0C1 0xD0C2 0xD0C4 0xD101 0xD102 0xD104 0xD141 0xD142 0xD144 0xD181 0xD182 0xD184 0xD1C1 0xD1C2 0xD1C4 0xD201 0xD202 0xD204 0xD241 0xD242 0xD244 0xD281 0xD282 0xD284 0xD2C1 0xD2C2 0xD2C4 0xD301 0xD302 0xD304 0xD641 0xD642 Type Definition 52b Contact OP 52b Contact DPO Reset OK BKR Stat Open BKR Stat Clsd Setpoint Group1 On Ph IOC1 PKP Ph IOC1 OP Ph IOC1 DPO Ntrl IOC1 PKP Ntrl IOC1 OP Ntrl IOC1 DPO Gnd IOC1 PKP Gnd IOC1 OP Gnd IOC1 DPO Ph TOC1 PKP Ph TOC1 OP Ph TOC1 DPO Ntrl TOC1 PKP Ntrl TOC1 OP Ntrl TOC1 DPO Gnd TOC1 PKP Gnd TOC1 OP Gnd TOC1 DPO Ph IOC2 PKP Ph IOC2 OP Ph IOC2 DPO Ntrl IOC2 PKP Ntrl IOC2 OP Ntrl IOC2 DPO Gnd IOC2 PKP Gnd IOC2 OP Gnd IOC2 DPO Ph TOC2 PKP Ph TOC2 OP Ph TOC2 DPO Ntrl TOC2 PKP Ntrl TOC2 OP Ntrl TOC2 DPO Gnd TOC2 PKP Gnd TOC2 OP Gnd TOC2 DPO SGnd TOC1 PKP SGnd TOC1 OP SGnd TOC1 DPO SGnd IOC1 PKP SGnd IOC1 OP 4–26 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A3 RECORDS Code 0xD644 0xD681 0xD682 0xD684 0xD701 0xD702 0xD704 0xD741 0xD742 0xD744 0xD781 0xD782 0xD784 0xD7C1 0xD7C2 0xD7C4 0xD801 0xD802 0xD804 0xD841 0xD842 0xD844 0xD9C1 0xD9C2 0xD9C4 0xDA02 0xDA04 0xDA42 0xDA44 0xDA82 0xDA84 0xDAC1 0xDAC2 0xDAC4 0xDB01 0xDB02 0xDB04 0xDB41 0xDB42 0xDB44 0xDB8A 0xDB92 0xDBA2 0xDBCA 0xDBD2 0xDBE2 0xDC01 Type Definition SGnd IOC1 DPO SGnd IOC2 PKP SGnd IOC2 OP SGnd IOC2 DPO Pcnt DIFF PKP Pcnt DIFF OP Pcnt DIFF DPO RGF1 PKP RGF1 OP RGF1 DPO RGF2 PKP RGF2 OP RGF2 DPO Inst Diff PKP Inst Diff OP Inst Diff DPO NSeq TOC1 PKP NSeq TOC1 OP NSeq TOC1 DPO NSeq TOC2 PKP NSeq TOC2 OP NSeq TOC2 DPO SGnd TOC2 PKP SGnd TOC2 OP SGnd TOC2 DPO BKR2 52a Cont OP BKR2 52a Cont DPO BKR2 52b Cont OP BKR2 52b Cont DPO BKR2 Stat Open OP BKR2 Stat Open DPO BKR2 Stat Clsd PKP BKR2 Stat Clsd OP BKR2 Stat Clsd DPO Trip BKR 1 PKP Trip BKR 1 OP Trip BKR 1 DPO Trip BKR 2 PKP Trip BKR 2 OP Trip BKR 2 DPO 2ND HMNC DIFF PH A 2ND HMNC DIFF PH B 2ND HMNC DIFF PH C 5TH HMNC DIFF PH A 5TH HMNC DIFF PH B 5TH HMNC DIFF PH C LE 9 PKP 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–27 .

A3 RECORDS CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES Code 0xDC02 0xDC04 0xDC41 0xDC42 0xDC44 0xDC81 0xDC82 0xDC84 0xDCC1 0xDCC2 0xDCC4 0xDD01 0xDD02 0xDD04 0xDD41 0xDD42 0xDD44 0xDD81 0xDD82 0xDD84 0xDDC1 0xDDC2 0xDDC4 0xE042 0xE044 0xE182 0xE184 0xE1C2 0xE1C4 0xE882 0xE884 0xF002 0xF004 0xF042 0xF044 0xF082 0xF084 0xF0C2 0xF0C4 0xF102 0xF104 0xF142 0xF144 0xF182 0xF184 0xF1C2 0xF1C4 Type Definition LE 9 OP LE 9 DPO LE 10 PKP LE 10 OP LE 10 DPO LE 11 PKP LE 11 OP LE 11 DPO LE 12 PKP LE 12 OP LE 12 DPO LE 13 PKP LE 13 OP LE 13 DPO LE 14 PKP LE 14 OP LE 14 DPO LE 15 PKP LE 15 OP LE 15 DPO LE 16 PKP LE 16 OP LE 16 DPO Therm O/L Blck OP Therm O/L Blck Off Output Relay 1 BLK Relay 1 BLK Off Output Relay 2 BLK Relay 2 BLK Off Group Change Blk Grp Change Blk DPO Ph IOC1 Block Ph IOC1 Block DPO Ntrl IOC1 Block Ntrl IOC1 Blk DPO Gnd IOC1 Block Gnd IOC1 Block DPO Ph TOC1 Block Ph TOC1 Block DPO Ntrl TOC1 Block Ntrl TOC1 BlockDPO Gnd TOC1 Block Gnd TOC1 Block DPO Ph IOC2 Block Ph IOC2 Block DPO Ntrl IOC2 Block Ntrl IOC2 Blk DPO 4–28 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A3 RECORDS Code 0xF202 0xF204 0xF242 0xF244 0xF282 0xF284 0xF2C2 0xF2C4 0xF302 0xF304 0xF642 0xF644 0xF682 0xF684 0xF702 0xF704 0xF742 0xF744 0xF782 0xF784 0xF7C2 0xF7C4 0xF802 0xF804 0xF842 0xF844 0xF9C2 0xF9C4 0xFB02 0xFB04 0xFB42 0xFB44 0xFB82 0xFB84 0xFBC2 0xFBC4 Type Definition Gnd IOC2 Block Gnd IOC2 Block DPO Ph TOC2 Block Ph TOC2 Block DPO Ntrl TOC2 Block Ntrl TOC2 Blk DPO Gnd TOC2 Block Gnd TOC2 Blk DPO SGnd TOC1 Block SGnd TOC1 BlockDPO SGnd IOC1 Block SGnd IOC1 Blk DPO SGnd IOC2 Block SGnd IOC2 Blk DPO Pcnt Diff Block Ph Diff Block DPO RGF1 Block RGF1 Block DPO RGF2 Block RGF2 Block DPO Inst Diff Block Inst Diff BlockDPO NSeq TOC1 Blk NSeq TOC1 Blk DPO NSeq TOC2 Blk NSeq TOC2 Blk DPO SGnd TOC2 Block SGnd TOC2 Blk DPO Trip BKR1 Blk Trip BKR1 Blk DPO Trip BKR2 Blk Trip BKR2 Blk DPO 2nd Hmnc Diff Blk 2nd Hmnc Diff BlkDPO 5th Hmnc Diff Blk 5th Hmnc Diff BlkDPO 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–29 .

Clear transient record PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A3 RECORDS > CLEAR TRANST REC CLEAR No Range: No.A3 RECORDS CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES Transient records PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A3 RECORDS > TRANSIENT RECORDS FORCE TRIGGER? No Range: No. Yes When set to "Yes. Yes When set to "Yes. 4–30 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . Yes When set to "Yes. Yes TOTAL RECORDS 1 Range: N/A AVAILABLE RECORDS 1 Range: N/A LAST CLEARED Feb 08 2009 Range: N/A Clear event record PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A3 RECORDS > CLEAR EVENT REC CLEAR No Range: No." pressing the ENTER key will clear all event records. Clear thermal capacity record PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A3 RECORDS > CLEAR THERM CAP CLEAR No Range: No." pressing the ENTER key will clear all thermal capacity records." pressing the ENTER key will clear all transient records.

where they can be reviewed. Alert 1 Comm. the display will not show the target messages. The relay displays the most recent event first. but any of the other faceplate pushbuttons is pressed. unless the user navigates to ACTUAL VALUES > A4 TARGET MESSAGES. Alert 2 Comm. until the Reset command is initiated. trips. Alert 3 Ethernet Link Fail High ENET Traffic Ambient Temp. The following table from the 345 Communication Guide shows the list of Target Messages Code FC134A 0 7 8 14 15 16 17 18 19 21 0x8040 0x8480 0x84C0 0x8500 0x8540 0x8580 0x85C0 0x8600 0x8640 0x8680 0x9000 0x9040 0x9080 0x90C0 0x9100 0x9140 0x9180 0x91C0 0x9200 0x9240 0x9280 Type unsigned 16 bits Definition Active Targets No Active Targets Clock Not Set IRIG-B Failure Comm. If the Reset command is not performed.CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A4 TARGET MESSAGES A4 Target messages Target messages are automatically displayed for any active condition on the relay such as pickups. >80C BKR2 Status Unkwn Therm O/L Trip Relay Not Config LE 1 Trip LE 2 Trip LE 3 Trip LE 4 Trip LE 5 Trip LE 6 Trip LE 7 Trip LE 8 Trip Ph IOC1 Trip Ntrl IOC1 Trip Gnd IOC1 Trip Ph TOC1 Trip Ntrl TOC1 Trip Gnd TOC1 Trip Ph IOC2 Trip Ntrl IOC2 Trip Gnd IOC2 Trip Ph TOC2 Trip Ntrl TOC2 Trip 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–31 . The target messages can be reviewed by pressing Up and Down message pushbuttons from the relay keypad. The target messages shown in the table below are displayed as necessary. and after 5 seconds starts rolling up the other target messages. or asserted input. alarms.

A4 TARGET MESSAGES CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES Code 0x92C0 0x9300 0x9640 0x9680 0x9700 0x9740 0x9780 0x97C0 0x9800 0x9840 0x99C0 0x9C00 0x9C40 0x9C80 0x9CC0 0x9D00 0x9D40 0x9D80 0x9DC0 0xA040 0xA480 0xA4C0 0xA500 0xA540 0xA580 0xA5C0 0xA600 0xA640 0xA680 0xABC0 0xAC00 0xAC40 0xAD00 0xAD40 0xAD80 0xADC0 0xAEC0 0xAF40 0xB000 0xB040 0xB080 0xB0C0 0xB100 0xB140 0xB180 0xB1C0 0xB200 Type Definition Gnd TOC2 Trip SGnd TOC1 Trip SGnd IOC1 Trip SGnd IOC2 Trip Pcnt DIFF Trip RGF1 Trip RGF2 Trip Inst DIFF Trip NSeq TOC1 Trip NSeq TOC2 Trip SGnd TOC2 Trip LE 9 Trip LE 10 Trip LE 11 Trip LE 12 Trip LE 13 Trip LE 14 Trip LE 15 Trip LE 16 Trip Therm Lvl Alrm Not Configured LE 1 Alarm LE 2 Alarm LE 3 Alarm LE 4 Alarm LE 5 Alarm LE 6 Alarm LE 7 Alarm LE 8 Alarm HI Ambient Temp LO Ambient Temp Self Test Alarm Rly1 Coil Mn Alrm Rly2 Coil Mn Alrm BKR Fail Alrm BKRStatus Fail BKR2 Status Fail BKR2 Fail Alrm Ph IOC1 Alarm Ntrl IOC1 Alarm Gnd IOC1 Alarm Ph TOC1 Alarm Ntrl TOC1 Alrm Gnd TOC1 Alarm Ph IOC2 Alarm Ntrl IOC2 Alarm Gnd IOC2 Alarm 4–32 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A4 TARGET MESSAGES Code 0xB240 0xB280 0xB2C0 0xB300 0xB640 0xB680 0xB700 0xB740 0xB780 0xB7C0 0xB800 0xB840 0xB9C0 0xBC00 0xBC40 0xBC80 0xBCC0 0xBD00 0xBD40 0xBD80 0xBDC0 0xC200 0xC2C0 0xC4C0 0xC500 0xC540 0xC580 0xC5C0 0xC600 0xC640 0xC680 0xC880 0xC980 0xCA00 0xCA40 0xCA80 0xCD00 0xCD40 0xD000 0xD040 0xD080 0xD0C0 0xD100 0xD140 0xD180 0xD1C0 0xD200 Type Definition Ph TOC2 Alarm Ntrl TOC2 Alrm Gnd TOC2 Alarm SGnd TOC1 Alarm SGnd IOC1 Alarm SGnd IOC2 Alarm Pcnt DIFF Alarm RGF1 Alarm RGF2 Alarm Inst DIFF Alarm NSeq TOC1 Alarm NSeq TOC2 Alarm SGnd TOC2 Alarm LE 9 Alarm LE 10 Alarm LE 11 Alarm LE 12 Alarm LE 13 Alarm LE 14 Alarm LE 15 Alarm LE 16 Alarm BKR Connected BKR2 Connected LE 1 LE 2 LE 3 LE 4 LE 5 LE 6 LE 7 LE 8 Setpoint Group2 Maint Required 52a Contact 52b Contact Reset OK BKR Stat Clsd Setpoint Group1 Ph IOC1 Ntrl IOC1 Gnd IOC1 Ph TOC1 Ntrl TOC1 Gnd TOC1 Ph IOC2 Ntrl IOC2 Gnd IOC2 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–33 .

A4 TARGET MESSAGES CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES Code 0xD240 0xD280 0xD2C0 0xD300 0xD640 0xD680 0xD6C0 0xD700 0xD740 0xD780 0xD7C0 0xD800 0xD840 0xD9C0 0xDA00 0xDA40 0xDA80 0xDAC0 0xDB00 0xDB40 0xDB80 0xDBC0 0xDC00 0xDC40 0xDC80 0xDCC0 0xDD00 0xDD40 0xDD80 0xDDC0 0xE040 0xE180 0xE1C0 0xE880 0xF000 0xF040 0xF080 0xF0C0 0xF100 0xF140 0xF180 0xF1C0 0xF200 0xF240 0xF280 0xF2C0 0xF300 Type Definition Ph TOC2 Ntrl TOC2 Gnd TOC2 SGnd TOC1 SGnd IOC1 SGnd IOC2 NegSeq IOC Pcnt DIFF RGF1 RGF2 Inst DIFF NSeq TOC1 NSeq TOC2 SGnd TOC2 BKR 2 52a Contact BKR 2 52b Contact BKR 2 Status Open BKR2 Status Closed Trip Breaker 1 Trip Breaker 2 2nd Hmnc Diff 5th Hmnc Diff LE 9 LE 10 LE 11 LE 12 LE 13 LE 14 LE 15 LE 16 Therm O/L Blck Output Relay 1 BLK Output Relay 2 BLK Group Change Blk Ph IOC1 Block Ntrl IOC1 Block Gnd IOC1 Block Ph TOC1 Block Ntrl TOC1 Block Gnd TOC1 Block Ph IOC2 Block Ntrl IOC2 Block Gnd IOC2 Block Ph TOC2 Block Ntrl TOC2 Block Gnd TOC2 Block SGnd TOC1 Block 4–34 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

if the breaker is detected “Open”.00 x CT PH IOC1 DELAY = 0. Virtual Input ON/OFF. or “LATCHED ALARM”. The OP and BKR Status messages will appear on the relay display. • • • Examples of how the messages appear on the display: Example 1: Phase IOC1 Settings: • • • PH IOC1 FUNCTION = Trip PH IOC1 PICKUP = 1. the message “Breaker Open OK” will disappear. when either the protection element drops out before operation. will be logged in the Event recorder. the message “Breaker Open OK” will appear on the display and will stay for 5 seconds. such as when the condition clears before reaching operation. and will disappear upon Reset command. when the condition causing operation clears. the display shows the following message only: A4 TARGET MESSAGES Ph IOC1 Trip STATE: OP 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 4–35 . For example. unless the reset command is initiated. The message will stay on the display after the condition clears.CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES A4 TARGET MESSAGES Code 0xF640 0xF680 0xF6C0 0xF700 0xF740 0xF780 0xF7C0 0xF800 0xF840 0xF9C0 0xFB00 0xFB40 0xFB80 0xFBC0 Type Definition SGnd IOC1 Block SGnd IOC2 Block NegSeq IOC Block Pcnt DIFF Block RGF1 Block RGF2 Block Inst DIFF Block NSeq TOC1 Block NSeq TOC2 Block SGnd TOC2 Block Trip BKR1 Block Trip BKR2 Block 2nd Hmnc Diff Blk 5th Hmnc Diff Blk • The PKP messages will appear on the relay display as long as their respective flags are active. The Contact Input ON/OFF. unless the breaker status changes to “Close”. or “CONTROL”. If the breaker status changes to "Close" within 5 seconds after the breaker has been detected open. when the respective element operates. and Remote Input ON/OFF messages will not appear as target messages upon change of state. If the element function is selected to “ALARM”. or when the protection element operates. The state change. however. The messages will disappear from the display. the 345 display shows the following target message: A4 TARGET MESSAGES Ph IOC1 Trip STATE: PKP After the 200 ms time delay expires. with the element function set to “TRIP”. The Breaker Open and Breaker Close messages will appear on the display and stay for 5 seconds only. or the element changes its state. and the message “Breaker Close OK” will appear and stay for 5 seconds.20 s When current greater than the IOC1 pickup level is applied. the message will disappear from the display.

20 s When current greater than the IOC1 pickup level is applied.A4 TARGET MESSAGES CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES Example 2: Phase IOC1 Settings: • • • PH IOC1 FUNCTION = Latched Alarm PH IOC1 PICKUP = 1.20 s When current greater than the IOC1 pickup level is applied.00 x CT PH IOC1 DELAY = 0. NOTE 4–36 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . the display shows the following message only: A4 TARGET MESSAGES Ph IOC1 Alarm STATE: OP NOTE: Once the condition clears. the 345 display shows the following target message: A4 TARGET MESSAGES Ph IOC1 Alarm STATE: PKP After the 200 ms time delay expires. the target message will disappear.00 x CT PH IOC1 DELAY = 0. the display shows the following message only: A4 TARGET MESSAGES Ph IOC1 Alarm STATE: OP Example 3: Phase IOC1 Settings: • • • PH IOC1 FUNCTION = Alarm PH IOC1 PICKUP = 1. the 345 display shows the following target message: A4 TARGET MESSAGES Ph IOC1 Alarm STATE: PKP After the 200 ms time delay expires.

and can be used for quick and easy programming. Power transformer parameters.Front control panel Quick setup .Digital Energy 345 Transformer Protection System Chapter 5: Quick setup . Use the “Quick Setup” utility to program the following: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • NOTE: Relay Status Nominal Frequency W1 Phase CT Primary W1 Ground CT Primary W2 Phase CT Primary W2 Ground CT Primary Transformer Type Transformer Rated Load W1 Nominal Voltage W1 Grounding W2 Nominal Voltage W2 Grounding Transformer Percent Differential Phase TOC1 Function Ground TOC1 Function Phase IOC1 Function Ground IOC1 Function Ensure the relay is in "Relay Ready" state before using Quick Setup. and settings for the commonly used transformer elements can be easily set.Front control panel The “Quick Setup” utility is part of the 345 relay main menu. NOTE Figure 1: Quick Setup menu 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–1 .

FRONT CONTROL PANEL ACTUAL VALUES QUICK SETUP SETPOINTS MAINTENANCE QUICK SETUP RELAY STATUS ▼ NOMINAL FREQUENCY W1 PH CT PRIMARY W1 PH CT SECONDARY W1 GND CT PRIMARY W1 GND CT SECONDARY W2 PH CT PRIMARY W2 PH CT SECONDARY W2 GND CT PRIMARY W2 GND CT SECONDARY TRANSFORMER TYPE XFMR RATED LOAD W1 NOM VOLTAGE W1 GROUNDING W2 NOM VOLTAGE W2 GROUNDING XFMR PERCENT DIFF PH TOC1 FUNCTION GND TOC1 FUNCTION PH IOC1 FUNCTION GND IOC1 FUNCTION XFMR PERCENT DIFF PCNT DIFF FUNCTION ▼ MINIMUM PICKUP SLOPE 1 BREAKPOINT 1 BREAKPOINT 2 SLOPE 2 PHASE TOC1 PH TOC1 FUNCTION ▼ PHASE CT INPUT PH TOC1 PICKUP PH TOC1 CURVE PH TOC1 TDM RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR GROUND TOC1 GND TOC1 FUNCTION ▼ GND CT INPUT GND TOC1 PICKUP GND TOC1 CURVE GND TOC1 TDM RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR PHASE IOC1 PH IOC1 FUNCTION ▼ PH CT INPUT PH IOC1 PICKUP RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR GROUND IOC1 GND IOC1 FUNCTION ▼ GND CT INPUT GND IOC1 PICKUP 897759A2.cdr RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR 5–2 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .CHAPTER 5: QUICK SETUP .

52b. Within Zone Default: Not Within Zone W2 NOM VOLTAGE Range: 0..0 kV in steps of 0. 50 Hz Default: 60 Hz W1 PH CT PRIMARY Range: 1 A to 6000 A in steps of 1 Default: 5 A W1 GND/SGND CT PRIMARY Range: 1 A to 6000/600 A in steps of 1 Default: 5 A W2 PH CT PRIMARY Range: 1 A to 6000 A in steps of 1 Default: 5 A W2 GND/SGND CT PRIMARY Range: 1 A to 6000/600 A in steps of 1 Default: 5 A TRANSFORMER TYPE Range: Refer to above "Transformer Types" table Default: Y/d30 XFMR RATED LOAD Range: 0.0 MVA W1 NOM VOLTAGE Range: 0. Latched Alarm. Alarm Default: Disabled ↘ 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–3 . Ready Default: Not Ready NOMINAL FREQUENCY Range: 60 Hz.CHAPTER 5: QUICK SETUP .FRONT CONTROL PANEL QUICK SETUP MENU Quick Setup menu The setpoints below can be programmed under the "Quick Setup" menu.16 kV W2 GROUNDING Range: Not Within Zone. should be programmed under SETPOINTS > SYSTEM SETUP > BREAKER.01 to 50. Trip.1 to 65.8 kV W1 GROUNDING Range: Not Within Zone. or both of these contacts.1 kV Default: 4.01 MVA Default: 5.1 to 65. Within Zone Default: Not Within Zone XFMR PERCENT DIFF Range: Disabled. PATH: QUICK SETUP > RELAY STATUS Range: Not Ready.00 MVA in steps of 0.1 kV Default: 13.0 kV in steps of 0. Note that monitoring of Breaker Status via 52a.

50 x CT SLOPE 2 Range: 50 to 100% in steps of 1% Default: 95% PH TOC1 FUNCTION Range: Disabled.04 to 20. Alarm Default: Disabled ↘ PHASE CT INPUT Range: CT(W1).00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT Default: 0.00 in steps of 0.00 RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR Range: Do Not Operate. Alarm Default: Disabled MINIMUM PICKUP Range: 0.01 x CT Default: 1.00 x CT PH TOC1 CURVE Range: ANSI Extremely/Very/Moderately/Normally Inverse.10 x CT SLOPE 1 Range: 15 to 100% in steps of 1% Default: 25% BREAKPOINT 1 Range: 0. Inverse PH TOC1 TDM Range: 0. IAC Extremely/Very/Inverse/ Short Default: Ext.05 to 20. Operate Default: Do not operate RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR Range: Do Not Operate. Trip. IEC Curve A/B/C and Short Inverse.00 x CT in steps of 0.00 x CT in steps of 0. Latched Alarm.50 to 10. Alarm Default: Disabled ↘ 5–4 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .50 to 4.01 Default: 1.05 to 1. Trip. Latched Alarm.50 x CT BREAKPOINT 2 Range: 0. Trip.FRONT CONTROL PANEL PCNT DIFF FUNCTION Range: Disabled. Operate Default: Do not operate GND TOC1 FUNCTION Range: Disabled.01 x CT Default: 1.01 x CT Default: 1. Definite Time.QUICK SETUP MENU CHAPTER 5: QUICK SETUP . Latched Alarm. CT(W2) Default: CT(W1) PH TOC1 PICKUP Range: 0.00 x CT in steps of 0.

00 in steps of 0. Trip.05 to 20. Operate Default: Do not operate RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR Range: Do not operate.01 x CT Default: 1.05 to 20. IAC Extremely/Very/Inverse/ Short Default: Ext. Operate Default: Do not operate PH IOC1 FUNCTION Range: Disabled. Operate Default: Do not operate GND IOC FUNCTION Range: Disabled. IEC Curve A/B/C and Short Inverse. Definite Time. Operate Default: Do not operate RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR Range: Do not operate. Inverse GND TOC1 TDM Range: 0.01 x CT Default: 1.00 x CT RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR Range: Do not operate. Trip.00 RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR Range: Do not operate.FRONT CONTROL PANEL QUICK SETUP MENU GND CT INPUT Range: CT(W1). CT(W2) Default: CT(W1) PH IOC1 PICKUP Range: 0. Latched Alarm.CHAPTER 5: QUICK SETUP . Latched Alarm. CT(W2) Default: CT(W1) GND TOC1 PICKUP Range: 0.01 Default: 1. Alarm Default: Disabled ↘ 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5–5 . Alarm Default: Disabled ↘ PH CT INPUT Range: CT(W1).00 x CT in steps of 0.00 x CT in steps of 0.04 to 20.00 x CT GND TOC1 CURVE Range: ANSI Extremely/Very/Moderately/Normally Inverse.

QUICK SETUP MENU CHAPTER 5: QUICK SETUP . 5–6 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . are available for review and modification by navigating through S2 SYSTEM SETUP and S3 PROTECTION > SETPOINT GROUP 1 in the SETPOINTS main menu. CT(W2) Default: CT(W1) GND IOC1 PICKUP Range: 0. Operate Default: Do not operate RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR Range: Do not operate.01 x CT Default: 1.00 x CT RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR Range: Do not operate.05 to 20. Operate Default: Do not operate NOTE: NOTE menu are available for rew The settings changed using the Quick Setup menu.00 x CT in steps of 0.FRONT CONTROL PANEL GND CT INPUT Range: CT(W1).

all of which make the relay extremely flexible. Each setpoints menu has a section that describes in detail the setpoints found on that menu. These setpoints have been grouped into a variety of pages and subpages as shown below. Figure 1: Setpoints main menu SETPOINTS S1 RELAY SETUP S2 SYSTEM SETUP S3 PROTECTION ▼ S4 CONTROLS S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS S1 RELAY SETUP CLOCK PASSWORD SECURITY COMMUNICATIONS ▼ EVENT RECORDER TRANSIENT RECDR FRONT PANEL INSTALLATION S4 CONTROLS CHANGE SETP GROUP VIRTUAL INPUTS LOGIC ELEMENTS S2 SYSTEM SETUP CURRENT SENSING POWER SYSTEM TRANSFORMER ▼ WNDG 1 BREAKER WNDG 2 BREAKER S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS CONTACT INPUTS OUTPUT RELAYS VIRTUAL INPUTS 897757A1.Digital Energy 345 Transformer Protection System Chapter 6: Setpoints Setpoints Setpoints Main Menu The 345 has a considerable number of programmable setpoints.cdr S3 PROTECTION SETPOINT GROUP 1 SETPOINT GROUP 2 ▼ W1 BREAKER FAIL W2 BREAKER FAIL RESET 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–1 .

however. and protection settings must be entered using one of the following methods: • • • Front panel. Ethernet 10/100 BaseT (optional) port.output relays and displays the appropriate alarm message. • FUNCTION setpoint: The <ELEMENT_NAME> FUNCTION setpoint determines the operational characteristic of each feature. the GE EnerVista CD with the EnerVista SR3 Setup software is supplied with the relay. and a SCADA system running user-written software. To facilitate this process. the feature is operational. The range is any combination of the Auxiliary relays (Auxiliary Relays 3 to 6). relay outputs. then the feature is operational. When an output is generated. the feature operates any selected output relays. setpoints defining system characteristics. If <ELEMENT_NAME > FUNCTION: “Disabled”. “Alarm”. Front USB port. the feature declares a Trip condition. • 6–2 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . Files can be stored and downloaded for fast. or rear RS485. If <ELEMENT_NAME> FUNCTION: “Alarm” or “Latched Alarm”. the critical failure relay will be de-energized. Common setpoints To make the application of this device as simple as possible. error free entry when a computer is used. Rear serial RS485. makes entry much easier. PICKUP setpoint: The <ELEMENT_NAME> PICKUP setpoint selects the threshold above which the measured parameter causes an output from the measuring element.SETPOINTS MAIN MENU CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Setpoint entry methods Before placing the relay into “IN SERVICE” mode. similar methods of operation and similar types of setpoints are incorporated in various features. output relays. a general description is presented in this overview. At a minimum. The range for these setpoints is two or more of: “Disabled”. The form and nature of these setpoints is described below. When an output is generated. any other selected aux. When an output is generated. the feature declares an “Alarm” condition which operates any selected aux. Rather than repeat operation descriptions for this class of setpoint throughout the manual. using the keypad and the display. the feature is not operational. To safeguard against the installation of a relay into which setpoints have not been entered. “Enabled”. A computer. then the feature is operational. “Alarm”. and these values are shown throughout the setpoint message illustrations. the S2 SYSTEM SETUP setpoints must be entered for the system to function correctly. Details that are specific to a particular feature are included in the discussion of the feature. “Latched Alarm”. Any of these methods can be used to enter the same information. • RELAYS (3–6) setpoint: The <ELEMENT_NAME> RELAYS (3-6) setpoint selects the relays required to operate when the feature generates an output. If <ELEMENT_NAME> FUNCTION: “Control” the feature is operational. inputs. the Relay Not Ready self-test warning is displayed. The “Trip”. Some of these factory default values can be left unchanged whenever they satisfy the application. and a computer running the EnerVista SR3 Setup software supplied with the relay. Once the relay has been programmed for the intended application. Ethernet 100 FX. If <ELEMENT_NAME > FUNCTION: “Enabled”. and “Control”. If <ELEMENT_NAME > FUNCTION: “Trip”. and “Control” function setpoint values are also used to select those operations that will be stored in the Event Recorder. and displays the appropriate trip message. “Trip”. and operates the Trip relay (output relay 1). The relay leaves the factory with setpoints programmed to default values. In addition. the S1 RELAY SETUP/ INSTALLATION/ RELAY STATUS setpoint should be changed from “Not Ready” (the default) to “Ready”.

the element is allowed to operate for current flow in any direction. or both. Time Delays: Shown as a block with either pickup. The measurement/ comparison can only be performed if a logic ‘1’ is provided at the ‘RUN’ input. The time from a contact input change of state or an AC parameter input level change to a contact closure of the 1 Trip relay. “Forward”. The range is “Disabled”. Logic: Described with basic logic gates (AND. etc. If set to “Disabled”. The exact wording of the front panel label identifies the indicator. • Logic diagrams The logic diagrams provide a complete comprehensive understanding of the operation of each feature. • Setpoints: Shown as a block with a heading labeled ‘SETPOINT’. and “Reverse”. These sequential logic diagrams illustrate how each setpoint. as determined by the directional element. Element operation of the detector is controlled by the signal entering the ‘RUN’ inset. as determined by the directional element. NAND. drop-out. Major functional setpoint selections are listed below the name and are incorporated in the logic. • • • • Setting text abbreviations The following abbreviations are used in the setpoints pages. The exact wording of the displayed setpoint message identifies the setpoint. If the delay is adjustable. In addition to these logic diagrams. Compensator Blocks: Shown as a block with an inset box labeled ‘RUN’ with the associated pickup/dropout setpoint shown directly above. times in milliseconds or seconds. the element is allowed to operate for current flow in the reverse direction only. is the time selected as time delay in this setpoint plus approximately up to 2 power frequency periods. • • • • • • • • • • A: amperes kA: kiloamperes kV: kilovolts MVA: mega-volt-amperes AUX: auxiliary COM. associated delay setpoint is shown with block SETPOINT on the top of the delay block. input parameter. is shown as a circle: ○. the element is allowed to operate for current flow in the forward direction only. written descriptions are provided in the setpoints chapter which includes each feature. and internal logic is used in the feature to obtain an output. If set to “Reverse”. The inverter (logical NOT). The relationship between setpoint and input parameter is indicated by the following symbols: “<” (less than) " >” (greater than). NOR). DIRECTION setpoint: The <ELEMENT_NAME> DIRECTION setpoint is available for overcurrent features which are subject to control from a directional element.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS SETPOINTS MAIN MENU • DELAY setpoint: The <ELEMENT_NAME> DELAY setpoint selects a fixed time interval to delay an input signal from appearing at the output. XOR. If set to “Forward”. LED Indicators: Shown as the following schematic symbol. Comms: communications CT: current transformer GND: ground Hz: Hertz MAX: maximum 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–3 . □. There is no supervision from the directional element. OR.

s: seconds Ctrl: control Hr & hr: hour O/L: overload 6–4 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .SETPOINTS MAIN MENU CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS • • • • • MIN: minimum SEC.

When an IRIG- 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–5 . This time stamping is available with the IRIG-B signal connected to the relay terminals and set to “Enabled”.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S1 RELAY SETUP S1 Relay setup Figure 2: Relay setup menu S1 RELAY SETUP CLOCK PASSWORD SECURITY COMMUNICATIONS ▼ EVENT RECORDER TRANSIENT RECDR FRONT PANEL INSTALLATION S1 CLOCK DATE (MM/DD/YYYY) ▼ TIME (HH:MM:SS) DLS ENABLE DLS START MONTH DLS START WEEK DLS START WEEKDAY DLS END MONTH DLS END WEEK DLS END WEEKDAY IRIG-B SNTP MODE SNTP PORT SNTP SERVER IP ADR UTC OFFSET S1 EVENT RECORDER PICKUP EVENTS ▼ DROPOUT EVENTS TRIP EVENTS ALARM EVENTS CONTROL EVENTS CONTACT INPUTS LOGIC ELEMENTS VIRTUAL INPUTS REMOTE INPUTS SETTING DATE/TIME S1 TRANSIENT RECDR BUFFER SETUP ▼ TRIGGER MODE TRIGGER POSITION S1 COMMUNICATIONS RS485 ETHERNET MODBUS PROTOCOL ▼ IEC60870-5-103 IEC60870-5-104 DNP PROTOCOL 61850 PROTOCOL S1 FRONT PANEL FLASH MESSAGE TIME ▼ MESSAGE TIMEOUT SCREEN SAVER W1 BKR OPEN COLOR W1 BKR CLSD COLOR W2 BKR OPEN COLOR W2 BKR CLSD COLOR TRIGGER ON PKP TRIGGER ON DPO TRIGGER ON TRIP TRIGGER ON ALARM TRIGGER ON INPUT 1 TRIGGER ON INPUT 2 TRIGGER ON INPUT 3 S1 PASSWORD SECURITY LOC SETPOINTS PSWD LOC CONTROLS PSWD 897764.cdr S1 INSTALLATION RELAY NAME RELAY STATUS Clock The 345 relay has an internal real time clock that performs time stamping via IRIG-B for various features such as the event and transient recorders.

Jul. Feb. Aug. so if IRIG-B is not the synchronization source but SNTP is.as follows: IRIG-B has the highest priority. Jun. A synchronization command issued from DNP for example.S1 RELAY SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS B device is connected to the relay terminals. Dec Day: 1 to 31 Year: 2009 to 2099 Default: Jan 15 2009 This setting sets the date in the specified format. December Default: Not Set This setting sets the month for the DLS start time. June. Time stamping on multiple relays can be synchronized to ± 1. DLS ENABLE Range: Disabled. In addition. or DNP commands . Synchronization commands are all eventually translated into a MODBUS function. March. so any other source of synchronization should be rejected if IRIG-B is the synchronization source and an IRIG-B signal is available. Oct. Time synchronization priority uses the IRIG-B and SNTP protocols . May. the main CPU will receive UTC time from comms CPU and it needs to apply this in order to pass it to localtime. There is no prioritization amongst synchronization commands. or DNP will be accepted only if IRIG-B and SNTP are not the synchronization sources. Any synchronization commands other than Modbus. July. The following path is available using the keypad. Apr. please refer to Chapter 3 . the main CPU has to maintain the information regarding AV. Time stamping is also optionally available using SNTP.Working with the Keypad. IEC608705-103. October. 4th. then any other source of synchronization should be rejected. and as such are blocked from the MODBUS layer as required. April. Mar. 3rd. 1st.via Modbus. For instructions on how to use the keypad. IEC60870-5-104. IEC60870-5-103. January. IEC60870-5-104. DLS START WEEK: Range: Not Set. August. if SNTP is enabled. February. SNTP has the second highest priority. Last Default: Not Set This setting sets the week of the month for the DLS start time. Enabled Default: Disabled With DLS Enabled. PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > CLOCK DATE: (MM/DD/YYYY) Range: Month: Jan. for example. November. Nov. May. PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > CLOCK > DLS ENABLE [ENABLED] DLS START MONTH: Range: Not Set. TIME: (HH:MM:SS) Range: 0 to 23: 0 to 59: 0 to59 Default: 03:15:50 This setting sets the time in the specified format. can be directly followed by another from MODBUS.0 ms with the use of IRIG-B input.m_DaylightSavingsActive. Sep. Without any other synchronization. September. the relay detects the DC shift or the Amplitude Modulated signal automatically. 6–6 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . DLS correction is applied only at 0200 hours on daylight saving months. because it is necessary in the comms CPU to translate from localtime to UTC in 61850 protocol. 2nd.

September. 3. May. and the Weekday defining the beginning of the Daylight Saving time. FRI. The relay has programmable passwords for both Local and Remote access. MON. when an IRIG-B signal is unavailable. The clock has a super-capacitor back-up. 4. Set the date and time per the specified date and time format. which can be used to allow setpoint changes and command execution from both the front panel and the communications ports. PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > CLOCK IRIG-B: Range: Disabled. THU. by selecting the Month. Enabled Default: Disabled This setting enables the IRIG-B signal for time stamp synchronization. The relay will display the message “IRIG-B failure” in the case of either no IRIG-B signal from the connected IRIG-B device. MON. SAT. DLS END WEEK: Range: Not Set. and the Weekday defining the end of the Daylight Saving time. These passwords consist of 3 to 10 alphanumeric characters. WED.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S1 RELAY SETUP DLS START WEEKDAY: Range: Not Set. 3rd. date. the Week of the month. January. When the MRP is programmed to “NULL” all password security is disabled.. Set the start time of the Daylight Saving (DLS) time. FRI. 1st. Last Default: Not Set This setting sets the week of the month for the end of the DLS time. The Master Reset Password (MRP) is set to “NULL” when the relay is shipped from the factory. provided SNTP packets are received. The remote user may choose to allow the local user to change the local passwords. one event and alarm is generated. October. THU. TUE. DLS END MONTH: Range: Not Set. April. Set the end of the Daylight Saving time. SUN Default: Not Set This setting sets the weekday for the end of the DLS time. WED. 2nd. June. The Local and the Remote passwords are initially set after entering in a Master Reset Password (MRP). DLS END WEEKDAY: Range: Not Set. 1. by selecting the Month. so that time. and events will be kept for up to 3 days in cases of loss of relay control power. Set the IRIG-B to “Enabled” if the IRIG-B device is connected to the relay IRIG-B terminals. August. TUE. Since the user has the capability to enable both SNTP and IRIG-B via the HMI. the Week of the month. SUN Default: Not Set This setting sets the weekday for the DLS start time. When the IRIG-B setting is enabled. SAT. Password security Password security features are designed into the relay to provide protection against unauthorized setpoint changes and control. March. or when the signal cannot be decoded. the time received is directly stamped as local date and time. Any other attempted synchronization commands should be ignored in the main CPU. 4th. December Default: Not Set This setting sets the month for the end of the DLS time. the system will synchronize to SNTP. If there is no signal. July. November. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–7 . 2. February.

USB. depending on the interface being accessed Setting and changing of all passwords including the Master Reset Password Disabling password security All Setpoint and Control Level access rights • CONTROL LEVEL • • • • • • MASTER LEVEL • • • For details on Password Security setup and handling using the EnerVista Setup software. The Master Level is used for setting and resetting of passwords. 6–8 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . when an attempt is made to modify a setpoint but access is restricted. but not both simultaneously from the same interface. three levels of security access are provided: Setpoint Level. The Master Level cannot be attained from the keypad. Ethernet. Control Level. For example. If the Master Reset Password is lost. it is up to the programmer to incorporate appropriate security for the application. which allows the user to read setpoints and actual values only. the access level is maintained until a period of 5 minutes of inactivity has elapsed. Further definition of the access levels is described as follows: SETPOINT LEVEL • • • Changing settings under QUICK SETUP menu Changing settings under the SETPOINTS menu except the features requiring control access listed below Changing any setting under MAINTENANCE such as trip and close coil monitoring and breaker maintenance settings. The Setpoint and Control Levels can be attained either locally using the Local passwords (USB port and keypad). and Master Level. or remotely using the Remote passwords (RS485 and Ethernet ports). Aside from being logged out of security. and includes all Setpoint and Control Level access rights. The Master Level can define whether the local user is permitted to change Local Passwords without having to enter the Master Level. and front panel keypad) is independent of one another.. and must contain at least 2 letters and 2 numbers. A power-loss or entering in the wrong password will log the user out of security. and other data Uploading new firmware Changing the Local or Remote Control Password. The Master Reset Password is encrypted. The Master Reset Password must be 8 to 10 characters in length. The user can have either Setpoint or Control Level active. If a SCADA system is used for relay programming. refer to Chapter 3.e. the password must be explicitly entered via the interface from which access is desired).S1 RELAY SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Each interface (RS485. the user should contact the factory to decrypt the Master Reset Password. The EnerVista SR3 Setup software incorporates a facility for programming the relay’s passwords as well as enabling/disabling setpoint access. transient records. except the features requiring control access listed below Changing the Local or Remote Setpoint Password. meaning that enabling setpoint access on one interface does not enable access for any of the other interfaces (i. After password entry. and is not viewable from the keypad. depending on the interface being accessed Reset command Open and Close Breaker commands Virtual Input commands Clearing of event records. the program will prompt the user to enter the password and send it to the relay before the setpoint can actually be written to the relay. after which the password must be re-entered.

and will be prompted to enter a new password. ENTER NEW PASSWORD The user is prompted to enter a new Local Setpoints Password. An INVALID PASSWORD message will appear if a wrong password is entered. User the value up/ down keys to select characters. or the local user does not have the rights to change the password. and use the message left/right keys to move the cursor. Figure 3: Menu for handling password security using 345 keypad S1 PASSWORD SECURITY LOC SETPOINTS PSWD LOC CONTROLS PSWD S1 LOC SETPOINTS PSWD ENTER OLD PASSWORD ▼ ENTER NEW PASSWORD CONFIRM NEW PASSWORD S1 LOC CONTROLS PSWD ENTER OLD PASSWORD ▼ ENTER NEW PASSWORD 897772. and the user will be returned to the Enter New Password page. the user will be prompted to re-enter the new password.cdr CONFIRM NEW PASSWORD The following steps describe how to change the Local Setpoints Password from the keypad. security is disabled. For more details on the Password Security feature. If a valid password was entered. If the passwords do not match. The local user may change a local password from the keypad if all of the following are true: • • • • Security is enabled A valid local setpoint (or local control) password has initially been set The remote user has the Overwrite Local Passwords setpoint set to NO The local user knows the current local password. In addition. refer to Chapter 3. If the correct password was entered. Similar steps are followed to change the Local Control Password. an ENTRY MISMATCH message will appear. the password will remain unchanged. the password has not been originally set. a PASSWORD CHANGED message will appear indicating the Local Setpoints Password has successfully been updated. ENTER OLD PASSWORD The user is prompted to enter the current Local Setpoints Password. A valid password is alphanumeric. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–9 . the user is now logged in to the Setpoints Level from the keypad. Press the Enter key when done. the user will be automatically logged out of security from the keypad. CONFIRM PASSWORD The user is prompted to re-enter the new Local Setpoints Password. If the passwords match.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S1 RELAY SETUP Passwords This section allows the user to change the Local Setpoint and Local Control Passwords. An INVALID PASSWORD message will appear if the new password does not meet the password requirements. and is 3 to 10 characters in length.

cdr S1 61850 GOOSE ENABLE GOOSE ENABLE GOOSE Tx RS485 interface The 345 is equipped with one serial RS485 communication port. It is important that these parameters agree with the settings used on the computer or other equipment that is connected to these ports. This 6–10 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . The RS485 port has settings for baud rate and parity.S1 RELAY SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Communications Figure 4: Communications main menu S1 COMMUNICATIONS RS485 ETHERNET MODBUS PROTOCOL ▼ IEC 60870-5-103 IEC 60870-5-104* DNP PROTOCOL 61850 PROTOCOL** * Available with comms Order Code 1 ** Available with comms Order Code 2 S1 ETHERNET IP ADDRESS ▼ SUBNET IP MASK GATEWAY IP ADDRESS CONNECTION TYPE S1 RS485 RS485 BAUD RATE ▼ RS485 COMM PARITY REAR 485 PROTOCOL S1 MODBUS PROTOCOL MODBUS SLAVE ADR S1 60870-5-103 GENERAL BINARY INPUTS MEASURANDS ▼ COMMANDS S1 60870-5-104 GENERAL CLIENT ADDRESS POINT LIST S1 DNP PROTOCOL DNP GENERAL DNP UNSOL RESPONSE DEFAULT VARIATION ▼ DNP CLIENT ADDRESS DNP POINTS LIST 897766. This port may be connected to a computer running the EnerVista SR3 Setup software.

Select the Settings > Communications > Serial Ports menu item in the EnerVista SR3 Setup program. IP Address Range: Standard IP Address format Default: 000.000 This setting specifies the IP Address for the Ethernet port. 38400. Gateway IP Address Range: Standard IP Address format Default: 000.000 This setting specifies the Gateway IP Address for the Ethernet port.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S1 RELAY SETUP software can download and upload setting files. 57600. 115200 Default: 115200 This setting specifies the baud rate (bits per second) for the RS485 port.000. or PC using the RS485 port. BAUD RATE Range: 9600. Ethernet Select the Setpoints > S1 Relay Setup > Communications > Ethernet menu item in the EnerVista SR3 Setup program. A maximum of 32 345 -series devices can be daisy-chained and connected to a DCS.255. or the SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > ETHERNET path on the display.000. IEC60870-5-103. Figure 5: Serial port configuration settings The following settings are available to configure the RS485 port. PARITY Range: None. to configure the Ethernet port. and upgrade the device firmware. REAR RS485 PROTOCOL Range: Modbus. Odd. The following settings are available to configure the Ethernet port.000 This setting specifies the Subnet IP Mask setting for the Ethernet port. Subnet IP Mask Range: Standard IP Address format Default: 255.0 Default: Modbus This setting specifies the protocol to be used for the rear RS485 port.000. view measured parameters. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–11 . or the SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > RS485 path on the display. PLC. to configure the serial port. DNP 3. Even Default: None This setting specifies the parity for the RS485 port.255. 19200.000.

Address 0 is the broadcast address to which all Modbus slave devices listen. Generally. Modbus is available via the RS485 serial link (Modbus RTU). and control functions using read and write register commands. Each device must have a unique address from 1 to 254. meaning that it never initiates communications. each device added to the link should use the next higher address starting at 1. 6–12 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .S1 RELAY SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Connection Type Range: Copper. fiber Default: Copper This setting specifies the connection type (Copper or Fiber) used for Ethernet communication. The 345 operates as a Modbus slave device only Select the Settings > Communications > Modbus > Protocol menu item in EnerVista SR3 Setup software. A subset of the Modbus protocol format is supported that allows extensive monitoring. The Modbus server can simultaneously support two clients over serial RS485. A user-configurable input and output map is also implemented.Refer to the 345 Feeder Protection System Communications Guide for additional details on the Modbus protocol and the Modbus memory map. programming. NOTE: When changing Ethernet settings. Figure 6: Modbus protocol configuration settings The following Modbus settings are available: MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS Range: 1 to 254 in steps of 1 Default: 254 This setting specifies the Modbus slave address . but no two devices can have the same address or conflicts resulting in errors will occur. or the SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > MODBUS PROTOCOL path to set up the modbus protocol as shown below. Please refer to the 345 Communications Guide for details on how to set up the Modbus communications protocol. The 345 always acts as a slave device. NOTE Modbus The Modicon Modbus protocol is supported by the 345 . The server is capable of reporting any indication or measurement and operating any output present in the device. power to the relay must be cycled in order for the new settings to become active. Addresses do not have to be sequential. it only listens and responds to requests issued by a master device.

NINTH ANLG ENTRY NINTH ANLG FACTOR NINTH ANLG OFFSET NINTH ANLG OFFSET .cdr CMD 15 OFF OPER: The following table. POINT 63 POINT 63FUNC TYPE POINT 63 INFO NO: ID TYPE ▼ FUNCTION TYPE INFORMATION NO SCAN TIMEOUT FIRST ANLG ENTRY FIRST ANLG FACTOR FIRST ANLG OFFSET .CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S1 RELAY SETUP IEC 60870-5-103 serial communication S1 60870-5-103 GENERAL BINARY INPUTS MEASURANDS ▼ COMMANDS PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > IEC61870-5-103 Figure 7: IEC 60870-5-103 serial communication menu S1 103 GENERAL SLAVE ADDRESS ▼ SYNCH TIMEOUT S1 103 FIRST ASDU S1 103 B INPUTS POINT 0 ▼ POINT 0 FUNC TYPE POINT 0 INFO NO: .... CMD 15 FUNC TYPE: CMD 15 INFO NO: CMD 15 ON OPER: FUNCTION TYPE INFORMATION NO SCAN TIMEOUT FIRST ANLG ENTRY FIRST ANLG FACTOR FIRST ANLG OFFSET . . Code FC134B 0 0x0040 0x0041 0x0042 0x0043 0x0044 0x0045 0x0046 0x0047 0x0048 Type unsigned 16 bits Definition DNP Binary Inputs Off Contact IN 1 On Contact IN 2 On Contact IN 3 On Contact IN 4 On Contact IN 5 On Contact IN 6 On Contact IN 7 On Contact IN 8 On Contact IN 9 On 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–13 .. shows the list of Binary Inputs.. S1 103 FOURTH ASDU 897770. NINTH ANLG ENTRY NINTH ANLG FACTOR S1 103 MEASURANDS FIRST ASDU SECOND ASDU THIRD ASDU ▼ FOURTH ASDU ID TYPE ▼ S1 103 COMMANDS CMD 0 FUNC TYPE ▼ CMD 0 INFO NO: CMD 0 ON OPER: CMD 0 OFF OPER: ... . .. from the 345 Communications Guide.

S1 RELAY SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Code 0x0049 0x0060 0x0061 0x0062 0x0063 0x0064 0x0065 0x0066 0x0067 0x0068 0x0069 0x0080 0x0081 0x0082 0x0083 0x0084 0x0085 0x0086 0x0087 0x0088 0x0089 0x008A 0x008B 0x008C 0x008D 0x008E 0x008F 0x0090 0x0091 0x0092 0x0093 0x0094 0x0095 0x0096 0x0097 0x0098 0x0099 0x009A 0x009B 0x009C 0x009D 0x009E 0x009F 0x01C0 0x01C1 0x01C2 0x01C3 Type Definition Contact IN 10 On Contact IN 1 Off Contact IN 2 Off Contact IN 3 Off Contact IN 4 Off Contact IN 5 Off Contact IN 6 Off Contact IN 7 Off Contact IN 8 Off Contact IN 9 Off Contact IN 10 Off Virtual IN 1 On Virtual IN 2 On Virtual IN 3 On Virtual IN 4 On Virtual IN 5 On Virtual IN 6 On Virtual IN 7 On Virtual IN 8 On Virtual IN 9 On Virtual IN 10 On Virtual IN 11 On Virtual IN 12 On Virtual IN 13 On Virtual IN 14 On Virtual IN 15 On Virtual IN 16 On Virtual IN 17 On Virtual IN 18 On Virtual IN 19 On Virtual IN 20 On Virtual IN 21 On Virtual IN 22 On Virtual IN 23 On Virtual IN 24 On Virtual IN 25 On Virtual IN 26 On Virtual IN 27 On Virtual IN 28 On Virtual IN 29 On Virtual IN 30 On Virtual IN 31 On Virtual IN 32 On Remote IN 1 On Remote IN 2 On Remote IN 3 On Remote IN 4 On 6–14 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S1 RELAY SETUP Code 0x01C4 0x01C5 0x01C6 0x01C7 0x01C8 0x01C9 0x01CA 0x01CB 0x01CC 0x01CD 0x01CE 0x01CF 0x01D0 0x01D1 0x01D2 0x01D3 0x01D4 0x01D5 0x01D6 0x01D7 0x01D8 0x01D9 0x01DA 0x01DB 0x01DC 0x01DD 0x01DE 0x01DF 0x01E0 0x01E1 0x01E2 0x01E3 0x01E4 0x01E5 0x01E6 0x01E7 0x01E8 0x01E9 0x01EA 0x01EB 0x01EC 0x01ED 0x01EE 0x01EF 0x01F0 0x01F1 0x01F2 Type Definition Remote IN 5 On Remote IN 6 On Remote IN 7 On Remote IN 8 On Remote IN 9 On Remote IN 10 On Remote IN 11 On Remote IN 12 On Remote IN 13 On Remote IN 14 On Remote IN 15 On Remote IN 16 On Remote IN 17 On Remote IN 18 On Remote IN 19 On Remote IN 20 On Remote IN 21 On Remote IN 22 On Remote IN 23 On Remote IN 24 On Remote IN 25 On Remote IN 26 On Remote IN 27 On Remote IN 28 On Remote IN 29 On Remote IN 30 On Remote IN 31 On Remote IN 32 On Remote IN 1 Off Remote IN 2 Off Remote IN 3 Off Remote IN 4 Off Remote IN 5 Off Remote IN 6 Off Remote IN 7 Off Remote IN 8 Off Remote IN 9 Off Remote IN 10 Off Remote IN 11 Off Remote IN 12 Off Remote IN 13 Off Remote IN 14 Off Remote IN 15 Off Remote IN 16 Off Remote IN 17 Off Remote IN 18 Off Remote IN 19 Off 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–15 .

S1 RELAY SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Code 0x01F3 0x01F4 0x01F5 0x01F6 0x01F7 0x01F8 0x01F9 0x01FA 0x01FB 0x01FC 0x01FD 0x01FE 0x01FF 0x8002 0x8042 0x8044 0x804A 0x804C 0x8052 0x8054 0x8062 0x8064 0x84C1 0x84C2 0x84C4 0x8501 0x8502 0x8504 0x8541 0x8542 0x8544 0x8581 0x8582 0x8584 0x85C1 0x85C2 0x85C4 0x8601 0x8602 0x8604 0x8641 0x8642 0x8644 0x8681 0x8682 0x8684 0x9001 Type Definition Remote IN 20 Off Remote IN 21 Off Remote IN 22 Off Remote IN 23 Off Remote IN 24 Off Remote IN 25 Off Remote IN 26 Off Remote IN 27 Off Remote IN 28 Off Remote IN 29 Off Remote IN 30 Off Remote IN 31 Off Remote IN 32 Off Any Trip Therm O/L Trip OP Therm O/L Trip DPO Therm PhA Trip OP Therm PhA Trip DPO Therm PhB Trip OP Therm PhB Trip DPO Therm PhC Trip OP Therm PhC Trip DPO LE 1 Trip PKP LE 1 Trip OP LE 1 Trip DPO LE 2 Trip PKP LE 2 Trip OP LE 2 Trip DPO LE 3 Trip PKP LE 3 Trip OP LE 3 Trip DPO LE 4 Trip PKP LE 4 Trip OP LE 4 Trip DPO LE 5 Trip PKP LE 5 Trip OP LE 5 Trip DPO LE 6 Trip PKP LE 6 Trip OP LE 6 Trip DPO LE 7 Trip PKP LE 7 Trip OP LE 7 Trip DPO LE 8 Trip PKP LE 8 Trip OP LE 8 Trip DPO Ph IOC1 Trip PKP 6–16 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S1 RELAY SETUP Code 0x9002 0x9004 0x9009 0x900A 0x900C 0x9011 0x9012 0x9014 0x9021 0x9022 0x9024 0x9041 0x9042 0x9044 0x9081 0x9082 0x9084 0x90C1 0x90C2 0x90C4 0x90C9 0x90CA 0x90CC 0x90D1 0x90D2 0x90D4 0x90E1 0x90E2 0x90E4 0x9101 0x9102 0x9104 0x9141 0x9142 0x9144 0x9181 0x9182 0x9184 0x9189 0x918A 0x918C 0x9191 0x9192 0x9194 0x91A1 0x91A2 0x91A4 Type Definition Ph IOC1 Trip OP Ph IOC1 Trip DPO Ph A IOC1 Trip PKP Ph A IOC1 Trip OP Ph A IOC1 Trip DPO Ph B IOC1 Trip PKP Ph B IOC1 Trip OP Ph B IOC1 Trip DPO Ph C IOC1 Trip PKP Ph C IOC1 Trip OP Ph C IOC1 Trip DPO Ntrl IOC1 Trip PKP Ntrl IOC1 Trip OP Ntrl IOC1 Trip DPO Gnd IOC1 Trip PKP Gnd IOC1 Trip OP Gnd IOC1 Trip DPO Ph TOC1 Trip PKP Ph TOC1 Trip OP Ph TOC1 Trip DPO Ph A TOC1 Trip PKP Ph A TOC1 Trip OP Ph A TOC1 Trip DPO Ph B TOC1 Trip PKP Ph B TOC1 Trip OP Ph B TOC1 Trip DPO Ph C TOC1 Trip PKP Ph C TOC1 Trip OP Ph C TOC1 Trip DPO Ntrl TOC1 Trip PKP Ntrl TOC1 Trip OP Ntrl TOC1 Trip DPO Gnd TOC1 Trip PKP Gnd TOC1 Trip OP Gnd TOC1 Trip DPO Ph IOC2 Trip PKP Ph IOC2 Trip OP Ph IOC2 Trip DPO Ph A IOC2 Trip PKP Ph A IOC2 Trip OP Ph A IOC2 Trip DPO Ph B IOC2 Trip PKP Ph B IOC2 Trip OP Ph B IOC2 Trip DPO Ph C IOC2 Trip PKP Ph C IOC2 Trip OP Ph C IOC2 Trip DPO 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–17 .

S1 RELAY SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Code 0x91C1 0x91C2 0x91C4 0x9201 0x9202 0x9204 0x9241 0x9242 0x9244 0x9249 0x924A 0x924C 0x9251 0x9252 0x9254 0x9261 0x9262 0x9264 0x9281 0x9282 0x9284 0x92C1 0x92C2 0x92C4 0x9301 0x9302 0x9304 0x9641 0x9642 0x9644 0x9681 0x9682 0x9684 0x9701 0x9702 0x9704 0x970A 0x970C 0x9712 0x9714 0x9722 0x9724 0x9741 0x9742 0x9744 0x9781 0x9782 Type Definition Ntrl IOC2 Trip PKP Ntrl IOC2 Trip OP Ntrl IOC2 Trip DPO Gnd IOC2 Trip PKP Gnd IOC2 Trip OP Gnd IOC2 Trip DPO Ph TOC2 Trip PKP Ph TOC2 Trip OP Ph TOC2 Trip DPO Ph A TOC2 Trip PKP Ph A TOC2 Trip OP Ph A TOC2 Trip DPO Ph B TOC2 Trip PKP Ph B TOC2 Trip OP Ph B TOC2 Trip DPO Ph C TOC2 Trip PKP Ph C TOC2 Trip OP Ph C TOC2 Trip DPO Ntrl TOC2 Trip PKP Ntrl TOC2 Trip OP Ntrl TOC2 Trip DPO Gnd TOC2 Trip PKP Gnd TOC2 Trip OP Gnd TOC2 Trip DPO SGnd TOC1 Trip PKP SGnd TOC1 Trip OP SGnd TOC1 Trip DPO SGnd IOC1 Trip PKP SGnd IOC1 Trip OP SGnd IOC1 Trip DPO SGnd IOC2 Trip PKP SGnd IOC2 Trip OP SGnd IOC2 Trip DPO Pcnt Diff Trip PKP Pcnt Diff Trip OP Pcnt Diff Trip DPO Ph Diff A Trip OP Ph Diff A Trip DPO Ph Diff B Trip OP Ph Diff B Trip DPO Ph Diff C Trip OP Ph Diff C Trip DPO RGF1 Trip PKP RGF1 Trip OP RGF1 Trip DPO RGF2 Trip PKP RGF2 Trip OP 6–18 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S1 RELAY SETUP Code 0x9784 0x97C1 0x97C2 0x97C4 0x9801 0x9802 0x9804 0x9841 0x9842 0x9844 0x99C1 0x99C2 0x99C4 0x9C01 0x9C02 0x9C04 0x9C41 0x9C42 0x9C44 0x9C81 0x9C82 0x9C84 0x9CC1 0x9CC2 0x9CC4 0x9D01 0x9D02 0x9D04 0x9D41 0x9D42 0x9D44 0x9D81 0x9D82 0x9D84 0x9DC1 0x9DC2 0x9DC4 0xA002 0xA042 0xA044 0xA04A 0xA04C 0xA052 0xA054 0xA062 0xA064 0xA4C1 Type Definition RGF2 Trip DPO Inst Diff Trip PKP Inst Diff Trip OP Inst Diff Trip DPO NSeq TOC1 Trip PKP NSeq TOC1 Trip OP NSeq TOC1 Trip DPO NSeq TOC2 Trip PKP NSeq TOC2 Trip OP NSeq TOC2 Trip DPO SGnd TOC2 Trip PKP SGnd TOC2 Trip OP SGnd TOC2 Trip DPO LE 9 Trip PKP LE 9 Trip OP LE 9 Trip DPO LE 10 Trip PKP LE 10 Trip OP LE 10 Trip DPO LE 11 Trip PKP LE 11 Trip OP LE 11 Trip DPO LE 12 Trip PKP LE 12 Trip OP LE 12 Trip DPO LE 13 Trip PKP LE 13 Trip OP LE 13 Trip DPO LE 14 Trip PKP LE 14 Trip OP LE 14 Trip DPO LE 15 Trip PKP LE 15 Trip OP LE 15 Trip DPO LE 16 Trip PKP LE 16 Trip OP LE 16 Trip DPO Any Alarm Therm Lvl Alrm OP Therm Lvl Alrm DPO Therm PhA Alrm OP Therm PhA Alrm DPO Therm PhB Alrm OP Therm PhB Alrm DPO Therm PhC Alrm OP Therm PhC Alrm DPO LE 1 Alarm PKP 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–19 .

S1 RELAY SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Code 0xA4C2 0xA4C4 0xA501 0xA502 0xA504 0xA541 0xA542 0xA544 0xA581 0xA582 0xA584 0xA5C1 0xA5C2 0xA5C4 0xA601 0xA602 0xA604 0xA641 0xA642 0xA644 0xA681 0xA682 0xA684 0xABC1 0xABC2 0xABC4 0xAC01 0xAC02 0xAC04 0xAC42 0xAD01 0xAD02 0xAD04 0xAD41 0xAD42 0xAD44 0xAD81 0xAD82 0xAD84 0xADC2 0xAEC2 0xAF41 0xAF42 0xAF44 0xB001 0xB002 0xB004 Type Definition LE 1 Alarm OP LE 1 Alarm DPO LE 2 Alarm PKP LE 2 Alarm OP LE 2 Alarm DPO LE 3 Alarm PKP LE 3 Alarm OP LE 3 Alarm DPO LE 4 Alarm PKP LE 4 Alarm OP LE 4 Alarm DPO LE 5 Alarm PKP LE 5 Alarm OP LE 5 Alarm DPO LE 6 Alarm PKP LE 6 Alarm OP LE 6 Alarm DPO LE 7 Alarm PKP LE 7 Alarm OP LE 7 Alarm DPO LE 8 Alarm PKP LE 8 Alarm OP LE 8 Alarm DPO HI Amb Temp PKP HI Amb Temp OP HI Amb Temp DPO LO Amb Temp PKP LO Amb Temp OP LO Amb Temp DPO Self Test Alarm OP R1 CoilMonAlrm PKP R1 CoilMonAlrm OP R1 CoilMonAlrm DPO R2 CoilMonAlrm PKP R2 CoilMonAlrm OP R2 CoilMonAlrm DPO BKR1 Fail Alrm PKP BKR1 Fail Alrm OP BKR1 Fail Alrm DPO BKR Stat Fail OP BKR2 Stat Fail OP BKR2 Fail Alrm PKP BKR2 Fail Alrm OP BKR2 Fail Alrm DPO Ph IOC1 Alarm PKP Ph IOC1 Alarm OP Ph IOC1 Alarm DPO 6–20 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S1 RELAY SETUP Code 0xB009 0xB00A 0xB00C 0xB011 0xB012 0xB014 0xB021 0xB022 0xB024 0xB041 0xB042 0xB044 0xB081 0xB082 0xB084 0xB0C1 0xB0C2 0xB0C4 0xB0C9 0xB0CA 0xB0CC 0xB0D1 0xB0D2 0xB0D4 0xB0E1 0xB0E2 0xB0E4 0xB101 0xB102 0xB104 0xB141 0xB142 0xB144 0xB181 0xB182 0xB184 0xB189 0xB18A 0xB18C 0xB191 0xB192 0xB194 0xB1A1 0xB1A2 0xB1A4 0xB1C1 0xB1C2 Type Definition Ph A IOC1 Alrm PKP Ph A IOC1 Alrm OP Ph A IOC1 Alrm DPO Ph B IOC1 Alrm PKP Ph B IOC1 Alrm OP Ph B IOC1 Alrm DPO Ph C IOC1 Alrm PKP Ph C IOC1 Alrm OP Ph C IOC1 Alrm DPO Ntrl IOC1 Alrm PKP Ntrl IOC1 Alrm OP Ntrl IOC1 Alrm DPO Gnd IOC1 Alarm PKP Gnd IOC1 Alarm OP Gnd IOC1 Alarm DPO Ph TOC1 Alarm PKP Ph TOC1 Alarm OP Ph TOC1 Alarm DPO Ph A TOC1 Alrm PKP Ph A TOC1 Alrm OP Ph A TOC1 Alrm DPO Ph B TOC1 Alrm PKP Ph B TOC1 Alrm OP Ph B TOC1 Alrm DPO Ph C TOC1 Alrm PKP Ph C TOC1 Alrm OP Ph C TOC1 Alrm DPO Ntrl TOC1 Alrm PKP Ntrl TOC1 Alrm OP Ntrl TOC1 Alrm DPO Gnd TOC1 Alarm PKP Gnd TOC1 Alarm OP Gnd TOC1 Alarm DPO Ph IOC2 Alarm PKP Ph IOC2 Alarm OP Ph IOC2 Alarm DPO Ph A IOC2 Alrm PKP Ph A IOC2 Alrm OP Ph A IOC2 Alrm DPO Ph B IOC2 Alrm PKP Ph B IOC2 Alrm OP Ph B IOC2 Alrm DPO Ph C IOC2 Alrm PKP Ph C IOC2 Alrm OP Ph C IOC2 Alrm DPO Ntrl IOC2 Alrm PKP Ntrl IOC2 Alrm OP 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–21 .

S1 RELAY SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Code 0xB1C4 0xB201 0xB202 0xB204 0xB241 0xB242 0xB244 0xB249 0xB24A 0xB24C 0xB251 0xB252 0xB254 0xB261 0xB262 0xB264 0xB281 0xB282 0xB284 0xB2C1 0xB2C2 0xB2C4 0xB301 0xB302 0xB304 0xB641 0xB642 0xB644 0xB681 0xB682 0xB684 0xB701 0xB702 0xB704 0xB709 0xB70A 0xB70C 0xB711 0xB712 0xB714 0xB721 0xB722 0xB724 0xB741 0xB742 0xB744 0xB781 Type Definition Ntrl IOC2 Alrm DPO Gnd IOC2 Alarm PKP Gnd IOC2 Alarm OP Gnd IOC2 Alarm DPO Ph TOC2 Alarm PKP Ph TOC2 Alarm OP Ph TOC2 Alarm DPO Ph A TOC2 Alrm PKP Ph A TOC2 Alrm OP Ph A TOC2 Alrm DPO Ph B TOC2 Alrm PKP Ph B TOC2 Alrm OP Ph B TOC2 Alrm DPO Ph C TOC2 Alrm PKP Ph C TOC2 Alrm OP Ph C TOC2 Alrm DPO Ntrl TOC2 Alrm PKP Ntrl TOC2 Alrm OP Ntrl TOC2 Alrm DPO Gnd TOC2 Alarm PKP Gnd TOC2 Alarm OP Gnd TOC2 Alarm DPO SGnd TOC1 Alrm PKP SGnd TOC1 Alrm OP SGnd TOC1 Alrm DPO SGnd IOC1 Alrm PKP SGnd IOC1 Alrm OP SGnd IOC1 Alrm DPO SGnd IOC2 Alrm PKP SGnd IOC2 Alrm OP SGnd IOC2 Alrm DPO Pcnt Diff Alrm PKP Pcnt Diff Alrm OP Pcnt Diff Alrm DPO Ph Dif A Alarm PKP Ph Dif A Alarm OP Ph Dif A Alarm DPO Ph Dif B Alarm PKP Ph Dif B Alarm OP Ph Dif B Alarm DPO Ph Dif C Alarm PKP Ph Dif C Alarm OP Ph Dif C Alarm DPO RGF1 Alarm PKP RGF1 Alarm OP RGF1 Alarm DPO RGF2 Alarm PKP 6–22 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S1 RELAY SETUP Code 0xB782 0xB784 0xB7C1 0xB7C2 0xB7C4 0xB801 0xB802 0xB804 0xB841 0xB842 0xB844 0xB9C1 0xB9C2 0xB9C4 0xBC01 0xBC02 0xBC04 0xBC41 0xBC42 0xBC44 0xBC81 0xBC82 0xBC84 0xBCC1 0xBCC2 0xBCC4 0xBD01 0xBD02 0xBD04 0xBD41 0xBD42 0xBD44 0xBD81 0xBD82 0xBD84 0xBDC1 0xBDC2 0xBDC4 0xC042 0xC082 0xC0C2 0xC102 0xC142 0xC182 0xC1C2 0xC202 0xC2C2 Type Definition RGF2 Alarm OP RGF2 Alarm DPO Inst Diff Alrm PKP Inst Diff Alrm OP Inst Diff Alrm DPO NSeq TOC1 Alrm PKP NSeq TOC1 Alrm OP NSeq TOC1 Alrm DPO NSeq TOC2 Alrm PKP NSeq TOC2 Alrm OP NSeq TOC2 Alrm DPO SGnd TOC2 Alrm PKP SGnd TOC2 Alrm OP SGnd TOC2 Alrm DPO LE 9 Alarm PKP LE 9 Alarm OP LE 9 Alarm DPO LE 10 Alarm PKP LE 10 Alarm OP LE 10 Alarm DPO LE 11 Alarm PKP LE 11 Alarm OP LE 11 Alarm DPO LE 12 Alarm PKP LE 12 Alarm OP LE 12 Alarm DPO LE 13 Alarm PKP LE 13 Alarm OP LE 13 Alarm DPO LE 14 Alarm PKP LE 14 Alarm OP LE 14 Alarm DPO LE 15 Alarm PKP LE 15 Alarm OP LE 15 Alarm DPO LE 16 Alarm PKP LE 16 Alarm OP LE 16 Alarm DPO Output Relay 3 On Output Relay 4 On Output Relay 5 On Output Relay 6 On Self-Test Rly 7 On Output Relay 1 On Output Relay 2 On BKR Connected BKR2 Connected 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–23 .

S1 RELAY SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Code 0xC4C1 0xC4C2 0xC4C4 0xC501 0xC502 0xC504 0xC541 0xC542 0xC544 0xC581 0xC582 0xC584 0xC5C1 0xC5C2 0xC5C4 0xC601 0xC602 0xC604 0xC641 0xC642 0xC644 0xC681 0xC682 0xC684 0xC882 0xCA02 0xCA42 0xCCC2 0xCD02 0xCD42 0xDA02 0xDA42 0xDA82 0xDAC2 0xDB02 0xDB42 0xDC01 0xDC02 0xDC04 0xDC41 0xDC42 0xDC44 0xDC81 0xDC82 0xDC84 0xDCC1 0xDCC2 Type Definition LE 1 PKP LE 1 OP LE 1 DPO LE 2 PKP LE 2 OP LE 2 DPO LE 3 PKP LE 3 OP LE 3 DPO LE 4 PKP LE 4 OP LE 4 DPO LE 5 PKP LE 5 OP LE 5 DPO LE 6 PKP LE 6 OP LE 6 DPO LE 7 PKP LE 7 OP LE 7 DPO LE 8 PKP LE 8 OP LE 8 DPO Setpoint Group2 On 52a Contact OP 52b Contact OP BKR Stat Open BKR Stat Clsd Setpoint Group1 On BKR2 52a Cont OP BKR2 52b Cont OP BKR2 Stat Open BKR2 Stat Clsd Trip BKR 1 OP Trip BKR 2 OP LE 9 PKP LE 9 OP LE 9 DPO LE 10 PKP LE 10 OP LE 10 DPO LE 11 PKP LE 11 OP LE 11 DPO LE 12 PKP LE 12 OP 6–24 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S1 RELAY SETUP Code 0xDCC4 0xDD01 0xDD02 0xDD04 0xDD41 0xDD42 0xDD44 0xDD81 0xDD82 0xDD84 0xDDC1 0xDDC2 0xDDC4 0xE002 0xE042 0xE182 0xE1C2 0xE882 0xF002 0xF042 0xF082 0xF0C2 0xF102 0xF142 0xF182 0xF1C2 0xF202 0xF242 0xF282 0xF2C2 0xF302 0xF642 0xF682 0xF702 0xF742 0xF782 0xF7C2 0xF802 0xF842 0xF9C2 0xFB02 0xFB42 0xFB82 0xFBC2 Type Definition LE 12 DPO LE 13 PKP LE 13 OP LE 13 DPO LE 14 PKP LE 14 OP LE 14 DPO LE 15 PKP LE 15 OP LE 15 DPO LE 16 PKP LE 16 OP LE 16 DPO Any Block Therm O/L Blck Output Relay 1 BLK Output Relay 2 BLK Group Change Blk Ph IOC1 Block Ntrl IOC1 Block Gnd IOC1 Block Ph TOC1 Block Ntrl TOC1 Block Gnd TOC1 Block Ph IOC2 Block Ntrl IOC2 Block Gnd IOC2 Block Ph TOC2 Block Ntrl TOC2 Block Gnd TOC2 Block SGnd TOC1 Block SGnd IOC1 Block SGnd IOC2 Block Pcnt Diff Block RGF1 Block RGF2 Block Inst Diff Block NSeq TOC1 Blk NSeq TOC2 Blk SGnd TOC2 Block Trip BKR1 Blk Trip BKR2 Blk 2nd Hmnc Diff Blk 5th Hmnc Diff Blk IEC60870-5-104 protocol Figure 8: IEC 60870-5-104 protocol menu 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–25 .

.cdr 6–26 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . . . .. 897794A1. POINT 63 S1 104 CLIENT ADDRESS CLIENT ADDRESS 1 ▼ CLIENT ADDRESS 2 .. .. POINT 15 OFF: . TIMEOUT OBJ INFO ADDR BIN OBJ INFO ADDR ALOG OBJ INFO ADDR CNTR OBJ INFO ADDR CMD 104 BINARY INPUTS POINT 0 ▼ POINT 1 ..S1 RELAY SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S1 60870-5-104 GENERAL CLIENT ADDRESS POINT LIST S1 104 GENERAL FUNCTION ▼ TCP PORT SLAVE ADDRESS CYCLIC DATA PERIOD TCP CONN. CLIENT ADDRESS 5 104 ANALOG INPUTS POINT 0 ENTRY ▼ POINT 0 SCALE FCTR POINT 0 DEADBAND . POINT 31 SCALE FCTR POINT 31 DEADBAND S1 104 POINT LIST BINARY INPUTS ANALOG INPUTS BINARY OUTPUTS 104 BINARY OUTPUTS POINT 0 ON: ▼ POINT 0 OFF: . POINT 15 ON: . POINT 31 ENTRY ... ..

from the 345 Communications Guide. The following path is available using the keypad. shows the list of DNP Binary Inputs. For instructions on how to use the keypad.cdr DEFAULT VARIATION DNP OBJECT 1 DNP OBJECT 2 DNP OBJECT 20 DNP OBJECT 21 DNP OBJECT 22 DNP OBJECT 23 DNP OBJECT 30 DNP OBJECT 32 POINT 15 ON POINT 15 OFF POINT 31 ENTRY BINARY OUTPUTS ANALOG INPUTS The following table.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S1 RELAY SETUP DNP communication The menu structure for the DNP protocol is shown below. DNP CLIENT ADDRESS* CLIENT ADDRESS 1 CLIENT ADDRESS 2 CLIENT ADDRESS 3 CLIENT ADDRESS 4 CLIENT ADDRESS 5 POINT 0 ENTRY ▼ POINT 1 ENTRY . Chapter 3 . PATH: SETPOINTS > RELAY SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > DNP PROTOCOL > DNP GENERAL Figure 9: DNP communication menu S1 DNP DNP GENERAL DNP UNSOL RESPONSE* DEFAULT VARIATION DNP CLIENT ADDRESS* DNP POINTS LIST S1 DNP GENERAL DNP ADDRESS ▼ DNP TCP/UDP PORT CHANNEL 1 PORT CHANNEL 2 PORT TME SYNC IIN PER..Working with the Keypad. S1 DNP POINTS LIST BINARY INPUTS 897769. DNP MSG FRAG SIZE DNP TCP CONN... please refer to the 345 Instruction Manual.. T/O * Ethernet only DNP UNSOL RESPONSE* FUNCTION ▼ TIMEOUT MAX RETRIES DEST ADDRESS POINT 0 POINT 1 ▼ POINT 2 .. Code FC134B 0 0x0040 0x0041 Type unsigned 16 bits Definition DNP Binary Inputs Off Contact IN 1 On Contact IN 2 On 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–27 . POINT 63 POINT 0 ON POINT 0 OFF ▼ POINT 1 ON POINT 1 OFF ..

S1 RELAY SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Code 0x0042 0x0043 0x0044 0x0045 0x0046 0x0047 0x0048 0x0049 0x0060 0x0061 0x0062 0x0063 0x0064 0x0065 0x0066 0x0067 0x0068 0x0069 0x0080 0x0081 0x0082 0x0083 0x0084 0x0085 0x0086 0x0087 0x0088 0x0089 0x008A 0x008B 0x008C 0x008D 0x008E 0x008F 0x0090 0x0091 0x0092 0x0093 0x0094 0x0095 0x0096 0x0097 0x0098 0x0099 0x009A 0x009B 0x009C Type Definition Contact IN 3 On Contact IN 4 On Contact IN 5 On Contact IN 6 On Contact IN 7 On Contact IN 8 On Contact IN 9 On Contact IN 10 On Contact IN 1 Off Contact IN 2 Off Contact IN 3 Off Contact IN 4 Off Contact IN 5 Off Contact IN 6 Off Contact IN 7 Off Contact IN 8 Off Contact IN 9 Off Contact IN 10 Off Virtual IN 1 On Virtual IN 2 On Virtual IN 3 On Virtual IN 4 On Virtual IN 5 On Virtual IN 6 On Virtual IN 7 On Virtual IN 8 On Virtual IN 9 On Virtual IN 10 On Virtual IN 11 On Virtual IN 12 On Virtual IN 13 On Virtual IN 14 On Virtual IN 15 On Virtual IN 16 On Virtual IN 17 On Virtual IN 18 On Virtual IN 19 On Virtual IN 20 On Virtual IN 21 On Virtual IN 22 On Virtual IN 23 On Virtual IN 24 On Virtual IN 25 On Virtual IN 26 On Virtual IN 27 On Virtual IN 28 On Virtual IN 29 On 6–28 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S1 RELAY SETUP Code 0x009D 0x009E 0x009F 0x01C0 0x01C1 0x01C2 0x01C3 0x01C4 0x01C5 0x01C6 0x01C7 0x01C8 0x01C9 0x01CA 0x01CB 0x01CC 0x01CD 0x01CE 0x01CF 0x01D0 0x01D1 0x01D2 0x01D3 0x01D4 0x01D5 0x01D6 0x01D7 0x01D8 0x01D9 0x01DA 0x01DB 0x01DC 0x01DD 0x01DE 0x01DF 0x01E0 0x01E1 0x01E2 0x01E3 0x01E4 0x01E5 0x01E6 0x01E7 0x01E8 0x01E9 0x01EA 0x01EB Type Definition Virtual IN 30 On Virtual IN 31 On Virtual IN 32 On Remote IN 1 On Remote IN 2 On Remote IN 3 On Remote IN 4 On Remote IN 5 On Remote IN 6 On Remote IN 7 On Remote IN 8 On Remote IN 9 On Remote IN 10 On Remote IN 11 On Remote IN 12 On Remote IN 13 On Remote IN 14 On Remote IN 15 On Remote IN 16 On Remote IN 17 On Remote IN 18 On Remote IN 19 On Remote IN 20 On Remote IN 21 On Remote IN 22 On Remote IN 23 On Remote IN 24 On Remote IN 25 On Remote IN 26 On Remote IN 27 On Remote IN 28 On Remote IN 29 On Remote IN 30 On Remote IN 31 On Remote IN 32 On Remote IN 1 Off Remote IN 2 Off Remote IN 3 Off Remote IN 4 Off Remote IN 5 Off Remote IN 6 Off Remote IN 7 Off Remote IN 8 Off Remote IN 9 Off Remote IN 10 Off Remote IN 11 Off Remote IN 12 Off 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–29 .

S1 RELAY SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Code 0x01EC 0x01ED 0x01EE 0x01EF 0x01F0 0x01F1 0x01F2 0x01F3 0x01F4 0x01F5 0x01F6 0x01F7 0x01F8 0x01F9 0x01FA 0x01FB 0x01FC 0x01FD 0x01FE 0x01FF 0x8002 0x8042 0x8044 0x804A 0x804C 0x8052 0x8054 0x8062 0x8064 0x84C1 0x84C2 0x84C4 0x8501 0x8502 0x8504 0x8541 0x8542 0x8544 0x8581 0x8582 0x8584 0x85C1 0x85C2 0x85C4 0x8601 0x8602 0x8604 Type Definition Remote IN 13 Off Remote IN 14 Off Remote IN 15 Off Remote IN 16 Off Remote IN 17 Off Remote IN 18 Off Remote IN 19 Off Remote IN 20 Off Remote IN 21 Off Remote IN 22 Off Remote IN 23 Off Remote IN 24 Off Remote IN 25 Off Remote IN 26 Off Remote IN 27 Off Remote IN 28 Off Remote IN 29 Off Remote IN 30 Off Remote IN 31 Off Remote IN 32 Off Any Trip Therm O/L Trip OP Therm O/L Trip DPO Therm PhA Trip OP Therm PhA Trip DPO Therm PhB Trip OP Therm PhB Trip DPO Therm PhC Trip OP Therm PhC Trip DPO LE 1 Trip PKP LE 1 Trip OP LE 1 Trip DPO LE 2 Trip PKP LE 2 Trip OP LE 2 Trip DPO LE 3 Trip PKP LE 3 Trip OP LE 3 Trip DPO LE 4 Trip PKP LE 4 Trip OP LE 4 Trip DPO LE 5 Trip PKP LE 5 Trip OP LE 5 Trip DPO LE 6 Trip PKP LE 6 Trip OP LE 6 Trip DPO 6–30 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S1 RELAY SETUP Code 0x8641 0x8642 0x8644 0x8681 0x8682 0x8684 0x9001 0x9002 0x9004 0x9009 0x900A 0x900C 0x9011 0x9012 0x9014 0x9021 0x9022 0x9024 0x9041 0x9042 0x9044 0x9081 0x9082 0x9084 0x90C1 0x90C2 0x90C4 0x90C9 0x90CA 0x90CC 0x90D1 0x90D2 0x90D4 0x90E1 0x90E2 0x90E4 0x9101 0x9102 0x9104 0x9141 0x9142 0x9144 0x9181 0x9182 0x9184 0x9189 0x918A Type Definition LE 7 Trip PKP LE 7 Trip OP LE 7 Trip DPO LE 8 Trip PKP LE 8 Trip OP LE 8 Trip DPO Ph IOC1 Trip PKP Ph IOC1 Trip OP Ph IOC1 Trip DPO Ph A IOC1 Trip PKP Ph A IOC1 Trip OP Ph A IOC1 Trip DPO Ph B IOC1 Trip PKP Ph B IOC1 Trip OP Ph B IOC1 Trip DPO Ph C IOC1 Trip PKP Ph C IOC1 Trip OP Ph C IOC1 Trip DPO Ntrl IOC1 Trip PKP Ntrl IOC1 Trip OP Ntrl IOC1 Trip DPO Gnd IOC1 Trip PKP Gnd IOC1 Trip OP Gnd IOC1 Trip DPO Ph TOC1 Trip PKP Ph TOC1 Trip OP Ph TOC1 Trip DPO Ph A TOC1 Trip PKP Ph A TOC1 Trip OP Ph A TOC1 Trip DPO Ph B TOC1 Trip PKP Ph B TOC1 Trip OP Ph B TOC1 Trip DPO Ph C TOC1 Trip PKP Ph C TOC1 Trip OP Ph C TOC1 Trip DPO Ntrl TOC1 Trip PKP Ntrl TOC1 Trip OP Ntrl TOC1 Trip DPO Gnd TOC1 Trip PKP Gnd TOC1 Trip OP Gnd TOC1 Trip DPO Ph IOC2 Trip PKP Ph IOC2 Trip OP Ph IOC2 Trip DPO Ph A IOC2 Trip PKP Ph A IOC2 Trip OP 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–31 .

S1 RELAY SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Code 0x918C 0x9191 0x9192 0x9194 0x91A1 0x91A2 0x91A4 0x91C1 0x91C2 0x91C4 0x9201 0x9202 0x9204 0x9241 0x9242 0x9244 0x9249 0x924A 0x924C 0x9251 0x9252 0x9254 0x9261 0x9262 0x9264 0x9281 0x9282 0x9284 0x92C1 0x92C2 0x92C4 0x9301 0x9302 0x9304 0x9641 0x9642 0x9644 0x9681 0x9682 0x9684 0x9701 0x9702 0x9704 0x970A 0x970C 0x9712 0x9714 Type Definition Ph A IOC2 Trip DPO Ph B IOC2 Trip PKP Ph B IOC2 Trip OP Ph B IOC2 Trip DPO Ph C IOC2 Trip PKP Ph C IOC2 Trip OP Ph C IOC2 Trip DPO Ntrl IOC2 Trip PKP Ntrl IOC2 Trip OP Ntrl IOC2 Trip DPO Gnd IOC2 Trip PKP Gnd IOC2 Trip OP Gnd IOC2 Trip DPO Ph TOC2 Trip PKP Ph TOC2 Trip OP Ph TOC2 Trip DPO Ph A TOC2 Trip PKP Ph A TOC2 Trip OP Ph A TOC2 Trip DPO Ph B TOC2 Trip PKP Ph B TOC2 Trip OP Ph B TOC2 Trip DPO Ph C TOC2 Trip PKP Ph C TOC2 Trip OP Ph C TOC2 Trip DPO Ntrl TOC2 Trip PKP Ntrl TOC2 Trip OP Ntrl TOC2 Trip DPO Gnd TOC2 Trip PKP Gnd TOC2 Trip OP Gnd TOC2 Trip DPO SGnd TOC1 Trip PKP SGnd TOC1 Trip OP SGnd TOC1 Trip DPO SGnd IOC1 Trip PKP SGnd IOC1 Trip OP SGnd IOC1 Trip DPO SGnd IOC2 Trip PKP SGnd IOC2 Trip OP SGnd IOC2 Trip DPO Pcnt Diff Trip PKP Pcnt Diff Trip OP Pcnt Diff Trip DPO Ph Diff A Trip OP Ph Diff A Trip DPO Ph Diff B Trip OP Ph Diff B Trip DPO 6–32 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S1 RELAY SETUP Code 0x9722 0x9724 0x9741 0x9742 0x9744 0x9781 0x9782 0x9784 0x97C1 0x97C2 0x97C4 0x9801 0x9802 0x9804 0x9841 0x9842 0x9844 0x99C1 0x99C2 0x99C4 0x9C01 0x9C02 0x9C04 0x9C41 0x9C42 0x9C44 0x9C81 0x9C82 0x9C84 0x9CC1 0x9CC2 0x9CC4 0x9D01 0x9D02 0x9D04 0x9D41 0x9D42 0x9D44 0x9D81 0x9D82 0x9D84 0x9DC1 0x9DC2 0x9DC4 0xA002 0xA042 0xA044 Type Definition Ph Diff C Trip OP Ph Diff C Trip DPO RGF1 Trip PKP RGF1 Trip OP RGF1 Trip DPO RGF2 Trip PKP RGF2 Trip OP RGF2 Trip DPO Inst Diff Trip PKP Inst Diff Trip OP Inst Diff Trip DPO NSeq TOC1 Trip PKP NSeq TOC1 Trip OP NSeq TOC1 Trip DPO NSeq TOC2 Trip PKP NSeq TOC2 Trip OP NSeq TOC2 Trip DPO SGnd TOC2 Trip PKP SGnd TOC2 Trip OP SGnd TOC2 Trip DPO LE 9 Trip PKP LE 9 Trip OP LE 9 Trip DPO LE 10 Trip PKP LE 10 Trip OP LE 10 Trip DPO LE 11 Trip PKP LE 11 Trip OP LE 11 Trip DPO LE 12 Trip PKP LE 12 Trip OP LE 12 Trip DPO LE 13 Trip PKP LE 13 Trip OP LE 13 Trip DPO LE 14 Trip PKP LE 14 Trip OP LE 14 Trip DPO LE 15 Trip PKP LE 15 Trip OP LE 15 Trip DPO LE 16 Trip PKP LE 16 Trip OP LE 16 Trip DPO Any Alarm Therm Lvl Alrm OP Therm Lvl Alrm DPO 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–33 .

S1 RELAY SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Code 0xA04A 0xA04C 0xA052 0xA054 0xA062 0xA064 0xA4C1 0xA4C2 0xA4C4 0xA501 0xA502 0xA504 0xA541 0xA542 0xA544 0xA581 0xA582 0xA584 0xA5C1 0xA5C2 0xA5C4 0xA601 0xA602 0xA604 0xA641 0xA642 0xA644 0xA681 0xA682 0xA684 0xABC1 0xABC2 0xABC4 0xAC01 0xAC02 0xAC04 0xAC42 0xAD01 0xAD02 0xAD04 0xAD41 0xAD42 0xAD44 0xAD81 0xAD82 0xAD84 0xADC2 Type Definition Therm PhA Alrm OP Therm PhA Alrm DPO Therm PhB Alrm OP Therm PhB Alrm DPO Therm PhC Alrm OP Therm PhC Alrm DPO LE 1 Alarm PKP LE 1 Alarm OP LE 1 Alarm DPO LE 2 Alarm PKP LE 2 Alarm OP LE 2 Alarm DPO LE 3 Alarm PKP LE 3 Alarm OP LE 3 Alarm DPO LE 4 Alarm PKP LE 4 Alarm OP LE 4 Alarm DPO LE 5 Alarm PKP LE 5 Alarm OP LE 5 Alarm DPO LE 6 Alarm PKP LE 6 Alarm OP LE 6 Alarm DPO LE 7 Alarm PKP LE 7 Alarm OP LE 7 Alarm DPO LE 8 Alarm PKP LE 8 Alarm OP LE 8 Alarm DPO HI Amb Temp PKP HI Amb Temp OP HI Amb Temp DPO LO Amb Temp PKP LO Amb Temp OP LO Amb Temp DPO Self Test Alarm OP R1 CoilMonAlrm PKP R1 CoilMonAlrm OP R1 CoilMonAlrm DPO R2 CoilMonAlrm PKP R2 CoilMonAlrm OP R2 CoilMonAlrm DPO BKR1 Fail Alrm PKP BKR1 Fail Alrm OP BKR1 Fail Alrm DPO BKR Stat Fail OP 6–34 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S1 RELAY SETUP Code 0xAEC2 0xAF41 0xAF42 0xAF44 0xB001 0xB002 0xB004 0xB009 0xB00A 0xB00C 0xB011 0xB012 0xB014 0xB021 0xB022 0xB024 0xB041 0xB042 0xB044 0xB081 0xB082 0xB084 0xB0C1 0xB0C2 0xB0C4 0xB0C9 0xB0CA 0xB0CC 0xB0D1 0xB0D2 0xB0D4 0xB0E1 0xB0E2 0xB0E4 0xB101 0xB102 0xB104 0xB141 0xB142 0xB144 0xB181 0xB182 0xB184 0xB189 0xB18A 0xB18C 0xB191 Type Definition BKR2 Stat Fail OP BKR2 Fail Alrm PKP BKR2 Fail Alrm OP BKR2 Fail Alrm DPO Ph IOC1 Alarm PKP Ph IOC1 Alarm OP Ph IOC1 Alarm DPO Ph A IOC1 Alrm PKP Ph A IOC1 Alrm OP Ph A IOC1 Alrm DPO Ph B IOC1 Alrm PKP Ph B IOC1 Alrm OP Ph B IOC1 Alrm DPO Ph C IOC1 Alrm PKP Ph C IOC1 Alrm OP Ph C IOC1 Alrm DPO Ntrl IOC1 Alrm PKP Ntrl IOC1 Alrm OP Ntrl IOC1 Alrm DPO Gnd IOC1 Alarm PKP Gnd IOC1 Alarm OP Gnd IOC1 Alarm DPO Ph TOC1 Alarm PKP Ph TOC1 Alarm OP Ph TOC1 Alarm DPO Ph A TOC1 Alrm PKP Ph A TOC1 Alrm OP Ph A TOC1 Alrm DPO Ph B TOC1 Alrm PKP Ph B TOC1 Alrm OP Ph B TOC1 Alrm DPO Ph C TOC1 Alrm PKP Ph C TOC1 Alrm OP Ph C TOC1 Alrm DPO Ntrl TOC1 Alrm PKP Ntrl TOC1 Alrm OP Ntrl TOC1 Alrm DPO Gnd TOC1 Alarm PKP Gnd TOC1 Alarm OP Gnd TOC1 Alarm DPO Ph IOC2 Alarm PKP Ph IOC2 Alarm OP Ph IOC2 Alarm DPO Ph A IOC2 Alrm PKP Ph A IOC2 Alrm OP Ph A IOC2 Alrm DPO Ph B IOC2 Alrm PKP 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–35 .

S1 RELAY SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Code 0xB192 0xB194 0xB1A1 0xB1A2 0xB1A4 0xB1C1 0xB1C2 0xB1C4 0xB201 0xB202 0xB204 0xB241 0xB242 0xB244 0xB249 0xB24A 0xB24C 0xB251 0xB252 0xB254 0xB261 0xB262 0xB264 0xB281 0xB282 0xB284 0xB2C1 0xB2C2 0xB2C4 0xB301 0xB302 0xB304 0xB641 0xB642 0xB644 0xB681 0xB682 0xB684 0xB701 0xB702 0xB704 0xB709 0xB70A 0xB70C 0xB711 0xB712 0xB714 Type Definition Ph B IOC2 Alrm OP Ph B IOC2 Alrm DPO Ph C IOC2 Alrm PKP Ph C IOC2 Alrm OP Ph C IOC2 Alrm DPO Ntrl IOC2 Alrm PKP Ntrl IOC2 Alrm OP Ntrl IOC2 Alrm DPO Gnd IOC2 Alarm PKP Gnd IOC2 Alarm OP Gnd IOC2 Alarm DPO Ph TOC2 Alarm PKP Ph TOC2 Alarm OP Ph TOC2 Alarm DPO Ph A TOC2 Alrm PKP Ph A TOC2 Alrm OP Ph A TOC2 Alrm DPO Ph B TOC2 Alrm PKP Ph B TOC2 Alrm OP Ph B TOC2 Alrm DPO Ph C TOC2 Alrm PKP Ph C TOC2 Alrm OP Ph C TOC2 Alrm DPO Ntrl TOC2 Alrm PKP Ntrl TOC2 Alrm OP Ntrl TOC2 Alrm DPO Gnd TOC2 Alarm PKP Gnd TOC2 Alarm OP Gnd TOC2 Alarm DPO SGnd TOC1 Alrm PKP SGnd TOC1 Alrm OP SGnd TOC1 Alrm DPO SGnd IOC1 Alrm PKP SGnd IOC1 Alrm OP SGnd IOC1 Alrm DPO SGnd IOC2 Alrm PKP SGnd IOC2 Alrm OP SGnd IOC2 Alrm DPO Pcnt Diff Alrm PKP Pcnt Diff Alrm OP Pcnt Diff Alrm DPO Ph Dif A Alarm PKP Ph Dif A Alarm OP Ph Dif A Alarm DPO Ph Dif B Alarm PKP Ph Dif B Alarm OP Ph Dif B Alarm DPO 6–36 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S1 RELAY SETUP Code 0xB721 0xB722 0xB724 0xB741 0xB742 0xB744 0xB781 0xB782 0xB784 0xB7C1 0xB7C2 0xB7C4 0xB801 0xB802 0xB804 0xB841 0xB842 0xB844 0xB9C1 0xB9C2 0xB9C4 0xBC01 0xBC02 0xBC04 0xBC41 0xBC42 0xBC44 0xBC81 0xBC82 0xBC84 0xBCC1 0xBCC2 0xBCC4 0xBD01 0xBD02 0xBD04 0xBD41 0xBD42 0xBD44 0xBD81 0xBD82 0xBD84 0xBDC1 0xBDC2 0xBDC4 0xC042 0xC082 Type Definition Ph Dif C Alarm PKP Ph Dif C Alarm OP Ph Dif C Alarm DPO RGF1 Alarm PKP RGF1 Alarm OP RGF1 Alarm DPO RGF2 Alarm PKP RGF2 Alarm OP RGF2 Alarm DPO Inst Diff Alrm PKP Inst Diff Alrm OP Inst Diff Alrm DPO NSeq TOC1 Alrm PKP NSeq TOC1 Alrm OP NSeq TOC1 Alrm DPO NSeq TOC2 Alrm PKP NSeq TOC2 Alrm OP NSeq TOC2 Alrm DPO SGnd TOC2 Alrm PKP SGnd TOC2 Alrm OP SGnd TOC2 Alrm DPO LE 9 Alarm PKP LE 9 Alarm OP LE 9 Alarm DPO LE 10 Alarm PKP LE 10 Alarm OP LE 10 Alarm DPO LE 11 Alarm PKP LE 11 Alarm OP LE 11 Alarm DPO LE 12 Alarm PKP LE 12 Alarm OP LE 12 Alarm DPO LE 13 Alarm PKP LE 13 Alarm OP LE 13 Alarm DPO LE 14 Alarm PKP LE 14 Alarm OP LE 14 Alarm DPO LE 15 Alarm PKP LE 15 Alarm OP LE 15 Alarm DPO LE 16 Alarm PKP LE 16 Alarm OP LE 16 Alarm DPO Output Relay 3 On Output Relay 4 On 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–37 .

S1 RELAY SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Code 0xC0C2 0xC102 0xC142 0xC182 0xC1C2 0xC202 0xC2C2 0xC4C1 0xC4C2 0xC4C4 0xC501 0xC502 0xC504 0xC541 0xC542 0xC544 0xC581 0xC582 0xC584 0xC5C1 0xC5C2 0xC5C4 0xC601 0xC602 0xC604 0xC641 0xC642 0xC644 0xC681 0xC682 0xC684 0xC882 0xCA02 0xCA42 0xCCC2 0xCD02 0xCD42 0xDA02 0xDA42 0xDA82 0xDAC2 0xDB02 0xDB42 0xDC01 0xDC02 0xDC04 0xDC41 Type Definition Output Relay 5 On Output Relay 6 On Self-Test Rly 7 On Output Relay 1 On Output Relay 2 On BKR Connected BKR2 Connected LE 1 PKP LE 1 OP LE 1 DPO LE 2 PKP LE 2 OP LE 2 DPO LE 3 PKP LE 3 OP LE 3 DPO LE 4 PKP LE 4 OP LE 4 DPO LE 5 PKP LE 5 OP LE 5 DPO LE 6 PKP LE 6 OP LE 6 DPO LE 7 PKP LE 7 OP LE 7 DPO LE 8 PKP LE 8 OP LE 8 DPO Setpoint Group2 On 52a Contact OP 52b Contact OP BKR Stat Open BKR Stat Clsd Setpoint Group1 On BKR2 52a Cont OP BKR2 52b Cont OP BKR2 Stat Open BKR2 Stat Clsd Trip BKR 1 OP Trip BKR 2 OP LE 9 PKP LE 9 OP LE 9 DPO LE 10 PKP 6–38 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S1 RELAY SETUP Code 0xDC42 0xDC44 0xDC81 0xDC82 0xDC84 0xDCC1 0xDCC2 0xDCC4 0xDD01 0xDD02 0xDD04 0xDD41 0xDD42 0xDD44 0xDD81 0xDD82 0xDD84 0xDDC1 0xDDC2 0xDDC4 0xE002 0xE042 0xE182 0xE1C2 0xE882 0xF002 0xF042 0xF082 0xF0C2 0xF102 0xF142 0xF182 0xF1C2 0xF202 0xF242 0xF282 0xF2C2 0xF302 0xF642 0xF682 0xF702 0xF742 0xF782 0xF7C2 0xF802 0xF842 0xF9C2 Type Definition LE 10 OP LE 10 DPO LE 11 PKP LE 11 OP LE 11 DPO LE 12 PKP LE 12 OP LE 12 DPO LE 13 PKP LE 13 OP LE 13 DPO LE 14 PKP LE 14 OP LE 14 DPO LE 15 PKP LE 15 OP LE 15 DPO LE 16 PKP LE 16 OP LE 16 DPO Any Block Therm O/L Blck Output Relay 1 BLK Output Relay 2 BLK Group Change Blk Ph IOC1 Block Ntrl IOC1 Block Gnd IOC1 Block Ph TOC1 Block Ntrl TOC1 Block Gnd TOC1 Block Ph IOC2 Block Ntrl IOC2 Block Gnd IOC2 Block Ph TOC2 Block Ntrl TOC2 Block Gnd TOC2 Block SGnd TOC1 Block SGnd IOC1 Block SGnd IOC2 Block Pcnt Diff Block RGF1 Block RGF2 Block Inst Diff Block NSeq TOC1 Blk NSeq TOC2 Blk SGnd TOC2 Block 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–39 .

It is possible to change this setting from the Front Panel of the relay. Configuration of transmission and reception settings for the GOOSE feature are performed using EnerVista SR3 Setup Software. Figure 10: EnerVista SR3 GOOSE General Settings 6–40 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . ICD or CID files. The 345 firmware accepts GOOSE messages from UR.S1 RELAY SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Code 0xFB02 0xFB42 0xFB82 0xFBC2 Type Definition Trip BKR1 Blk Trip BKR2 Blk 2nd Hmnc Diff Blk 5th Hmnc Diff Blk SR3 IEC 61850 GOOSE details The 345 firmware supports IEC61850 GOOSE communications on the optional communications daughter board. Portions of the IEC61850 standard not pertaining to GOOSE. for IEC61850 GOOSE. As such the implementation stores GOOSE configuration using MODBUS set points. The 345 relay does not support • • • an IEC61850 MMS server the mapping of analogue values to data points in data sets in either the transmit or receive direction a file system to maintain SCL. The interoperability with other manufacturers will be guaranteed in almost all cases. GOOSE settings changes will take effect only after the 345 relay is re-booted. One setting is available to Enable/Disable both Transmission and Reception. F650 and UR Plus. by implementing the reception side with nested structures (one level of nesting) and all the standard data types. are not implemented in the 345 relay.

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

S1 RELAY SETUP

Event recorder
The Event Recorder runs continuously, capturing and storing the last 256 events. All events are stored in a non-volatile memory where the information is maintained for up to 3 days in case of lost relay control power. PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > EVENT RECORDER PICKUP EVENTS Range: Disabled, Enabled Default: Enabled When set to “Enabled”, the event recorder records the events that occur when a protection element picks up. DROPOUT EVENTS Range: Disabled, Enabled Default: Disabled When set to “Enabled” the event recorder records the dropout state of a protection element. TRIP EVENTS Range: Disabled, Enabled Default: Enabled The trip events include all programmed relay elements set to trip the breaker. The text “TRIP” followed by the name of the operated element is recorded. ALARM EVENTS Range: Disabled, Enabled Default: Enabled These events include the elements programmed as an “ALARM” or “LATCHED ALARM” function, which detect power system conditions considered as an alarm. CONTROL EVENTS Range: Disabled, Enabled Default: Enabled If set to “Enabled”, the event recorder records events caused by the performance of the programmed control elements. CONTACT INPUTS Range: Disabled, Enabled Default: Enabled When set to “Enabled”, the event recorder will record the event, when a contact input changes its state. LOGIC ELEMENT Range: Disabled, Enabled Default: Enabled When set to “Enabled”, the event recorder records the events, which occur upon state change of any programmed remote input. VIRTUAL INPUTS Range: Disabled, Enabled Default: Enabled When set to “Enabled”, the event recorder records the events, which occur upon state changes of any logic element.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

6–41

S1 RELAY SETUP

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

REMOTE INPUTS Range: Disabled, Enabled Default: Enabled When set to “Enabled”, the event recorder records the events, which occur upon state change of any programmed remote input. SETTING DATE/TIME Range: Disabled, Enabled Default: Enabled When set to “Enabled”, the event recorder records the event of the changing of the date and time.

Transient recorder
The Transient Recorder contains waveforms captured at the same sampling rate as the other relay data at the point of trigger. By default, the Transient Recorder captures data for all analog currents: Winding 1 three-phase currents and ground, and Winding 2 threephase currents and ground. Triggering of the transient recorder occurs, when an event is detected, causing a pickup, trip, dropout, or alarm, any one of which has been "Enabled" to activate the trigger. The transient recorder trigger may also be activated when any of the selected trigger inputs 1 to 3 is detected as having “On” status. The following path is available using the keypad. For instructions on how to use the keypad, please refer to Chapter 3 - Working with the Keypad. PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > TRANSIENT RECDR BUFFER SETUP Range: 1 x 192, 3 x 64, 6 x 32 Default: 3 x 64 Each selection from the range is expressed by two numbers; the first identifies the number of records, whereas the second stands for the number of cycles per record. TRIGGER MODE Range: Overwrite, Protected Default: Overwrite When the “Overwrite” setting is selected, the new records overwrite the old ones, meaning the relay will always keep the newest records. In “Protected” mode, the relay will keep the number of records corresponding to the selected number, only without overwriting. TRIGGER POSITION Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1% Default: 0% This setting indicates the location of the trigger with respect to the selected length of record. For example at 20% selected trigger position, the length of each record will be split on 20% pre-trigger data, and 80% post-trigger data. TRIGGER ON PKP Range: Off, On Default: Off Selection of “Yes” setting enables triggering for the recorder upon Pickup condition detected from any protection or control element.

6–42

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

S1 RELAY SETUP

TRIGGER ON DPO Range: Off, On Default: Off Selection of “Yes” setting enables triggering for the recorder upon a Dropout condition detected from any protection or control element. TRIGGER ON TRIP Range: Off, On Default: Off Selection of “Yes” setting enables triggering for the recorder upon Trip condition detected from any protection or control element. TRIGGER ON ALARM Range: Off, On Default: Off Selection of “Yes” setting enables triggering for the recorder upon Alarm condition detected from any protection or control element. TRIGGER ON INPUT 1 to 3 Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic Element 1 to 16 Default: Off Selection of input or logic element from the settings range enables triggering input for the recorder. A record will be triggered if the status of the selected input changes to “On”.

Front panel
The user can send a message to the display, that will override any normal message by sending text through Modbus. Refer to the 345 Feeder Protection System Communications Guide for register details. PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > FRONT PANEL FLASH MESSAGE TIME Range: 1 s to 65535 s Default: 5 s Flash messages are status, warning, error, or information messages displayed for several seconds in response to certain key presses during setting programming. These messages override any normal messages. The duration of a flash message on the display can be changed to accommodate different reading rates. MESSAGE TIMEOUT Range: 1 s to 65535 s Default: 30 s If the keypad is inactive for a period of time, the relay automatically reverts to a default message. The inactivity time is modified via this setting to ensure messages remain on the screen long enough during programming or reading of actual values. SCREEN SAVER Range: Off, 1 min to 10000 min Default: Off The life of the LCD backlight can be prolonged by enabling the Screen Saver mode. If the keypad is inactive for the selected period of time, the relay automatically shuts off the LCD screen. Any activity (keypress, alarm, trip, or target message) will restore screen messages.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

6–43

S1 RELAY SETUP

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

W1 BKR OPEN COLOR Range: Off, Red, Green, Orange Default: Green Allows the user to select the color of the LED indicator under Breaker Open conditions. W1 BKR CLSD COLOR Range: Off, Red, Green, Orange Default: Red Allows the user to select the color of the LED indicator under Breaker Closed conditions. W2 BKR OPEN COLOR Range: Off, Red, Green, Orange Default: Green Allows the user to select the color of the LED indicator under Breaker Open conditions. W2 BKR CLSD COLOR Range: Off, Red, Green, Orange Default: Red Allows the user to select the color of the LED indicator under Breaker Closed conditions.

Installation
PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > INSTALLATION RELAY NAME Range: Feeder Name, Alpha-numeric (18 characters) Default: Feeder Name The RELAY NAME setting allows the user to uniquely identify a relay. This name will appear on generated reports. This name is also used to identify specific devices which are engaged in automatically sending/receiving data over the communications channel. RELAY STATUS Range: Not Ready, Ready Default: Not Ready Allows the user to activate/deactivate the relay. The relay is not operational when set to "Not Ready."

6–44

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

S2 SYSTEM SETUP

S2 System Setup
Figure 11: System Setup menu
S2 SYSTEM SETUP CURRENT SENSING POWER SYSTEM TRANSFORMER ▼ WNDG 1 BREAKER WNDG 2 BREAKER S2 CURRENT SENSING W1 PH CT PRIMARY ▼ W1 PH CT SECONDARY W1 [SENS] GND CT PRIMARY W1 [SENS] GND CT SEC W2 PH CT PRIMARY W2 PH CT SECONDARY W2 [SENS] GND CT PRIMARY W2 [SENS] GND CT SEC S2 POWER SYSTEM NOMINAL FREQUENCY ▼ SYSTEM ROTATION S2 TRANSFORMER XFMR RATED LOAD ▼ XFMR TYPE PHASE COMPENSATION W1 NOM VOLTAGE W1 GROUNDING W2 NOM VOLTAGE W2 GROUNDING

S2 WNDG 1 BREAKER 52a CONTACT ▼ 52b CONTACT BKR CONNECTED
897765A2.cdr

S2 WNDG 2 BREAKER 52a CONTACT ▼ 52b CONTACT BKR CONNECTED

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

6–45

Enter the rated phase CT secondary current of the three-phase current transformers associated with Winding 1. W2 GND CT SECONDARY Range: 1 A to 5 A in steps of 1 A Default: 1 A Configurable 1 A or 5 A secondary (must be specified with order code P0G0). W1 GND CT SECONDARY Range: 1 A to 5 A in steps of 1 A Default: 1 A Configurable 1 A or 5 A secondary (must be specified with order code P0G0). W2 GND CT PRIMARY Range: 1 A to 6000 A in steps of 1 A Default: 5 A Enter the rated ground CT primary current of the ground current transformers associated with Winding 2. Enter the rated phase CT secondary current of the three-phase current transformers associated with Winding 2. W2 PH CT SECONDARY Range: 1 A to 5 A in steps of 1 A Default: 1 A Configurable 1 A or 5 A secondary (must be specified with order code P0G0). Enter the rated ground CT secondary current of the ground current transformers associated with Winding 2. W1 GND CT PRIMARY Range: 1 A to 6000 A in steps of 1 A Default: 5 A Enter the rated ground CT primary current of the ground current transformers associated with Winding 1.S2 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Current sensing PATH: SETPOINTS > S2 SYSTEM SETUP > CURRENT SENSING W1 PH CT PRIMARY Range: 1 A to 6000 A in steps of 1 A Default: 5 A Enter the rated phase CT primary current of the three-phase current transformers associated with Winding 1. Enter the rated ground CT secondary current of the ground current transformers associated with Winding 1. W2 PH CT PRIMARY Range: 1 A to 6000 A in steps of 1 A Default: 5 A Enter the rated phase CT primary current of the three-phase current transformers associated with Winding 2. W1 PH CT SECONDARY Range: 1 A to 5 A in steps of 1 A Default: 1 A Configurable 1 A or 5 A secondary (must be specified with order code P0G0). 6–46 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

PHASE COMPENSATION Range: Internal (software). TRANSFORMER TYPE Range: Refer to above "Transformer Types" table Default: y/D30 Select the transformer connection from a list of transformer types shown in table XX “Transformer types” .16 KV Enter the nominal phase-to phase-voltage rating of Winding 2 of the transformer.01 Default: 5. if there is no grounding path for Winding 1 in the zone.00 MVA Enter the self-cooled (100%) load rating for the power transformer. This value is used as a default to set the optimal digital sampling rate. or grounded corner of a delta winding. Within Zone Default: Not Within Zone Select the setting “Within Zone”.01 Default: 13. If set to “External (with CT’s)”.01 to 250. W2 NOM VOLTAGE Range: 0. W1 GROUNDING Range: Not Within Zone. The relay still performs magnitude compensation when the “External (with CTs)” option is selected.00 MVA in steps of 0. the transformer phase shift is externally compensated by the CT connections. if there is a grounding path at Winding 1 side of the transformer such as grounded neutral.00 to 200.80 KV Enter the nominal phase-to phase-voltage rating of Winding 1 of the transformer. ACB.00 KV in steps of 0.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S2 SYSTEM SETUP Power system PATH: SETPOINTS > S2 SYSTEM SETUP > POWER SYSTEM NOMINAL FREQUENCY Range: 60 Hz.01 Default: 4. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–47 . If set to “Internal (software)”. 50 Hz Default: 60 Hz Enter the nominal power system frequency. Default: ABC Enter the phase sequence of the power system. grounding transformer. Select “Not Within Zone”. W1 NOM VOLTAGE Range: 0. Transformer PATH: SETPOINTS > S2 SYSTEM SETUP > TRANSFORMER XFMR RATED LOAD Range: 0. External (withCTs) Default: Internal (software) Select the type of phase compensation to be performed by the relay.00 KV in steps of 0. the transformer magnitude and phase shift compensations are performed internally by the relay algorithm.01 to 250. SYSTEM ROTATION Range: ABC.

one should keep in mind that direct summation of the measured per-phase transformer currents does not automatically result in a zero differential current. and the CTs from the Delta winding in Wye connection. in order to obtain near zero differential currents under normal transformer operating conditions. If there were a grounding bank on the Delta winding of the power transformer within the zone of protection. is not required when the 345 relay is installed. grounding transformer. This protection is based on Kirchoff’s Law where the algebraic sum of all currents flowing in and out of the protected equipment is equal to zero. Magnitude Compensation Reference: Percent differential protection by the 345 relay uses the user-entered phase-to-phase voltage and the CT primary settings for Winding 1 as a reference for current magnitude compensation. Traditionally. the phase shift between the currents from the transformer windings has been adjusted by connecting the CTs from the Wye winding in Delta connection. such as grounded neutral. The Delta connection of CTs inherently has the effect of removing the zero sequence components of the phase currents. the transformer windings are connected in Delta. 6–48 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . and each introduces a phase shift. The winding CTs are not rated to exactly match the winding nominal currents. Within Zone Default: Not Within Zone Select the setting “Within Zone”. In general. Physically. The 345 relay simplifies the process by performing the magnitude and phase shift compensations automatically (internally). it is necessary to adjust the magnitude and phase relationships of the CT secondary currents for each winding. Upon receiving entered settings for the protected transformer and winding CT ratings. In such case. if there is a grounding path at the Winding 2 side of the transformer. or grounded corner of a delta winding. Select “Not Within Zone”. in order to prepare the currents for summation. or Zig-Zag configuration. a ground fault would result in differential (zero sequence) current and false trips.S2 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS W2 GROUNDING Range: Not Within Zone. In order to performing the appropriate current compensation. Transformer windings that are grounded inside zone protection allow zero sequence current flow in that winding. Wye. however. However. Transformer setup phase & magnitude compensations Percent (biased) differential protection is the main type of protection for power transformers with respect to detecting all types of transformer internal faults. This is because: 1. This. or tapped relay windings. The transformer voltage ratio results in different winding nominal currents. For correct performance of percent differential protection. The magnitude of this adjustment is accomplished using interposing CTs. all winding CTs must be connected in Wye (polarity markings pointing away from the transformer). as well as the correct phase shift. 3. the relay automatically calculates and applies the correct magnitude of scaling to the winding currents. if there is no grounding path for Winding 2 in the zone. zero sequence removal is necessary if zero sequence can flow into and out of one transformer winding but not the other winding. 2. it would be necessary to insert a zero sequence current trap with the wye connected CTs on the Delta winding of the transformer. when applying this law to transformer protection. and therefore it is from these windings that zero sequence removal is necessary.

1057. 1500/5 CT ratio. the Winding 2 CT secondary current is higher (per unit) than the Winding 1 CT secondary current. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–49 . delta winding phase currents lag the corresponding wye winding phase currents by 30°) Transformer rated load: 5/7/9 MVA Winding 1: 13.6 / 1500 = 1. Consider a typical Wye/Delta power transformer with the following data: • • • • Connection: Y/d30° (i.8 kV nominal. The following sections will illustrate auto-configuration principles using in the example. These correction factors are applied to the current signals to obtain extremely accurate differential currents.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S2 SYSTEM SETUP Phase Shift Compensation Reference: Percent differential protection by the 345 relay uses either the Delta or the Zig-Zag currents (depending on the transformer setup) as a phase shift reference to perform the phase shift compensation.16 kV nominal. 2 The 345 calculates and automatically corrects the CT mismatch to a maximum mismatch factor of 16. for any load. The perfectly matched winding 2 CT primary at nominal winding 2 voltage is calculated as follows: Eq.8 kV” S2 SYSTEM SETUP > TRANSFORMER > W1 GROUNDING: “Within Zone” S2 SYSTEM SETUP > TRANSFORMER > W2 NOM F-F VOLTAGE: “4. The menu paths in the example are shown graphically in the above figure. transformer voltage ratios. 500/5 CT ratio Winding 2: 4.16 kV” S2 SYSTEM SETUP > TRANSFORMER > W2 GROUNDING: “Not Within Zone” AUTOMATIC CT MISMATCH COMPENSATION The 1500/5 CT on winding 2 does not perfectly match the 500/5 CT on Winding 1. The current transformer ratings per each winding are entered as: S2 SYSTEM SETUP > CURRENT SENSING > W1 PHASE CT PRIMARY: “500 A” S2 SYSTEM SETUP > CURRENT SENSING > W2 PHASE CT PRIMARY: “1500 A” The transformer type is entered as: S2 SYSTEM SETUP > TRANSFORMER > TRANSFORMER TYPE: “Y/d30” S2 SYSTEM SETUP > TRANSFORMER > XFMR RATED LOAD: “5 MVA” S2 SYSTEM SETU > TRANSFORMER > W1 NOM F-F VOLTAGE: “13. 1 where: CT1 = Winding 1 CT primary rating V1 = Winding 1 nominal voltage CT2 = Winding 2 CT primary rating V2 = Winding 2 nominal voltage Thus. The mismatch factor is 1658.e. When a Wye/Wye transformer is selected in the setup. EXAMPLE: This section describes the process of automatic current magnitude and phase shift compensation using a specific example that shows how CT ratios. and transformer phase shifts are used to generate the correction factors. the currents from the first Wye winding are used as a reference for the phase shift compensation. The 345 relay calculates the magnitude correction factor for Winding 2 as follows: Eq.

Based on 100% transformer loading (5MVA). The winding currents are also identified. as they are always used by the relay as a magnitude reference. The currents from winding 1 are not multiplied by any correction factor. 4 .winding 2 nominal current Based on 100% transformer loading.S2 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Hence. respectively. 5 Eq.winding 1 nominal current Winding 2 CT: measured Eq.CDR The above figure shows the physical connections within the transformer that produce a phase angle in the delta winding lagging the respective wye winding by 30°. The currents that would be present for a balanced load are shown below. 3 . 6 PHASE SHIFT COMPENSATION The source phase sequence must be stated when describing the winding phase relationships since these relationships change when the phase sequence changes. Now assume that a source. 6–50 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .904. Note that the total current out of the delta winding is described by an equation. The example below shows why this happens. using a transformer described in IEC nomenclature as “Yd1” or in GE Multilin nomenclature as “Y/d30. the measured winding currents are: Winding 1 CT: measured Eq.” Figure 12: Example transformer A IA B IB C IC N Ia' Ia = Ia' – Ic' a b Ib' Ib = Ib' – Ia' c Ic' Ic = Ic' – Ib' 897716A1. the compensated currents expressed in times CT (w1) as a reference and used by the percent differential protection will be as shown: Eq. the measured currents from winding 2 will be automatically compensated by the relay applying the correction factor of 0. with a sequence of ABC. is connected to transformer terminals ABC.

B respectively. (which is a type Yd11 in IEC nomenclature and a type Y/d330 in GE Multilin nomenclature) which is in disagreement with the transformer nameplate. and is therefore not recommended. The currents that would be present for a balanced load are shown below: Figure 14: Phasors for ACB sequence 828718A1.CDR Note that the delta winding currents leads the wye winding currents by 30°. The transformer nameplate phase relationship information is only correct for a stated phase sequence. and B respectively. It may be suggested that for the ACB sequence the phase relationship can be returned to that shown on the transformer nameplate by connecting source phases A. This will restore the nameplate phase shifts but will cause incorrect identification of phases B and C within the relay. B and C to transformer terminals A. which is in agreement with the transformer nameplate. Now assume that a source. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–51 .CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S2 SYSTEM SETUP Figure 13: Phasors for ABC sequence 897717A1. This is because the physical connections and hence the equations used to calculate current for the delta winding have not changed.CDR Note that the delta winding currents lag the wye winding currents by 30°. C. C. with a sequence of ACB is connected to transformer terminals A.

The Delta connection of CTs. The 345 supports all standard two-winding transformer types.CDR phase angle correction (or phase shift) that is initially performed to calculate differential currents As shown in the “Y/d30°” entry of the transformer types table. CTs on the Wye connected transformer winding (winding 1) would be connected in a delta arrangement. The following diagram shows the internal connections of the Y/d30? transformer from our example: WINDING 1 (WYE) C B A N a b c WINDING 2 (DELTA) The 345 performs this phase angle correction internally based on the following setpoint. Traditionally. delta. inherently has the effect of removing the zero sequence components of the phase currents.S2 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS All information presented in this manual is based on connecting the relay phase A. the transformer has the Y-D connection. 1 Y/d30° Connection WYE (gnd 1/2) DELTA 30° Lag Voltage phasors Phase shift 30° lag 2 0° 897721A1. in accordance with the standards for power transformers. These angle corrections are described in the table as Phase shift. Set S2 SYSTEM SETUP > TRANSFORMER > TRANSFORMER TYPE to “Y/d30°”. B and C respectively. however. or zig-zag) and ground CT assignment angle by which a winding lags winding 1 diagrams showing the phase relationships of voltage phasors. Users with a system phase sequence of ACB must determine the transformer type for this sequence. where (the arrow sign) indicates the reference phase Transformer type Wdg. B and C terminals to the power system phases A. the 30° lag of the Delta results into 0° phase shift applied to its currents (Delta –phase reference). Each transformer type from the Transformer Types table below provides the following information: transformer type notation as it appears on the display winding connection (wye. The transformer types and phase relationships presented are for a system phase sequence of ABC. and 30° phase angle correction (phase shift) applied to the winding 1 currents (Wye winding). which compensates for the phase angle lag introduced in the Delta connected winding (winding 2). If there were a grounding bank on the Delta winding of 6–52 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . so that line currents from both windings can be compared at the relay. In our example.

The 345 performs this phase angle compensation and zero sequence removal automatically. wf = 2). All currents are phase and zero sequence compensated internally before the calculation of differential and restraint quantities. In general. and is calculated by the 345 for each winding as follows: Eq. 9 TRANSFORMER TYPES A complete table of two-winding transformer types is shown below. The phase reference winding is chosen to be the delta or zigzag (non-wye) winding with the lowest winding index. if one exists. based on the settings entered for the transformer. the phase reference winding would be winding 2 (i. a ground fault would result in differential (zero sequence) current and false trips. 7 where Rotation = “ABC” Eq. the first winding is chosen. 8 where Rotation = “ACB” In our example. The phase compensation angle Φ?comp is the angle by which a winding current is shifted to refer it to the phase reference winding. and therefore it is from these windings that zero sequence removal is necessary. In such a case. zero sequence removal is necessary if zero sequence can flow into and out of one transformer winding but not the other winding. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–53 . All CTs are connected Wye (polarity markings pointing away from the transformer). it would be necessary to insert a zero sequence current trap with the Wye connected CTs on the Delta winding of the transformer.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S2 SYSTEM SETUP the power transformer within the zone of protection. Transformer windings that are grounded inside the zone of protection allow zero sequence current flow in that winding. For a transformer that has no delta or zigzag windings. The phase reference winding (wf) is the winding which will have a phase shift of 0° applied to it. The phase compensation angle for each winding would then be calculated as follows (assuming Rotation = “ABC”): Eq.e.

Connection Type Phasors Shift (Φcomp) 0° Y/y0° 1 WYE (gnd 1/2) Voltage Phase Phasors Shift (Φcomp) 0° 2 WYE (gnd 2/3) 0° 0° 2 WYE (gnd 2/3) 0° 0° Y/y180° 1 WYE (gnd 1/2) 180° lag Y/d30° 1 WYE (gnd 1/2) 30° lag 2 WYE (gnd 2/3) 180° lag 0° 2 DELTA (gnd 2/ 3) 30° lag 0° Y/d150° 1 WYE (gnd 1/2) 150° lag Y/d210° 1 WYE (gnd 1/2) 210° lag 2 DELTA (gnd 2/ 3) 150° lag 0° 2 DELTA (gnd 2/ 3) 210° lag 0° Y/d330° 1 WYE (gnd 1/2) 330° lag D/d0° 1 DELTA (gnd 1/ 2) 0° 2 DELTA (gnd 2/ 3) 330° lag 0° 2 DELTA (gnd 2/ 3) 0° 0° D/d60° 1 DELTA (gnd 1/ 2) 60° lag D/d120° 1 DELTA (gnd 1/ 2) 120° lag 2 DELTA (gnd 2/ 3) 60° lag DELTA (gnd 1/ 2) 0° 2 DELTA (gnd 2/ 3) 120° lag DELTA (gnd 1/ 2) 0° D/d180° 1 180° lag D/d240° 1 240° lag 2 DELTA (gnd 2/ 3) 180° lag 0° 2 DELTA (gnd 2/ 3) 240° lag 0° 6–54 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . Connection Type 2W External 1 Correction WYE (gnd 1/2) Voltage Phase Transformer Wdg.S2 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Table 1: Transformer types Transformer Wdg.

Connection Type D/d300° 1 DELTA (gnd 1/ 2) Voltage Phase Transformer Wdg. Connection Type Phasors Shift (Φcomp) 300° lag D/y30° 1 DELTA (gnd 1/ 2) Voltage Phase Phasors Shift (Φcomp) 0° 2 DELTA (gnd 2/ 3) 300° lag 0° 2 WYE (gnd 2/3) 30° lag 330° lag D/y150° 1 DELTA (gnd 1/ 2) 0° D/y210° 1 DELTA (gnd 1/ 2) 0° 2 WYE (gnd 2/3) 150° lag 210° lag 2 WYE (gnd 2/3) 210° lag 150° lag D/y330° 1 DELTA (gnd 1/ 2) 0° Y/z30° 1 WYE (gnd 1/2) 30° lag 2 WYE (gnd 2/3) 330° lag 30° lag 2 ZIG-ZAG (gnd 2/3) 30° lag 0° Y/z150° 1 WYE (gnd 1/2) 150° lag Y/z210° 1 WYE (gnd 1/2) 210° lag 2 ZIG-ZAG (gnd 2/3) 150° lag 0° 2 ZIG-ZAG (gnd 2/3) 210° lag 0° Y/z330° 1 WYE (gnd 1/2) 330° lag D/z0° 1 DELTA (gnd 1/ 2) 0° 2 ZIG-ZAG (gnd 2/3) 330° lag 0° 2 ZIG-ZAG (gnd 2/3) 0° lag 0° D/z60° 1 DELTA (gnd 1/ 2) 60° lag D/z120° 1 DELTA (gnd 1/ 2) 120° lag 2 ZIG-ZAG (gnd 2/3) 60° lag 0° 2 ZIG-ZAG (gnd 2/3) 120° lag 0° 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–55 .CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S2 SYSTEM SETUP Transformer Wdg.

where: IA[w] = uncompensated winding ‘w’ phase A current IAp[w] = phase and zero sequence compensated winding ‘w’ phase A current. Connection Type Phasors Shift (Φcomp) 180° lag D/z240° 1 DELTA (gnd 1/ 2) Voltage Phase Phasors Shift (Φcomp) 240° lag 2 ZIG-ZAG (gnd 2/3) 180° lag 0° 2 ZIG-ZAG (gnd 2/3) 240° lag 0° D/z300° 1 DELTA (gnd 1/ 2) 300° lag 3W External Correction 1 WYE 0° 2 ZIG-ZAG (gnd 2/3) 300° lag 0° 23 WYE 0° WYE 0° 0° 0° The following table shows the linear combination of phases of a transformer winding that achieves the phase shift and zero sequence removal for typical values of Φcomp. Table 2: ΦCOMP[W] 0° GROUNDING[W] = "NOT WITHIN ZONE" GROUNDING[W] = "WITHIN ZONE" 30° lag 60° lag 90° lag 6–56 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . Connection Type D/z180° 1 DELTA (gnd 1/ 2) Voltage Phase Transformer Wdg.S2 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Transformer Wdg.

AND ZERO SEQUENCE COMPENSATION Transformer magnitude. and zero sequence compensation is as follows: 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–57 . and zero-sequence compensation calculations Complete magnitude. PHASE ANGLE.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S2 SYSTEM SETUP ΦCOMP[W] 120° lag GROUNDING[W] = "NOT WITHIN ZONE" GROUNDING[W] = "WITHIN ZONE" 150° lag 180° lag 210° lag 240° lag 270° lag 300° lag 330° lag MAGNITUDE. phase angle. phase angle.

S2 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Winding 1 compensated currents: Winding 2 compensated currents: where: .magnitude compensation factor for winding 2 (see previous sections) . phase and zero sequence compensated winding w phase currents .phase and zero sequence compensated winding phase currents (see earlier). the following phase and zero-sequence compensation equations would be used: For Winding 1 (Wye – grounded neutral): For Winding 2 (Delta): The complete compensated winding 1 and winding 2 currents would be as follows: 6–58 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . In our example.magnitude.

The following path is available using the keypad. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–59 .Working with the Keypad.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S2 SYSTEM SETUP DIFFERENTIAL AND RESTRAINT CURRENT CALCULATIONS Differential currents are calculated as follows: Restraint currents are calculated as follows: where. and the status of the Winding 2 breaker 52a (CI#3) and 52b (CI#4) wired to Winding 2 breaker aux contacts 52a and 52b respectively (see below). 52b CONTACT Range: Disabled. Per the example. wired to the Winding 1 breaker auxiliary contacts 52a and 52b. Contact Input 1 Default: Disabled Select Contact Input 1 [52a (CI#1)] if connected to breaker auxiliary contact 52a. 52a (CI#1) and 52b (CI#2). are the phase differential currents. the per-phase differential and restraint currents would be as follows: Winding breakers The status of the Winding 1 breaker is monitored by the 345 relay using the status of either one or two contact inputs. please refer to Chapter 3 . Contact Input 2 Default: Disabled Select Contact Input 2 [52b (CI#2)] if connected to breaker auxiliary contact 52b. and are the phase restraint currents. For instructions on how to use the keypad. PATH: SETPOINTS > S2 SYSTEM SETUP > WNDG 1 BREAKER 52a CONTACT Range: Disabled.

however using only one of them is also acceptable. 6–60 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .The logic for Breaker Open. 52b CONTACT Range: Disabled. is provided by monitoring the contact input setting for “BKR CONNECTED”. the breaker is considered connected to the primary system. PATH: SETPOINTS > S2 SYSTEM SETUP > WNDG 2 BREAKER 52a CONTACT Range: Disabled. Disabled Default: Disabled Select a contact input to show whether the breaker is connected (Racked-in. or isolated by the associated disconnect switches on a fixed circuit breaker. Disabled Default: Disabled Select a contact input to show whether the breaker is connected (Racked-in. the breaker state is shown to be neither open. When the breaker is determined disconnected. or disconnected (racked-out. nor closed. Contact Input 4 Default: Disabled Select Contact Input 4 [52b (CI#4)] if connected to Winding 2 breaker auxiliary contact 52b. or disconnect switches switched-on). BKR CONNECTED Range: Contact Input 5 to 10. or disconnect switches switched-off) to the system. or disconnect switches switched-on). and Breaker Close status is shown in the table below: Table 3: Breaker open / Breaker closed status logic 52a contact configured Yes Yes No No 52b contact configured Yes No Yes No Breaker status Open 52a contact open Close 52a contact closed 52b contact closed 52a contact open 52b contact closed Status unknown 52b contact open 52a contact closed 52b contact open If the contact input selected under BKR CONNECTED setting is asserted. NOTE: NOTE It is highly recommended to monitor the status of the Winding 1 and Winding 2 breakers using both breaker auxiliary contacts 52a. or disconnected (racked-out. or disconnect switches switched-off) to the system. and 52b.S2 SYSTEM SETUP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS BKR CONNECTED Range: Contact Input 5 to 10. such by drawout breaker racking mechanism. The breaker status when disconnected from the main power circuit. Contact Input 3 Default: Disabled Select Contact Input 3 [52a (CI#3)] if connected to Winding 2 breaker auxiliary contact 52a.

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S2 SYSTEM SETUP Table 4: Breaker status with both contacts configured 52a contact status Off On On Off 52b contact status On Off On Off Breaker status open closed BKR status failure BKR status failure 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–61 .

These protection functions include: • • • • • • • • • • • • 87T Percent Differential (XFMR PCNT DIFF) 87T/50 Instantaneous Differential (XFMR INST DIFF) 87G Restricted Ground Fault (RESTD GND FAULT1(2)) 49 Thermal Model (THERMAL MODEL) 51P Phase Timed Overcurrent (PHASE TOC1(2)) 50P Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent (PHASE IOC1(2) 51G Ground/Sensitive Ground Timed Overcurrent (GROUND/SENS. depending on the relay order code. Each Setpoint Group has the same protection functions. GND TOC1(2)) 50G Ground/Sensitive Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent (GROUND/SENS. GND IOC1(2)) 51N Neutral Timed Overcurrent (NEUTRAL TOC1(2)) 50N Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent (NEUTRAL IOC1(2)) 51_2 Negative Sequence Timed Overcurrent (NEG SEQ TOC1(2)) 50BF Breaker Failure (W1(2) BREAKER FAIL) 6–62 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S3 Protection The 345 protection elements are organized in two identical setpoint groups: Setpoint Group 1 and Setpoint Group 2.

.1 of 2 S3 SETPOINT GROUP 1 XFMR PCNT DIFF XFMR INST DIFF RESTD GND FAULT1 ▼ RESTD GND FAULT2 THERMAL MODEL PHASE TOC1 PHASE TOC2 PHASE IOC1 PHASE IOC2 GROUND TOC1 GROUND TOC2 GROUND IOC1 GROUND IOC2 NEUTRAL TOC1 NEUTRAL TOC2 NEUTRAL IOC1 NEUTRAL IOC2 NEG SEQ TOC1 NEG SEQ TOC2 S3 THERMAL MODEL THERMAL MDL FUNC ▼ THERMAL MDL PKP THERMAL MDL ALARM HEAT TIME CONSTANT COOL TIME CONSTANT OUTPUT RELAY 3 ..... OUTPUT RELAY 6 BLOCK 1 BLOCK 2 BLOCK 3 S3 RESTD GND FAULT RGF FUNCTION ▼ CT INPUTS RGF PICKUP RGF SLOPE RGF DELAY GND CURRENT SPVSN GND SUPV LEVEL OUTPUT RELAY 3 . OUTPUT RELAY 6 BLOCK 1 BLOCK 2 BLOCK 3 S3 XFMR INST DIFF INST DIFF FUNCTION ▼ INST DIFF PICKUP OUTPUT RELAY 3 . OUTPUT RELAY 6 BLOCK 1 BLOCK 2 BLOCK 3 BLOCK 2 BLOCK 3 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–63 . OUTPUT RELAY 6 BLOCK 1 897798. cdr S3 XFMR PERCENT DIFF PCNT DIFF FUNCTION ▼ MINIMUM PICKUP SLOPE 1 BREAK 1 BREAK 2 SLOPE 2 INRUSH INHBT FUNCT INRUSH INHBT LEVEL INRUSH INHBT MODE OVEREXCIT INHIBIT OVEREX INHT LEVEL OUTPUT RELAY 3 .CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S3 PROTECTION Setpoint group 1(2) Figure 15: Protection setpoint group 1(2) menu ....

..2 of 2 S3 SETPOINT GROUP 1 XFMR PCNT DIFF XFMR INST DIFF RESTD GND FLT ▼ THERMAL MODEL PHASE TOC1 PHASE TOC2 PHASE IOC1 PHASE IOC2 GROUND TOC1 GROUND TOC2 GROUND IOC1 GROUND IOC2 NEUTRAL TOC1 NEUTRAL TOC2 NEUTRAL IOC1 NEUTRAL IOC2 NEG SEQ TOC1 NEG SEQ TOC2 S3 NEUTRAL TOC1 NTRL TOC1 FUNCTION ▼ NTRL CT INPUTS NTRL TOC1 PKP NTRL TOC1 CURVE NTRL TOC1 TDM NTRL TOC1 RESET RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR OUTPUT RELAY 3 .. OUTPUT RELAY 6 BLOCK 1 BLOCK 2 BLOCK 3 S3 GROUND IOC1 GND IOC1 FUNCTION ▼ GND CT INPUTS GND IOC1 PKP GND IOC1 DELAY RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR OUTPUT RELAY 3 . cdr S3 PHASE TOC1 PH TOC FUNCTION ▼ PHASE CT INPUTS PH TOC1 PKP PH TOC1 CURVE PH TOC1 TDM PH TOC1 RESET RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR OUTPUT RELAY 3 . OUTPUT RELAY 6 BLOCK 1 BLOCK 2 BLOCK 3 897758. OUTPUT RELAY 6 BLOCK 1 BLOCK 2 BLOCK 3 S3 NEUTRAL IOC1 NTRL IOC1 FUNCTION ▼ NTRL CT INPUTS NTRL IOC1 PKP NTRL IOC1 DELAY RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR OUTPUT RELAY 3 . S3 GROUND TOC1 GND TOC1 FUNCTION ▼ GND CT INPUTS GND TOC1 PKP GND TOC1 CURVE GND TOC1 TDM GND TOC1 RESET RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR OUTPUT RELAY 3 .S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Figure 16: Protection setpoint group 1(2) menu .... The settings menu of the percent differential element defines a dual slope. 6–64 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL ..... dual breakpoint differential/restraint characteristic. OUTPUT RELAY 6 BLOCK 1 BLOCK 2 BLOCK 3 OUTPUT RELAY 6 BLOCK 1 BLOCK 2 BLOCK 3 S3 PHASE IOC1 PH IOC1 FUNCTION ▼ PHASE CT INPUTS PH IOC1 PKP PH IOC1 DELAY RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR OUTPUT RELAY 3 .. The calculation of differential and restraint currents are as shown on the figure below... OUTPUT RELAY 6 BLOCK 1 BLOCK 2 BLOCK 3 Transformer percent differential The 345 provides one percent differential element per setpoint group.. OUTPUT RELAY 6 BLOCK 1 BLOCK 2 BLOCK 3 S3 NEGATIVE SEQ TOC1 NEG SEQ TOC1 FUNC ▼ PHASE CT INPUTS NEG SEQ TOC1 PKP NEG SEQ TOC1 CURVE NEG SEQ TOC1 TDM NEG SEQ TOC1 RESET RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR OUTPUT RELAY 3 .

The differential current is calculated per-phase as a vector sum of currents from both windings after magnitude and angle compensation. The purpose of this characteristic is to provide a zone for differential protection operation.CDR The 345 continuously calculates per-phase differential and restraint currents. where the user can define protection sensitivity and dependability during internal faults. Eq. phase angle and zero sequence compensation (as required) Decaying dc offset filter Decaying dc offset filter Discrete Fourrier transform Discrete Fourrier transform S MAX Differential Current Restraint Current 897801.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S3 PROTECTION Figure 17: Calculation of transformer differential (Id) and restraint (Ir) currents Winding 1 current waveform Winding 2 current waveform Phase angle and zero sequence compensation (as required) Magnitude. and security during external faults. and compares their ratio with the user pre-defined differential/restraint characteristic. 10 The restraint current is calculated as a maximum of the same internally compensated currents: Eq. 11 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–65 . and a zone for no operation.

30 BREAKPOINT 1 BREAKPOINT 2 897802. and a transformer ratio that may change as a result of the transformer onload tap changer.cdr Irestraint (xCT) The figure above shows the differential/restraint characteristic of the main transformer percent differential protection. above which the element will operate. and defines the ratio of differential/restraint currents.10 x CT This setting defines the minimum differential current required for operation. and will selfreset when the condition clears. 6–66 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . CT inaccuracies. The “ALARM” LED will flash under the phase differential operating condition. If the Latched Alarm setting is selected. Alarm. SLOPE 1 Range: 15 to 100% in steps of 1 Default: 25% This setting is applicable for restraint (through) currents of zero to kneepoint 1. In this mode the “ALARM” LED does not turn on. The slope is set to ensure sensitivity of internal faults at normal transformer loading. MINIMUM PICKUP Range: 0. This differential current is a result of the transformer magnetizing current.S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Figure 18: Differential / Restraint characteristic Idifferential (xCT) SLOPE 2 100% OPERATE REGION Transition Region (lineal) SLOPE 1 25% PICKUP 0. Alarm. or Trip setting enables the Percent Phase Differential function. Latched Alarm. with the function setting selected as Alarm.05 to 1. Output relay #1 “Trip” will not operate when the Latched Alarm or Alarm setting is selected. Output relays #1 “R1 TRIP” and #2 “R2 TRIP” will operate when the Trip setting is selected and the Percent Differential protection is in operation.01 Default: 0. Trip Default: Disabled The selection of the Latched Alarm. The setting is selected based on the amount of differential current that might be seen under normal conditions. until the reset command is initiated.00 x CT in steps of 0. the “ALARM” LED will flash during the Phase differential operating condition. PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > S3 SETPOINT GROUP1 > XFMR PCNT DIFF XFMR DIFF FUNCTION Range: Disabled. and will stay “ON” after the condition clears.

This breakpoint marks the end of slope 1.8kV*1000) = 0.01xCT Default: 1. 2nd Harm Block Default: 2nd Harm Block This setting enables or disables the inrush inhibit function. Breakpoint 1 should be set below the current that would cause CT saturation due to DC components and/or residual magnetism. the Breakpoint 2 setting will be: 10kA/500 = 20 M(W2) = (4. one should check whether or not this setting complies with the above recommendation regarding the CT linear performance.00xCT in steps of 0.15= 3 xCT SLOPE 2 Range: 50 to 100% in steps of 1 Default: 95% The Slope 2 setting ensures stability during fault conditions of the type that produce CT saturation and spurious high differential current. INRUSH INHBT FUNCT Range: Disabled.5xCT Breakpoint 2 should be set below the fault current that is most likely to saturate any of the transformer CTs due to an AC component alone.50 to 4. BREAK 2 Range: 1.00 to 10.00xCT in steps of 0. Very often the Breakpoint 1 setting is based on the transformer Winding 1 nominal current (100% transformer loading).16kV*500)/(13. None of the settings for inrush inhibit are active when the function is set to “Disabled”. on a 5 MVA transformer with a ratio of 13.01xCT Default: 1. Figure 19: Transformer Inrush inhibiting 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–67 . Slope 2 should be set high to cater for the worst case scenario where one set of CTs saturates. and a Winding1 CT (500:5) rating. For example if 10 kA is the maximum AC through fault current before Winding 2 CT (1000:5) starts to saturate.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S3 PROTECTION BREAK 1 Range: 0.50xCT The setting for Breakpoint 1 defines the limit of linear operation of Winding 1 CT. In such cases.16kV. The setting is expressed in times CT primary of Winding 1. accounting for up to 80% of residual flux that effectively reduces the capability of the CT by a factor of 5.8kV/4. where no CT saturation is expected to restrain (through) currents smaller than that breakpoint.15 – magnitude compensation factor for Winding 2 currents Breakpoint 2 = 20*0. In such cases the differential/restraint ratio can go as high as 95% to 98%. but the other set does not.

” the relay calculates the average 2nd harmonic level and compares this level against the setting for the inrush inhibit level. Such an overexcitation condition from an increased V/Hz ratio. 5th Harm Default: Disabled This setting provides 5th harmonic differential protection blocking during an overexcitation condition that results from an increased V/Hz ratio. and blocks the differential protection for all three phases if the 2nd harmonic on any two of these three phases is higher than the setting for the inrush inhibit level. If the differential current on any of the three phases goes below the differential current cut-off level of 0. INRUSH INHBT MODE Range: "Per Phase".0% This setting specifies the level of 5th harmonic during overexcitation (overfluxing) transformer conditions. "Average" Default: Per Phase This setting specifies the mode of blocking during transformer magnetizing (inrush) conditions.0% in steps of 0. and the dividing number (divisor) is decreased from 3 to 2. OVEREX INHT LEVEL Range: 1.0 to 40. If set to “Average. as the danger is associated with thermal processes in the core. 6–68 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . The same happens if the magnitude of the differential current on one of the two remaining phases drops below the cutoff level during energization. So instantaneous tripping of the transformer by the differential protection is not desirable.1 to 40. poses a danger to the protected transformer. Averaging of the 2nd harmonics is adaptive and depends on the magnitude of the differential current per-phase. When the 5th harmonic level exceeds the specified OVEREX INHT LEVEL setting (5th harmonic ratio) the differential element is blocked.1 Default: 10% This setting specifies the ratio of 2nd harmonic differential current to the fundamental frequency differential current for the selected mode of 2nd harmonic inhibit. The percent differential protection will be blocked from operation if the actual ratio of the differential 2nd harmonic current to the fundamental frequency differential current is above this threshold.1 Default: 10.” the relay checks the 2nd harmonic level onthe per-phase differential current.04 x CT.S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS INRUSH INHBT LEVEL Range: 0. The overexcitation inhibit works on a per-phase basis. A given transformer can tolerate an overfluxing condition for a limited time. the 2nd harmonic current from that phase gets dropped (zeroed) from the equation for averaging. If set to “2-out-of-3.0% in steps of 0. "2-out-of-3". If set to “Per phase.” the function performs inrush inhibit for each phase individually. OVEREXCIT INHIBIT Range: Disabled. The relay uses a traditional 5th harmonic ratio for inhibiting the differential function during overexcitation conditions. In this case the 2nd harmonic on this phase will be dropped from summation. and the dividing number (divisor) will be decreased to 1.

Any of the assigned blocking inputs can block the function.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S3 PROTECTION OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6 Range: Do Not Operate. Logic Elements 1 to 16 Default: Off Three blocking inputs are provided in the Percent Differential menu. or all. The available selections for each block include Contact input. Remote Input. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–69 . or Logic Element. Remote Input 1 to 32. BLOCK 1/2/3 Range: Off. of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon percent differential operation. Alarm. Virtual Input 1 to 32. Contact Input 1 to 10. Operate Default: Do Not Operate Any. Virtual Input. The selection of relay outputs operation is available no matter whether the Latched Alarm. or Trip function is selected.

cdr Phase B current (IB5d) Phase C current (IC5d) CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 5TH HMNC DIFF PH C .Command RESET LED: ALARM AND S LATCH 6–70 R SETPOINT OR PERCENT DIFF FUNCTION: AND S3 PROTECTION Disabled = 0 OR Latched Alarm Alarm Trip LED: TRIP AND LED: PICKUP SETPOINT MINIMUM PICKUP: OR Operate Output Relay 1 (W1 BKR TRIP) SETPOINT SLOPE 1 Transient Recorder BREAKPOINT 1 AND Event Recorder Operate Output Relay 2 (W2 BKR TRIP) Trip (To Breaker Failure ) BLOCK 1: Off = 0 Message BREAKPOINT 2 BLOCK 2: OR Off = 0 SLOPE 2 INRUSH INHIBIT LEVEL PCNT DIFF PKP Event Recorder BLOCK 3: PCNT DIFF PH A PKP PCNT DIFF PH B PKP PCNT DIFF PH C PKP Transient Recorder Off = 0 RUN SETPOINT OUTPUT RELAY 3 OUTPUT RELAY 4 OR AND Differential Currents Phase A Diff Current (IAd) Phase B Diff Current (IBd) Phase C Diff Current (ICd) RUN Restraint Currents Phase A Rest Current (IAr) Operate output relays upon selection OUTPUT RELAY 5 OUTPUT RELAY 6 Phase B Rest Current (IBr) AND Phase C Rest Current (ICr) Message RUN PCNT DIFF OP PCNT DIFF PH A OP PCNT DIFF PH B OP AND SETPOINT INRUSH INHIBIT FUNCTION Disabled = 0 PCNT DIFF PH C OP 2nd harmonic SETPOINT INRUSH INHIBIT LEVEL INRUSH INHIBIT MODE RUN IA2d = LEVEL IB2d = LEVEL IC2d = LEVEL SETPOINT OVEREXC INHIBIT LEVEL RUN RUN RUN IA5d = LEVEL IB5d = LEVEL IC5d = LEVEL Event Recorder RUN RUN Event Recorder Figure 20: Percent Differential Protection logic diagram Differential 2nd Harmonic Phase A current (IA2d) Phase B current (IB2d) Phase C current (IC2d) 2ND HMNC DIFF PH A 2ND HMNC DIFF PH B 2ND HMNC DIFF PH C SETPOINT OVEREXCITATION INHIBIT FUNCTION Disabled = 0 5th harmonic =1 Differential 5th Harmonic Phase A current (IA5d) 5TH HMNC DIFF PH A 5TH HMNC DIFF PH B 897803.

the XFMR INST DIFF function will be blocked.is turned on. The output relays #1 “R1 TRIP” and #2 “R2 TRIP” will operate. with the function setting selected as Alarm. and the Instantaneous Differential protection is operational. the “ALARM” LED will flash during the operating condition. Inputs to this protection are computed on the basis of the relay per-phase differential currents. The selection of output relays operation is available no matter whether the Latched Alarm. or Remote Input .00 xCT in steps of 0. Remote Input 1 to 32. Alarm. Alarm. or Trip setting enables the Instantaneous Phase Differential function. and will self-reset. and will stay “ON” after the condition clears. Alarm. The “ALARM” LED will flash under the instantaneous differential operating condition. Virtual Input1 to 32. Instantaneous Differential protection is usually set to operate during high-fault current situations. or Trip function is selected.01 xCT Default: 8.00xCT This setting defines the pickup level of the differential current required for operation. If the Latched Alarm setting is selected. INST DIFF BLOCK1/2/3 Range: Off. In this mode. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–71 .CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S3 PROTECTION Transformer instantaneous differential The 345 relay provides one Instantaneous Differential element per setpoint group. until the reset command is initiated. Operation occurs if the value of any of the computed phase differential currents is above the instantaneous differential pickup setting. PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > S3 PROTECTION GROUP 1(2) > XFMR INST DIFF INST DIFF FUNCTION Range: Disabled. Instantaneous Differential protection is not biased protection and operates in a fashion similar to instantaneous overcurrent protection. INST DIFF PICKUP Range: 3. The output relays #1 “R1 TRIP” and #2 “R2 TRIP” will not operate if the Latched Alarm or Alarm setting is selected. of output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon instantaneous Differential Protection operation. Virtual Input. Latched Alarm. the “ALARM” LED does not turn on. OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6 Range: Do Not Operate. when the Trip setting is selected. when the condition clears. Operate Default: Do Not Operate Any. Logic Elements1 to 16 Default: Off Three blocking inputs are provided in the Percent Differential menu. and if used.Contact input.00 – 20. Trip Default: Disabled The selection of the Latched Alarm. or all. its pickup is set according to the following criteria: • • • The pickup setting (xCT) is selected to be higher than the maximum inrush current during transformer energization The pickup setting is set higher than the fault current for faults occuring outside the zone of protection The pickup setting is selected to be lower than the maximum fault current during internal fault conditions. Contact Input 1 to 10. When any of the selected blocking inputs .

cdr .6–72 Command RESET LED: ALARM AND S LATCH S3 PROTECTION SETPOINT R OR INST DIFF FUNCTION: AND Disabled = 0 Latched Alarm OR Alarm LED: TRIP Trip AND Operate Output Relay 1 ((W1 BKR TRIP)) Operate Output Relay 2 ((W1 BKR TRIP)) SETPOINT BLOCK 1: Trip (To Breaker Failure ) AND Off = 0 BLOCK 2: SETPOINT INST DIFFERENTIAL PICKUP: RUN IAd = Pickup OR Off = 0 BLOCK 3: Off = 0 LED: PICKUP SETPOINT: OUTPUT RELAY 3 OUTPUT RELAY 4 Phase Differential Currents RUN IBd = Pickup RUN ICd = Pickup Figure 21: Instantaneous Differential Protection logic diagram Phase A Diff current (IAd) OR Phase B Diff current (IBd) Operate output relays upon selection OUTPUT RELAY 5 Phase C Diff current (ICd) Message INST DIFF PKP INST DIFF OP OUTPUT RELAY 6 Event Recorder INST DIFF PKP INST DIFF OP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 897804.

Therefore. See the diagrams below. The 345 calculates the magnitude of the ground differential current as a difference between the vectors of the computed residual current. The Restricted Ground Fault (RGF) protection provides ground fault detection for lowmagnitude ground fault currents primarily for ground faults closed to the neutral point of the wye connected winding. The resultant primary current can be negligible for ground winding faults within 30% distance from the neutral point since the fault voltage is not the system voltage. Application of the restricted ground fault protection extends the fault coverage towards the neutral point. where the fault will go undetected. expressing the dependence of the fault current with respect to the fault distance from the neutral point. Figure 22: RGF and percent differential zones of protection WINDING 35% RGF ZONE DIFFERENTIAL ZONE Rg Figure 23: Fault currents vs points from neutral 100 90 80 70 % Max Ifault 60 50 40 30 20 Ifault Ip Ip(x) Ifault(x) 10 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 x = distance of fault from neutral The SR345 implementation of the restricted ground fault protection is a low impedance current differential scheme. and applies a restraining current defined as the 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–73 . one per winding. 3I0.e.Ig). An internal ground fault on an impedance grounded wye winding will produce a low magnitude ground fault current depending on position of the fault with respect of the winding neutral point. but rather the result of the transformation ratio between the primary windings and the percentage of shorted turns. and the measured ground current (i. the resultant differential currents may be below the pickup and/ or the slope setting of the main differential element.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S3 PROTECTION Restricted ground fault Depending on the SR345 order code. the relay provides up to two Restricted Ground Fault elements per setpoint group.

that may result into spurious neutral current. Trip Default: Disabled The selection of Latched Alarm. The slope setting allows the user to determine the sensitivity of the element based on the class and quality of the CTs used. the “ALARM” LED will flash and turn off after the condition clears. and will stay “ON” after the condition clears. The ground current supervision is not active if the GND CURRENT SUPERVISION is selected as “Disabled”.CT (W2) The 345 RGF protection includes ground current supervision mechanism o provide more security during external non-ground faults associated with CT saturation. and the RGF protection is operational. or for Delta corner grounded windings. If Latched Alarm is selected as a function. and may jeopardize the security of the RGF protection. 6–74 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . and the Restricted Ground Fault protection is operational. Alarm. Latched Alarm. In this mode the “ALARM” LED does not turn on. Output relays #1 “R1 TRIP” and #2 “R2 TRIP” will operate. When the Alarm setting is selected as a function. PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > S3 PROTECTION GROUP 1(2) > RESTRICTED GROUND FAULT 1(2) RGF FUNCTION Range: Disabled. Transformer Winding IA IB IC Rg IG Ig E5 D5 E6 D6 E7 D7 E8 D8 E9 D9 E10 D10 E11 D11 E12 D12 Ia Ib Ic Ig Ia Ib Ic Ig Winding 1 Current Inputs . The restricted earth fault protection is also available for delta windings with in-zone grounding transformer. or Trip setting enables the Restricted Ground Fault function.CT (W1) Winding 2 Current Inputs . CT INPUTS Range: CT (W1). When the GND CURRENT SUPERVISION setting is selected as “Enabled”. CT(W2) Default:CT (W1) This setting defines the winding three-phase and ground currents used by the RGF function. Output relays #1 “R1 TRIP” and #2 “R2 TRIP” do not operate if the Latched Alarm or Alarm setting is selected. the “ALARM” LED will flash during the operating condition. The RGF protection works without the supervision as well. until a Reset command is initiated. The figure below shows the typical wiring between the winding CTs and the 345 CT terminals to assure the correct performance of the protection.S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS maximum measured line current (Imax) to produce a percent slope value. only when the Trip setting is selected. before making operation decision. Alarm. the algorithm checks if the ground current measured by the relay satisfies the selected GND CURRENT SUPERVISION LEVEL.

01 Default: 0. or all. delayed clearance of such a fault is not a high concern. Enabled Default: Disabled This setting enables or disables the ground current supervision of the RGF function.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S3 PROTECTION RGF PICKUP Range: 0. Since RGF protection is intended to detect small ground fault currents. RGF DELAY Range: 0.00 to 600.02 to 20 x CT (W1) in steps of 0.01 Default: 0. On the other hand delayed RGF operation due to a spurious ground differential current caused by an out-of-zone fault can be used as a backup for downstream protections should they fail to clear the fault.02 to 10. of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon restricted ground fault protection operation.30 s The RGF pickup time delay setting defines the time required for the RGF element to operate after it has picked up. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–75 .00 S in steps of 0. GND CURRENT SPVSN Range: Disabled. the RGF function will work without ground current supervision. or during transformer energization. Operate Default: Do Not Operate Any. If set to “Disabled”. RGF SLOPE Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1% Default: 0% This setting defines the slope as the ratio between the ground differential current and the maximum line current (ground restraining current) in percentages. The pickup value is expressed in times phase CT primary rating.10 x CT (W1) This setting defines the minimum pickup level of the ground differential current required for operation.10 x CTg (W1) This setting defines the level of measured ground current above which operation of the RGF protection is allowed. OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6 Range: Do Not Operate. GND SUPV LEVEL Range: 0. See the RGF Logic diagram. The ground current level is monitored if the setting is set to “Enabled”. This time delay will override the spurious ground differential current condition caused by CT saturation due to external non-ground faults. The selection of relay outputs operation is available no matter whether the Latched Alarm.00 x CTg (W1) in steps of 0. The setting is presented in times ground CT primary. or Trip function is selected. Alarm. The measured ground current is compared to the setting only if the GND CURRENT SUPERVISION setting is set to “Enabled”.01 Default: 0. The RGF element will operate if the actual ground differential/restraint ratio is greater than the slope and the ground differential current is greater than the RGF pickup setting.

so that the winding rated load can be used as a reference in defining the RGF slope setting.045 x CT – PKP setting for the RGF protection The transformer loading will be almost unaffected for ground faults close to the winding neutral. 6–76 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . the Restricted Ground Fault function will be blocked. Logic Elements1 to 16 Default: Off Three blocking inputs are provided in the Restricted Ground Fault menu.maximum ground fault current To detect a ground fault on the Wye winding at 15% distance from the neutral point.16kV Wye winding is: Irated = 5MVA/(4.1 %. Select 5% if the transformer is expected to run most of the time at full load. Example:Transformer: 5MVA. Remote Input 1 to 32. or Remote Input . The rated load for 4. the slope setting can be set to higher value: @ 70% load the slope setting would be: (36 / 485 A)*100 = 7% @ 50% load the slope setting would be: (36 / 346 A)*100 = 10% \ @ 30% load the slope setting would be: (36 / 208 A)*100 = 17% The ground current supervision feature and/or the RGF pickup time delay can be used if CT saturation due to heavy external faults. % = (36 A/693A)*100 = 5.S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS BLOCK 1/2/3 Range: Off. Virtual Input1 to 32.16kV/(10 ohms *√3) = 240A . is a concern.16kV.Contact input. If most of the time the transformer runs at lower than the nominal loads. When any of the selected blocking inputs . 13.16kV*√3) = 693 A Slope setting. D/Yg1 type Rg = 10 ohms Phase CTs: 800:5 Ground CT: 300:5 Ifgnd (max) = 4.is turned on. Virtual Input. Contact Input 1 to 10.8kV/4. the relay shall detect ground differential current of: Igd = (15x240)/100 = 36 A/800 = 0.

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Command RESET LED: ALARM AND S LATCH SETPOINT OR RGF FUNCTION: AND R Disabled = 0 OR Latched Alarm 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL LED: TRIP AND Alarm Trip SETPOINT Operate Output Relay 1 (W1 BKR TRIP) Operate Output Relay 2 (W2 BKR TRIP) BLOCK 1: SETPOINT RGF PICKUP: RGF SLOPE: RUN SETPOINT RGF PKP TIME DELAY: Imax = max (Ia.cdr GND CURNT SPV LEVEL Ig > LEVEL (x CT1) S3 PROTECTION 6–77 . Enabled = 1 Winding Ground Current W1(2) Ground current (Ig) Message and Event Recorder: RGF PKP AND 897806.Ib.Ic) tPKP Off = 0 AND TRIP (To Breaker Failure) BLOCK 2: OR Off = 0 BLOCK 3: Off = 0 SETPOINT: OUTPUT RELAY 3 OUTPUT RELAY 4 AND 0 Winding Phase Currents W1(2) Phase A current (Ia) W1(2) Phase B current (Ib) Figure 24: Restricted Earth Fault Protection logic diagram OUTPUT RELAY 5 OUTPUT RELAY 6 W1(2) Phase C current (Ic) Operate output relays upon selection In = 3I0 Igd = I 3I0 + Ig I LED: PICKUP Message and Event Recorder RGF OP SETPOINT OR GND CURRENT SUPV: Disabled = 0.

and can prevent unnecessary tripping. and in return may lead to short circuit conditions. The relay will continuously calculate the transformer thermal capacity as a percentage of the total thermal capacity as follows: Eq. Where: TTRIP = Time to trip in seconds θ2 = 1 = Trip thermal state set to 100% τ = Heating and cooling time constant. NOTE: The measured Winding 1 phase currents are used as inputs by the Transformer Thermal protection for detection of overload (overheating) conditions. Otherwise the formula uses the cooling time constant. can degrade the insulation. please refer to Chapter 3 . and the transformer heating and cooling time constants. The relay uses the transformer thermal time characteristic based on current squared and integrated over time. 12 Where: θ(t) = Cable thermal capacity (%) at time t θ(t-1) = Cable thermal capacity (%) at time t-1 Δt/τ = Time step Δt divided by the heating/cooling time constant τ I2 = (Iphase/Ipickup )2 = Squared ratio between the actual load current and the pickup setting τ = Heating and cooling time constant (usually provided by the manufacturer). the operate time (time to trip) is determined from when the element picks up until it trips. For instructions on how to use the keypad. The time to trip will start timing out once the level of the computed thermal capacity (%) becomes higher than 100% thermal capacity (θ =1 ). Loads exceeding the transformer load ratings over certain period of time. the element will generate an alarm signal. the element will generate a trip signal.Working with the Keypad. and depends on both the measured load over time. The thermal model alarm can be used as a warning for the start of dangerous overloading conditions. As per the formula below. NOTE The following path is available using the keypad. The heating of the transformer is mostly of resistive type (I2R). The time to trip is estimated when the load current exceeds the PKP setting. The heating time constant is used when the squared load/pickup ratio is greater than the thermal capacity θ(t-1) estimated in the previous time step. hence the generated heat is directly proportional to the square of the flowing winding currents (I2 ). I2= Squared ratio of the actual phase current and the pickup setting. and the 49 element picks up.S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Transformer thermal protection The 345 relay provides one transformer thermal overload protection. When the thermal capacity exceeds the alarm level. usually provided by the manufacturer. At the same time the thermal capacity will start to increase at a rate depending on the current amplitude and the prior loading condition of the transformer. The trip flag will drop out when the thermal capacity falls below 97% of the pickup level. PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > SETPOINT GROUP 1(2) > THERMAL MODEL 6–78 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . When the thermal capacity exceeds the trip level.

COOL TIME CONSTANT (τC) Range: 1.05 to 20.0% This setting sets the alarm level for the accumulated thermal capacity above which the element generates an alarm. The “ALARM” LED will turn off when the thermal capacity value of all phases is below 97% of the Transformer Thermal Alarm setting. Alarm Default: Disabled The output relays #1 “TRIP W1 BKR” and #2 “TRIP W2 BKR” will operate only if the Trip function is selected. the “ALARM” LED will flash when the thermal capacity on any phase is over the Transformer Thermal Alarm setting. Alarm or Trip.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S3 PROTECTION THERMAL MDL FUNC Range: Disabled.0 to 600.1 min Default: 6.0 to 110. regardless of whether Alarm. NOTE 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–79 . Latched Alarm or Trip is selected as the function. If Latched Alarm is selected as the function.00 x τH The cooling time constant is used to compute the thermal capacity when the thermal capacity at any time step is smaller than the one computed in the previous time step.01 x τH Default: 1.00 to 6.00 x τH in steps of 0. HEAT TIME CONSTANT (τH) Range: 3. The range for this setting is given as multiples of the Heating Time Constant setting.0 min The Winding 1 heating time constant is used to compute the thermal capacity when the thermal capacity at each time step is greater than the one computed in the previous time step. NOTE: The thermal capacity is displayed on the relay even if the Thermal Model Function is set to “Disabled”.0 min in steps of 0. and the accumulated thermal capacity for any of the phases is over 100%. Latched Alarm.1% Default: 80. Any of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate when the Thermal function is selected as Latched Alarm. THERMAL MDL ALARM Range: 1. The LED can be reset upon initiation of the "Reset" command.00 x CT(W1) This setting sets the level of phase current above which the thermal model starts timing out the time-to-trip per the logarithmic formula above. THERMAL MDL PKP Range: 0.01 x CT(W1) Default: 1.0% in steps of 0. and will stay on even after the thermal capacity for all phases drops below 97% of the Transformer Thermal Alarm setting. The “ALARM” LED will turn on if the thermal capacity for any phase is over the Transformer Thermal Alarm setting. Trip.00 x CT(W1) in steps of 0. The transformer winding heating constant is usually provided by the manufacturer.

% Phase C current (IC) CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 897815. % Thermal Capacity ph C.cdr . % Thermal Capacity ph B.6–80 Command RESET LED: ALARM S LATCH S3 PROTECTION AND SETPOINT OR XFMR THERMAL FUNC R Disabled = 0 AND Latched Alarm OR Alarm Trip LED: TRIP AND Operate #1 Trip (TRIP W1 BKR) Operate #2 Trip (TRIP W2 BKR) SETPOINT XFMR THERMAL ALARM TRIP (To Breaker Failure) OR q > q ALARM SETPOINTS XFMR THERMAL PKP XFMR HEATING CONST . XFMR COOLING CONS Message and Event Recorder Xfmr Thermal Alarm Ph A Thermal Alarm Ph B Thermal Alarm Ph C Thermal Alarm SETPOINT TTRIP (ph A) OUTPUT RELAY 3 SETPOINT BLOCK 1 Off = 0 AND BLOCK 2 RUN OR Off = 0 BLOCK 3 XFMR THERMAL Figure 25: Transformer Thermal Protection logic diagram Off = 0 OR TTRIP (ph B) TTRIP (ph C) OUTPUT RELAY 4 OUTPUT RELAY 5 OUTPUT RELAY 6 Operate output relays upon selection Message and Event Recorder Xfmr Thermal OP Ph A Thermal OP Ph B Thermal OP Ph C Thermal OP Phase Currents Phase A current (IA) Phase B current (IB) ACTUAL VALUES Thermal Capacity ph A.

0615 0. IEC. two ground time overcurrent 51G(2). very.3000 0.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S3 PROTECTION Phase timed overcurrent protection TIME OVERCURRENT CURVE CHARACTERISTICS The 345 relay has two setpoint groups.1272 0. I = input current.90 curve classifications for extremely. and moderately inverse. The programming of these elements is identical: PKP. Ipu = pickup current setpoint. Inverse Curve selection.2294 0. and two negative sequence time overcurrent 51_2(2) elements. E = constants Table 5: ANSI Curve Constants ANSI Curve Shape ANSI Extremely Inverse ANSI Very Inverse ANSI Normally Inverse ANSI Moderately Inverse A 0. B. The curve shape can be either a standard curve selected from a range of standard ANSI. or Definite time. ANSI Curves The ANSI time overcurrent curve shapes conform to industry standards and the ANSI C37.0399 0. M = multiplier value.5000 0.1899 –0. When ordering the relay the user can select each group to have two phase time overcurrent 51P(2).3400 0.0274 0. IAC curves.1271 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–81 . The ANSI curves are derived from the following formula: Eq. C.6791 C 0. normally. two neutral time overcurrent 51N(2).0800 E 0.8000 D 3. 13 where:T = trip time (seconds).0505 9.7222 4. A. and Time Dial Multiplier (TDM).7989 2.1735 B 0.0094 –0.2614 0. D.2840 –4.

254 4.0 10.148 3.878 1.492 0.602 4.009 17.002 0.756 3.532 2.019 0.766 3.754 1.043 2.356 1.066 1.098 0.078 0.808 2.407 0.247 0.0 9.5 1. E = constants.067 2.812 2. 14 where: T = trip time (seconds).805 7.888 0.185 0.203 0.604 1.682 1.006 1.020 0.625 0.151 0.744 3.368 0.135 0.622 2.5 1.051 3.807 6.378 0.075 0.020 1.0 4.377 0.097 0.189 0.650 0.192 1.883 1.021 1.291 0.972 2. K.312 0.503 0.0 6.0 4.123 0.5 1.638 0.509 7.0 4.332 0. IEC Curve C.141 0.251 0.133 1.130 0.5 1.252 5.004 6.149 0.302 0.854 0.0 6.439 0.574 IEC Curves For European applications.754 1.082 1.513 1.126 0.815 0.284 8.216 0.904 1.457 0.479 1.665 1.967 2.341 0.704 0.123 0.0 6.475 1.465 2.151 0. IEC Curve B.977 24.955 5.666 0.270 0.256 0.093 0.994 2.073 0.531 0.341 13.951 25.094 0.510 1.483 1.049 0.365 2.982 2.268 0.0 8.298 0.295 31.055 0.146 0.040 1.054 3.108 0.596 0.062 25.705 10.301 18.0 10.0 8.0 ANSI Very Inverse 0.221 0.539 0.344 0.491 0.0 5.0 2.689 2.0 16.319 2.382 0.458 0.452 0.445 0.124 0.544 0.268 0.073 10.369 2.520 1.0 8.275 40.986 1.764 1.910 2.559 2.979 2.983 1.537 5.5 ANSI Extremely Inverse 0.508 3. M = multiplier setpoint.329 1.340 0.260 0.246 0.063 0.568 0.127 0.894 1.0 10.133 0.128 0.944 3.658 0.0 2.541 1.432 0.0 10.047 2.729 2.0 1. I = input current.702 5.600 2.076 4.0 4.466 3.068 0.001 8.689 1.247 0.079 2.208 1.125 6.441 3.563 1.000 4.956 32.567 3.250 1.0 6.599 0.659 1.S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Table 6: ANSI Curve Trip Times (in seconds) Multiplier (TDM) Current (I/Ipickup) 1.302 0.604 1.165 1.594 4.126 1.171 0. 6–82 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . These are defined as IEC Curve A.937 1.325 2.554 0.562 0.351 2.415 3.757 1.196 0.085 0.191 0.113 0.730 3.030 4.005 10.0 6.533 1.208 2.755 1.059 13.472 2.814 1.257 0.031 42.776 ANSI Moderately Inverse 10.474 0.495 0.700 0.371 0.102 5.0 8.443 6.478 0.812 2.393 0.142 4.113 1.260 0.0 8.0 0.990 1.274 14.106 0.663 1.163 2.675 1.166 0.524 34.239 0.324 0.537 1.0 10.416 3.137 7.0 4. Ipu = pickup current setpoint.378 2.583 0.955 1.025 2.255 0.133 2.0 2.267 0.0 3.656 7.208 1.786 0.252 2.379 0.0 7.0 0.866 3.864 1.291 3.134 6.493 0.511 1.110 0.074 2.184 0.161 0.404 8.489 0.360 1. the relay offers the four standard curves defined in IEC 255-4 and British standard BS142.874 1.627 2.818 0. and Short Inverse.680 1. The formulae for these curves are: Eq.170 0.527 2.515 3.0 2.484 1.872 1.589 0.330 0.821 4.412 0.736 1.659 3.172 0.219 0.842 17.680 0.226 0.016 ANSI Normally Inverse 17.742 1.594 12.156 0.007 13.297 1.281 0.

029 0.350 2.302 10.270 0.750 12.167 0.80 1.229 0. 15 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–83 .870 2.60 0.40 0.40 0.521 3.538 0.700 3.315 0.800 5.031 0.150 0.000 2.067 0.400 16.350 1.312 0.594 1.386 0.415 0.135 0.05 0.10 0.20 0.297 0.404 0.10 0.878 0.508 0.188 1.675 1.900 1.330 0.333 IAC Curves The curves for the General Electric type IAC relay family are derived from the formulae: Eq.712 2.029 6.081 0.446 3.333 2.140 13.034 0.80 1.600 10.0 4.223 0.052 0.006 4.169 0.771 1.111 0.301 0.089 0.162 0.400 0.535 2.620 2.667 10.223 1.167 0.00 IEC Curve C 0.424 4.260 2.400 1.150 0.200 6.600 0.450 0.673 0.808 1.543 1.837 0.338 0.996 1.60 0.044 0.350 2.000 0.013 1.160 2.00 0.700 0.062 0.0 9.877 0.667 1.711 1.526 0.003 2.286 0.306 0.050 E 0.200 8.000 51.231 0.637 3.247 1.00 IEC Curve B 0.063 0.675 1.929 0.207 0.000 0.971 Current (I/Ipickup) 1.333 25.20 0.135 0.544 0.214 0.600 4.109 0.675 1.700 0.200 1.300 0.40 0.576 0.350 2.646 0.457 0.800 1.835 2.500 6.270 0.767 1.083 0.319 1.075 0.054 0.500 80.05 0.000 0.778 0.0 3.20 0.700 4.500 0.157 1.05 0.297 0.056 0.00 IEC Short Time 0.000 64.149 0.000 38.829 2.800 5.333 0.860 1.667 0.371 0.075 0.280 0.096 0.439 6.027 0.351 0.623 1.023 17.762 1.612 1.218 0.249 0.000 2.914 1.353 0.169 0.0 8.113 0.706 1.980 0.428 0.040 Table 8: IEC Curve Trip Times (in seconds) Multiplier (TDM) IEC Curve A 0.0 10.10 0.127 0.070 3.311 0.668 0.600 10.667 1.115 0.10 0.5 2.856 1.000 1.346 0.667 0.988 3.254 0.084 0.000 13.338 0.200 21.782 2.992 2.000 26.498 0.200 0.250 0.269 0.067 1.058 0.376 2.461 0.451 0.978 2.80 1.100 0.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S3 PROTECTION Table 7: IEC (BS) Inverse Time Curve Constants IEC (BS) Curve Shape IEC Curve A (BS142) IEC Curve B (BS142) IEC Curve C (BS142) IEC Short Inverse K 0.984 4.500 0.116 0.05 0.175 0.333 2.088 0.600 0.533 1.494 0.630 1.020 1.192 0.755 8.400 0.540 1.225 0.618 0.338 0.133 3.0 10.317 6.60 0.323 0.016 1.350 1.411 2.752 0.493 3.80 1.050 0.0 5.384 0.302 3.500 1.042 0.356 0.371 1.113 0.501 1.518 3.156 0.602 0.100 21.176 0.0 7.0 6.900 1.104 0.333 1.435 0.080 1.017 13.000 0.528 0.058 0.702 0.225 0.445 0.688 0.667 4.153 0.117 2.165 0.000 2.333 0.000 5.485 0.025 2.400 16.375 0.178 0.267 0.60 0.800 2.800 2.822 3.124 0.675 1.667 3.333 8.450 0.200 4.423 1.568 3.800 5.700 3.040 0.194 10.327 0.114 0.193 0.012 0.40 0.20 0.247 0.719 3.267 0.890 1.900 1.000 6.659 1.333 0.026 0.038 0.400 27.700 5.067 2.050 0.781 5.350 2.

100 0.0 7.256 5.597 0.341 0.192 4.188 1.744 0.0040 0.663 0.022 2.872 23.0428 B 0.2078 0.2461 7.451 2.409 0.375 0.759 0.025 0.031 0.087 0.743 0.140 0.348 2.070 0.991 1.395 1.185 0.0609 C 0.595 0.859 0.058 11.0 4.228 0.0 4.131 2.555 0.0 4.057 0.813 2.2885 –0.072 0.359 1.026 0.992 1.533 1.0 6.699 0.0 13.656 3.054 0.995 0.049 0.221 0.969 1.279 0.997 0.331 0. A to E = constants.0 8.654 1.501 0.370 0.314 0.561 3.966 2.926 2.532 1.0 9.422 2.0 4.594 1.209 10.065 1.360 0.419 0.0900 0.296 0.559 0.990 27.5 1.061 0.719 1.490 1.0 10.299 29.225 0.498 2.859 1.154 0.133 2.614 1.266 0.662 0.569 0.457 0.0 10.987 4.401 0.4180 –0.749 1.434 0.497 4.075 2.496 5.423 3.307 0.455 0.215 1.212 0.983 1.114 0.375 2.025 0. I = input current.026 0.368 0.1000 0. There is no intentional “dead band” where the current is above 6–84 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .687 1.848 1.128 3.248 17.174 0.495 0.297 0.656 1.0 6.711 1.5 1.150 3.093 0.025 0.172 0.569 2.269 0.178 0.552 7.784 1.810 1.239 0.108 0.640 1.325 0.424 0.052 0.046 0.246 0.0 4.0 5.121 5.060 0.439 2.573 0.0 0.0 2.196 0.349 0.343 0.242 0.674 1.6379 0.320 0.204 0.598 2.307 0.431 0.979 14.046 1.443 0.556 0.844 3.191 1.028 0.200 0.635 0.155 2.145 1. M = multiplier setpoint.0010 E 0.8630 0.248 0.061 2.149 0.0 8.106 0.053 0.369 0.229 1.392 0.387 8.123 0.050 0.426 0.143 0.035 0.027 0.165 0.878 3.0 8.303 0.419 0.843 2.183 11.405 0.101 0.186 0.379 0.494 PHASE TIMED OVERCURRENT PROTECTION The SR345 relay has two Phase Time Overcurrent elements per protection group.620 2.781 2.190 0.983 6.0 2.115 1.394 0.698 1.133 0.160 0.541 4.6200 0.0 10.074 0.493 0.124 0. Ipu = pickup current setpoint.210 0.569 0.621 6.047 0.245 0.606 1.931 9.8000 0.613 0.072 0.591 5.605 5.372 0.1947 0.0 2.5 IAC Extremely Inverse 0.0 IAC Very Inverse 0.636 0.095 0.747 3.901 5.202 0.802 0.624 0.7955 0.051 0.993 20.499 2.186 0.217 0.542 0.323 1.212 2.123 0.457 3.997 4.796 0.491 0.948 0.286 0.524 0.148 0.474 1.906 1.372 0.168 0.846 33.885 1.434 0.744 1.083 0.0 10.490 0.749 1.0 3.488 0.511 0.105 0.0221 Table 10: IAC Curve Trip Times Multiplier (TDM) 1.0 10.893 1.138 3.770 2. The settings of this function are applied to each of the three phases to produce phase overcurrent trip or pickup.9586 0.921 2.S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS where: T = trip time (seconds).310 4.578 1.301 0.012 13.398 6.280 1.7872 –1.113 0.695 3.699 3.093 0.227 0.180 0.0 6.0 2.0 IAC Short Inverse 0.0 6.487 1.298 0.862 0.062 0.0 8.197 0.320 0.337 0.0 8. Table 9: GE Type IAC Inverse Curve Constants IAC Curve Shape IAC Extreme Inverse IAC Very Inverse IAC Inverse IAC Short Inverse A 0.537 1.374 2.353 3.093 0.741 0.158 2.922 0.0 IAC Inverse 0.312 2.453 0.201 0.0 6.407 7.102 0.064 2.5 1.266 0.266 0.745 1.099 0.374 11.356 0.6200 D 1.5 1.117 1.

1 = 0. If the CT(W2) setting is selected. with the TOC function selected as Alarm. The TOC pickup flag is asserted when the current on any phase is above the PKP value. The selection of Definite Time has a base time delay of 0.00 This setting provides the selection for Time Dial Multiplier by which the times from the inverse curve are modified. specified as times CT. IEC Curve A/B/C and Short Inverse. CT(W2) Default: CT(W1) The Phase Timed Overcurrent menu provides the selection of either CT(W1) input currents or CT(W2) currents. Latched Alarm.00 in steps of 0. For example. and will stay “ON” after the operation clears. Definite Time. The “ALARM” LED will flash upon phase TOC operation. Trip Default: Disabled The selection of the Latched Alarm. and the Phase TOC operates.Working with the Keypad. and the fault current was 5 times bigger than the PKP level. a PKP setting of 0. or Trip setting enables the Phase TOC function. For instructions on how to use the keypad.9 x CT with 300:5 CT translates into 270A primary current. the PH TOC element will use the ratings of the Winding 1 CTs entered on the relay under SYSTEM SETUP/S2 CURRENT SENSING. If CT(W1) is selected.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S3 PROTECTION the pickup level. of 2. PH TOC1(2) PKP Range: 0. The “ALARM” LED will not turn on if the TOC operates when set to the function Trip. The element drops from pickup without operating if the measured current drops below 97-99% of the pickup value before the time for operation is reached. The TOC trip flag is asserted if the element stays picked up for the time defined by the selected inverse curve and the magnitude of the current. and will self-reset.1 s. PH TOC1(2) CURVE Range: ANSI Extremely/Very/Moderately/Normally Inverse.00 x CT This setting sets the time overcurrent pickup level. multiplied by the selected TD multiplier. when the operating condition clears. and adding approximately 8 to 10 ms output relay time. Alarm. However the pickup accuracy is guaranteed within the current input accuracy of 3% above the set PKP value. please refer to Chapter 3 .00 x CT in steps of 0. The output relay #1 "Trip" will operate when the Trip setting is selected. When Definite Time is selected.50 to 20. IAC Extremely/Very/Inverse/Short Default: Extremely Inverse This setting sets the shape of the selected inverse curve. The following path is available using the keypad.04 to 20. if Latched Alarm is selected as a TOC function. the relay will use the CT ratings associated with transformer Winding 2. the time for TOC operation is defined only by the TDM setting.5 s applying the time delay accuracy outlined under the Technical Specification. For example if an ANSI Extremely Inverse curve is selected with TDM = 2. PHASE CT INPUTS Range: CT(W1).01 x CT Default: 1. the “ALARM” LED will flash during TOC operation.01 Default: 1. For example the operating time for TOC set to Definite Time and a TDM set to 5 will result in 5*0. Alarm.59 seconds. PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > SETPOINT GROUP 1(2) > PHASE TOC 1(2) PH TOC1(2) FUNCTION Range: Disabled. Until the reset command is initiated. The output relay #1 “Trip” will not operate if the Latched Alarm or Alarm setting is selected. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–85 . the operation of the element will not occur before an elapsed time after pickup. PHASE TOC1(2) TDM Range: 0.

M . where if it reaches a level of 100% of the set energy capacity level. The selection of relay outputs operation is available no matter whether Latched Alarm. Operate Default: Do not operate Any. regardless of the Operate/ Do Not Operate value selected. or Logic Element . 8 for IEC curves).is available only if the Trip setting is selected as the function for the Phase Timed Overcurrent element. CR . E . The accumulated energy capacity is used as an input for computation of the reset time when the “Linear” reset is selected as a setting. IAC. BLOCK 1/2/3 Range: Off. 16 where: TRESET . or Trip function is selected. Alarm. the time to reset is calculated based on the following linear equation: Eq. One or both trip output relays can be selected to operate upon Phase TOC operation. Linear Default: Instantaneous This setting provides for the selection of an Instantaneous or Linear reset time. the phase TOC element will reset instantaneously providing the current drops below 97-99% of the Phase TOC PKP level before the time for operation is reached.RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR and RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR . 6–86 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .turns on. OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6 Range: Do not operate. Logic Elements 1 to 16 Default: Off Three blocking inputs are provided in the Phase TOC menu.curve multiplier.characteristic constant (5 for ANSI. These output relays will not operate if either Alarm or Latched Alarm is selected as an OC function.Contact input. Virtual Input.energy capacity reached (per unit). The 100% “energy capacity” for the TOC element is defined by the selection of PKP.reset time in seconds. the phase TOC function will be blocked. Remote Input. NOTE: NOTE The "RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR" and "RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR" setpoints will be displayed on the OC menu regardless of the selected OC function. The output relays are operational only if the OC function is selected as Trip. Contact Input 1 to 10.S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS PH TOC1(2) RESET Range: Instantaneous. Operate Default: Do not operate The menu for the two trip output relays . and if it goes below 97-99% of this level. If Instantaneous reset is selected. When Linear reset is selected. Virtual Input 1 to 32. upon phase TOC operation. the element operates. TDM and points from the inverse curve. or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate. A memory variable based on actual values currents is monitored for accumulation of energy capacity. When any of the selected blocking inputs . RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR and RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR Range: Do not operate. Definite Time. User Curve and FlexcurvesTM. Remote Input 1 to 32. the element will tend to reset.

cdr S3 PROTECTION 6–87 .CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Command RESET LED: ALARM S LATCH AND R OR AND SETPOINT PH TOC FUNCTION: Disabled = 0 OR Latched Alarm Alarm LED: TRIP AND Trip SETPOINTS (configurable only if “TRIP” function selected) RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR Operate trip output relays upon selection 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL SETPOINTS PH TOC INPUT: PH TOC PICKUP: To Breaker Failure Trip Message and Event Recorder PH TOC CURVE: SETPOINTS PH TOC TDM: PH TOC RESET TIME: AND PH TOC PH A OP PH TOC PH B OP PH TOC PH C OP PH TOC OP SETPOINTS: OUTPUT RELAY 3 OUTPUT RELAY 4 OR BLOCK 1: Off = 0 RUN IA > PICKUP BLOCK 2: OR Off = 0 BLOCK 3: Off = 0 Operate output relays upon selection OUTPUT RELAY 5 OUTPUT RELAY 6 Figure 26: Phase Time Overcurrent Protection logic diagram RUN IB > PICKUP LED: PICKUP OR CT(W1) CT(W2) phase currents selected under PH TOC INPUT setpoint RUN IC > PICKUP Phase A current (IA) Phase B current (IB) Phase C current (IC) Message and Event Recorder PH TOC PKP PH TOC PH A PKP PH TOC PH B PKP PH TOC PH C PKP 897808.

Phase IOC1. Output relay #1 “Trip” will not operate if the Latched Alarm or Alarm function is selected. the relay will use the CT ratings associated with transformer Winding 2. CT(W2) Default: CT(W1) The Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent menu provides a selection for either CT(W1) input currents or CT(W2) currents. 6–88 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . Alarm. regardless of the Operate/ Do Not Operate value selected. the PH IOC element will use the ratings of the Winding 1 CTs entered on the relay under SYSTEM SETUP/S2 CURRENT SENSING. PH IOC1(2) DELAY Range: 0.Working with the Keypad. Until the Reset command is initiated. PH CT INPUTS Range: CT(W1).01 x CT Default: 1. The “ALARM” LED will not turn on if the IOC is operational when set to the Trip function.00 to 300. and Phase IOC2 per protection group. These output relays will not operate if either Alarm or Latched Alarm is selected as an OC function. Each of them consists of three separate instantaneous overcurrent relays. PH IOC1(2) PKP Range: 0. and the Phase IOC is operational. The following path is available using the keypad. and will stay “ON” after the operation clears.00 sec This setting provides selection for the time delay used to delay the protection operation. The “ALARM” LED will flash upon phase IOC operation.S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Phase instantaneous overcurrent protection The 345 relay has two identical instantaneous overcurrent protections . For instructions on how to use the keypad.00 x CT in steps of 0. PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > S3 SETPOINT GROUP 1(2) > S3 PHASE IOC1(2) PH IOC1(2) FUNCTION Range: Disabled. Latched Alarm.05 to 20. Trip Default: Disabled The selection of the Latched Alarm. please refer to Chapter 3 .00 x CT This setting sets the instantaneous overcurrent pickup level. . NOTE: NOTE The "RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR" and "RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR" setpoints will be displayed on the OC menu regardless of the selected OC function. will self-reset when the operation clears. If CT(W1) is selected.9 x CT with 300:5 CT translates into 270A primary current. if Latched Alarm is selected. Alarm. with identical settings. Operate Default: Do not operate The menu for the two trip output relays .RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR and RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR . The output relay #1 “Trip” will operate when the Trip setting is selected. RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR and RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR Range: Do not operate. or Trip setting enables the Phase IOC function. the “ALARM” LED will flash during IOC operation. If the CT(W2) setting is selected. One or both trip output relays can be selected to operate upon Phase IOC operation.is available only if the Trip setting is selected as the function for the Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent element. one per phase. a PKP setting of 0.00 sec in steps of 0.01 sec Default: 0. and with the IOC function selected as Alarm. The output relays are operational only if the OC function is selected as Trip. For example.

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S3 PROTECTION OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6 Range: Do not operate. or Logic Element . Operate Default: Do not operate Any or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon phase IOC operation. When any one of the selected blocking inputs . or Trip function is selected. Remote Input. the phase IOC function will be blocked. Relay outputs operation is available no matter whether the Latched Alarm.is turned on. Contact Input 1 to 10. Logic Elements 1 to 16 Default: Off Three blocking inputs are provided in the Phase IOC menu.Contact input. BLOCK 1/2/3 Range: Off. Virtual Input 1 to 32. Virtual Input. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–89 . Alarm. Remote Input 1 to 32.

CT(W2) phase currents selected under PH TOC INPUT setpoint IC > PICKUP RUN PH IOC A OP PH IOC B OP PH IOC C OP LED: PICKUP Phase A current (IA) Phase B current (IB) Figure 27: Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection logic diagram Phase C current (IC) CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS OR Message and Event Recorder PHASE IOC PKP PH IOC A PKP PH IOC B PKP PH IOC C PKP 897809.cdr 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .6–90 Command RESET LED: ALARM S LATCH S3 PROTECTION AND R OR SETPOINT AND PH IOC FUNCTION: Disabled = 0 Latched Alarm OR Alarm LED: TRIP Trip SETPOINTS (configurable only if “TRIP” function selected) RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR AND Operate trip output relays upon selection RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR SETPOINT PH IOC INPUT: PH IOC PICKUP: SETPOINT BLOCK 1: To Breaker Failure Trip Off = 0 AND BLOCK 2: RUN IA > PICKUP SETPOINT PH IOC PKP DELAY: OR Off = 0 BLOCK 3: Off = 0 tPKP SETPOINT RUN IB > PICKUP tPKP tPKP 0 OUTPUT RELAY 3 OUTPUT RELAY 4 OR 0 Operate output relays upon selection 0 OUTPUT RELAY 5 Message and Event Recorder PHASE IOC OP OUTPUT RELAY 6 CT(W1).

The Definite Time selection has a default time of 0. before the time for operation is reached. NOTE: NOTE 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–91 . or both trip output relays. when the ground current is above the PKP value. Latched Alarm or Trip setting enables the Ground/Sensitive Ground TOC function.Working with the Keypad. Otherwise. the TOC menu allows the user to select the operation of either RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR”. The element drops from pickup without operation if the measured current drops below 97-99% of the pickup value. For example. Any or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate no matter whether the Alarm.000 x CT in steps of 0. when the operating condition clears.000 x CT This setting sets the Time Overcurrent pickup level specified in times CT. GND CT INPUTS Range: CT(W1). the relay displays the menu for Ground TOC protection.CT(W2). a PKP setting of 0. Until the reset command is initiated.001 x CT Default: 1.1s.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S3 PROTECTION Ground timed overcurrent protection The relay has two Ground Time Overcurrent elements per setpoint group.005 to 3.GND TOC1(2) PKP Range: 0.005 to 3. if Latched Alarm is selected the “ALARM” LED will flash during the TOC operating condition.00 x CT SENS.00 x CT in steps of 0. CT(W2) Default: CT(W1) The Ground Timed Over-Current menu provides for the selection for either ground CT of winding 1 .001xCT. The Ground TOC trip flag is asserted if the element stays picked-up for the time defined by the selected inverse curve and the magnitude of the current. With the GND TOC function selected as Alarm . the “ALARM” LED will flash.01 x CT Default: 1. PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > SETPOINT GROUP 1(2) > GROUND TOC The settings from the menu for Sensitive Ground TOC. If the relay is ordered with a Sensitive Ground CT. the time for Ground TOC operation is defined only by the TDM setting. If the Trip setting is selected. Latched Alarm Default: Disabled The selection of the Alarm. The Ground TOC pickup flag is asserted. GND TOC1(2) PKP Range: 0. the range for this setting is 0. the GND TOC element will use the ground CT rating of Winding 1 entered on the relay under SYSTEM SETUP/S2 CURRENT SENSING.000 x CT. and a default value of 1. or ground CT of winding 2 . If CT(W1) is selected. Alarm.9 x CT with 300:5 CT translates into 270A primary current. and will stay “ON” after the condition clears. Trip. The settings of the function are applied to the measured winding ground input current to produce pickup and trip flags.04 to 20. will appear only when the relay is ordered with the sensitive ground CT. and GND TOC operational. with a step of 0. When Definite Time is selected. input.000 x CT. If CT(W2) setting is selected. The following path is available using the keypad.CT(W1). For instructions on how to use the keypad. GND TOC1(2) FUNCTION Range: Disabled. “RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR”. the relay will use the ground CT rating associated with transformer Winding 2. please refer to Chapter 3 . Latched Alarm or Trip setting is selected. and will self-reset.

6–92 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . Operate Default: Do not operate Any or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon ground TOC operation. Refer to the User Curve and FlexCurve setup for more details about their configuration and usage.00 in steps of 0. GND TOC1(2) RESET Range: Instantaneous. the operation of the element will not occur before 2.59s has elapsed from the time of pickup.01 Default: 1. a custom User curve.energy capacity reached (per unit). For example if an ANSI Extremely Inverse curve is selected with TDM = 2. or Trip function is selected. User Curve and FlexcurvesTM. Alarm. the ground TOC element will reset instantaneously providing the current drops below 97-98% below the Ground TOC PKP level. E . or both trip output relays can be selected to operate upon Ground TOC operation. Operate Default: Do not operate The menu for the two trip output relays . When Linear reset is selected. If none of the standard curve shapes is appropriate. Definite Time IEC Curve A/B/C and Short Inverse IAC Extremely/Very/Inverse/Short User Curve.is only available if the Trip setting is selected as a function for the Ground TOC element. These output relays will not operate if either Alarm or Latched Alarm is selected as an OC function.RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR and RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR . before the time for operation is reached. CR . FlexCurve A.reset time in seconds.curve multiplier. Definite Time.characteristic constant (5 for ANSI. RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR and RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR Range: Do not operate. using which the times from the inverse curve are modified. NOTE: NOTE The "RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR" and "RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR" setpoints will be displayed on the OC menu regardless of the selected OC function. Linear Default: Instantaneous This setting provides for the selection of either an Instantaneous or a Linear reset time. 17 where: TRESET . GND TOC1(2) TDM Range: 0. 8 for IEC curves).50 to 20.S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS GND TOC1(2) CURVE Range: ANSI Extremely/Very/Moderately/Normally Inverse. If Instantaneous reset is selected. regardless of the Operate/ Do Not Operate value selected. OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6 Range: Do not operate. Either one. M . and the fault current was 5 times greater than the PKP level. The output relays are operational only if the OC function is selected as Trip. The selection of relay outputs operation is available no matter whether the Latched Alarm. IAC. the time to reset is calculated based on the following linear equation: Eq.00 This setting provides the selection of the Time Dial Multiplier. or FlexCurve can be created. FlexCurve B Default: Extremely Inverse This setting sets the shape of the selected overcurrent inverse curve.

or Logic Element . Remote Input 1 to 32. Virtual Input. Contact Input 1 to 10. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–93 .turn on.Contact input. Logic Element 1 to 16 Default: Off Three blocking inputs are provided in the Ground TOC menu. Remote Input. the Phase TOC function is blocked. When any of the selected blocking inputs .CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S3 PROTECTION BLOCK 1/2/3 Range: Off. Virtual Input 1 to 32.

cdr CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .6–94 Command RESET LED: ALARM S LATCH S3 PROTECTION AND R OR SETPOINT AND GND TOC FUNCTION Disabled = 0 Alarm OR Latched Alarm LED: TRIP Trip SETPOINTS ( configurable only if “TRIP” function selected ) RLY 1 TRIP W1 BKR AND Operate trip output relays upon selection RLY 2 TRIP W2 BKR SETPOINTS GND TOC INPUT : : : : GND TOC PICKUP GND TOC CURVE GND TOC TD MULTIPLIER GND TOC RESET : To Breaker Failure Trip SETPOINTS BLOCK 1 SETPOINTS OUTPUT RELAY 3 OUTPUT RELAY 4 OUTPUT RELAY 5 OUTPUT RELAY 6 Operate output relays upon selection Off = 0 AND RUN BLOCK 2 Ig > PICKUP OR Off = 0 BLOCK 3 Off = 0 Message and Event Recorder GND TOC OP CT(W1) CT(W2) ground current selected under GND TOC INPUT Figure 28: Ground/Sensitive Ground Timed Overcurrent Protection logic diagram Ground/Sens Ground current (Ig) LED: PICKUP Message and Event Recorder GND TOC PKP 897810.

000 x CT in steps of 0. the IOC menu allows the user to select the operation of either one of the two trip output relays “RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR”. and will self-reset.001 x CT. Latched Alarm or Trip setting enables the Ground/Sensitive Ground IOC function.00 x CT SENS. GND CT INPUTS Range: CT(W1).Working with the Keypad. For example. or the ground CT of Winding 2. If CT(W2) setting is selected. Any or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate no matter whether the Alarm.005 to 3. the GND IOC element will use the ground CT rating of Winding 1 entered on the relay under SYSTEM SETUP/S2 CURRENT SENSING. the relay will use the ground CT rating associated with transformer Winding 2. and will stay “ON” after the condition clears.00 sec in steps of 0. The Ground IOC pickup flag is asserted when the ground current is above the PKP value. or both.000 x CT.00 to 300. Alarm. PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > SETPOINT GROUP 1(2) > GROUND IOC1(2) GND IOC1(2) FUNCTION Range: Disabled. CT(W2) Default: CT(W1) The Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent menu provides for selection of either the ground CT of Winding 1-CT(W1). and GND IOC operational.001 x CT Default: 1. the range of the setting is from 0. with a step of 0. Ground CT. GND IOC1(2) DELAY Range: 0. when the operating condition clears.00 seconds. or sensitive ground current for producing pickup and trip flags. For Sens. GND IOC1(2) PKP Range: 0.01 sec Default: 0. The following path is available using the keypad. If the Trip setting is selected. “RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR”. the pickup and operate flags will be asserted at the same time. Until a reset command is initiated. If CT(W1) is selected. If the pickup time delay is set to 0. For instructions on how to use the keypad. the “ALARM” LED will flash during the IOC operating condition. Trip. Latched Alarm Default: Disabled The selection of the Alarm.9 x CT with 300:5 CT translates into 270A primary current. The settings of these functions are applied to the measured ground. if Latched Alarm is selected.000 x CT This setting sets the ground overcurrent pickup level specified as times CT. and a default value of 1.GND IOC1(2) PKP Range: 0.CT(W2) input. a PKP setting of 0.005 to 3.01 x CT Default: 1. The Ground IOC operate flag is asserted if the element stays picked up for the time defined by the Ground IOC PKP Delay setting.05 to 20.000 x CT.00 sec This setting provides the selection of the pickup time delay used to delay operation of the protection. the “ALARM” LED will flash. Latched Alarm or Trip setting is selected. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–95 . The element drops from pickup without operation if the ground current drops below 97 to 99% of the pickup value. please refer to Chapter 3 . With the GND IOC function selected as Alarm .00 x CT in steps of 0.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S3 PROTECTION Ground instantaneous overcurrent protection The relay has two Ground/Sensitive Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent protections per setpoint group.

turns on. 6–96 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . The selection of relay outputs operation is available no matter whether the Latched Alarm. the ground IOC function is blocked. Operate Default: Do not operate Any.S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR and RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR Range: Do Not Operate. Operate Default: Do Not Operate The menu for the two trip output relays . Remote Input. The output relays are operational only if the OC function is selected as Trip. or Logic Element . Virtual Input. of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon ground IOC operation. or all. Virtual Input 1 to 32.RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR and RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR . BLOCK 1/2/3 Range: Off. or Trip function is selected. regardless of the Operate/ Do Not Operate value selected. Alarm.is available only if the Trip setting is selected as a function for the Ground IOC element. These output relays will not operate if either Alarm or Latched Alarm is selected as an OC function.Contact input. Remote Input 1 to 32. OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6 Range: Do not operate. Logic Element 1 to 16 Default: Off Three blocking inputs are provided in the Ground IOC menu. One or both trip output relays can be selected to operate under the operating condition. Contact Input 1 to 10. When any of the selected blocking inputs . NOTE: NOTE The "RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR" and "RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR" setpoints will be displayed on the OC menu regardless of the selected OC function.

Ground current (Ig) S3 PROTECTION 6–97 .CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Command RESET LED: ALARM AND S LATCH R OR SETPOINT AND 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL OR GND IOC FUNCTION Disabled = 0 Latched Alarm Alarm LED: TRIP AND Trip SETPOINTS ( configurable only if “TRIP” function selected ) RLY 1 TRIP W1 BKR RLY 2 TRIP W2 BKR Operate trip output relays upon selection To Breaker Failure Trip SETPOINT GND IOC CT INPUT GND IOC PICKUP AND RUN Ig > PICKUP SETPOINT GND IOC PKP DELAY tPKP SETPOINT BLOCK 1 Off = 0 SETPOINTS: OUTPUT RELAY 3 OUTPUT RELAY 4 0 BLOCK 2 OR Off = 0 BLOCK 3 Off = 0 Operate output relays upon selection OUTPUT RELAY 5 OUTPUT RELAY 6 CT(W1).cdr Figure 29: Ground/Sensitive Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection logic diagram Ground/Sens. CT(W2) ground current selected under GND TOC CT INPUT LED: PICKUP Message and Event Recorder GND TOC PKP Message and Event Recorder GND TOC OP 897811.

If CT(W2) setting is selected. If CT(W1) is selected. For instructions on how to use the keypad. If the Trip setting is selected.00 This setting provides for selection of the Time Dial Multiplier by which the times from the selected inverse curve are modified. Latched Alarm. if Latched Alarm is selected. the “ALARM” LED will flash during the IOC operating condition. The Neutral TOC trip flag is asserted if the element stays picked up for the time defined by the selected inverse curve and the magnitude of the current. Trip Default: Disabled The selection of the Alarm. NTRL CT INPUTS Range: CT(W1). NTRL TOC1(2) TDM Range: 0. Any or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate no matter whether Alarm. the NTRL TOC element will use the computed neutral current from Winding 2 phase currents and Winding 2 CT ratings. and the fault current was 5 times bigger than the PKP level. For example if an ANSI Extremely Inverse curve is selected with TDM = 2. For example.Working with the Keypad. Latched Alarm. or CT(W2) input currents.00 x CT This setting sets the time overcurrent pickup level specified as times CT. NTRL TOC1(2) CURVE Range: ANSI Extremely/Very/Moderately/Normally Inverse Definite Time IEC Curve A/B/C and Short Inverse IAC Extremely/Very/Inverse/Short Default: Extremely Inverse This setting sets the shape of the selected overcurrent inverse curve. and will stay “ON” after the condition clears.04 to 20. when the operating condition clears. and will self-reset.05 to 20. The settings of this function are applied to the calculated neutral current to produce pickup and trip flags.01 x CT Default: 1. “RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR”. or Trip setting enables the Neutral IOC function. The following path is available using the keypad. operation of the element will not occur before 2. Alarm. a PKP setting of 0. the IOC menu allows the user to select the operation of either one of the two trip output relays “RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR”. the time for Neutral TOC operation is defined only by the TDM setting. PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > S3 SETPOINT GROUP 1(2) > S3 NEUTRAL TOC1(2) NTRL TOC1(2) FUNCTION Range: Disabled. NTRL TOC1(2) PKP Range: 0.01 Default: 1.00 x CT in steps of 0. Until the reset command is initiated.00 in steps of 0. With the NTRL IOC function selected as Alarm . please refer to Chapter 3 . the NTRL TOC element will use the neutral current computed by the relay based on Winding 1 phase currents and the Winding 1 CT ratings. and NTRL IOC operational. When Definite Time is selected.9 x CT(W1) with CT(W1) rating of 300:5 translates into 270A primary current. or both. the “ALARM” LED will flash. before the time for operation is reached. The Neutral TOC pickup flag is asserted when the neutral current is above the PKP value. Latched Alarm or Trip setting is selected. The element drops from pickup without operating if the neutral current drops below 97-99% of the pickup value.S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Neutral timed overcurrent protection The relay has two Neutral Time Overcurrent elements per setpoint group.59s have elapsed from pickup. CT(W2) Default: CT(W1) The menu of the Neutral Time OverCurrent element provides for selection of either CT (W1). 6–98 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

Remote Input 1 to 32. Virtual Input 1 to 32. CR . Operate Default: Do not operate Any. TDM and the points from the inverse curve. The accumulated energy capacity is used as an input for computation of the reset time when “Linear” reset is selected as a setting. A memory variable based on actual values currents is monitored for accumulation of energy capacity. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–99 .reset time in seconds.RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR and RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR . M . These output relays will not operate if either Alarm or Latched Alarm is selected as an OC function. Alarm. Logic Element 1 to 16 Default: Off There are three independent blocking inputs in the Neutral TOC menu. Operate Default: Do Not Operate The menu for the two trip output relays . The selection of a block input includes Contact input. or Logic Element. Definite Time.is available only if the Trip setting is selected as a function for the Neutral Timed Overcurrent element. regardless of the Operate/ Do Not Operate value selected.characteristic constant (5 for ANSI. RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR and RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR Range: Do Not Operate. the Neutral TOC element will reset instantaneously providing the current drops below 97-99% below the Neutral TOC PKP level before the time for operation is reached. OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6 Range: Do not operate. Linear Default: Instantaneous Selection of an Instantaneous or Linear reset time is provided using this setting. Contact Input 1 to 10. the time to reset is calculated based on the following linear equation: Eq. IAC. The selection of relay outputs operation is available no matter whether the Latched Alarm. and if it goes below 97-99% of this level.energy capacity reached (per unit). upon Neutral TOC operation. 18 where: TRESET . BLOCK 1/2/3 Range: Off. E . will tend to reset. The function is blocked if any of the three blocking inputs is detected “high”. One or both trip output relays can be selected to operate upon Neutral TOC operation. the element operates. or Trip function is selected. or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate. where if it reaches a level of 100% of the set energy capacity level. Virtual Input. When Linear reset is selected. NOTE: NOTE The "RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR" and "RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR" setpoints will be displayed on the OC menu regardless of the selected OC function.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S3 PROTECTION NTRL TOC1(2) RESET Range: Instantaneous. The output relays are operational only if the OC function is selected as Trip. The 100% “energy capacity” for the TOC element is defined by the selection of PKP. Remote Input.curve multiplier. If Instantaneous reset is selected.

cdr .6–100 Command RESET LED: ALARM S LATCH S3 PROTECTION AND R OR SETPOINT AND NTRL TOC FUNCTION Disabled = 0 Alarm OR Latched Alarm LED: TRIP AND Trip SETPOINTS (configurable only if “TRIP” function selected) RLY 1 TRIP W1 BKR RLY 2 TRIP W2 BKR Operate trip output relays upon selection SETPOINTS NTRL TOC CT INPUT NTRL TOC PICKUP NTRL TOC CURVE NTRL TOC TDM NTRL TOC RESET To Breaker Failure Trip SETPOINTS BLOCK 1 SETPOINTS: OUTPUT RELAY 3 OUTPUT RELAY 4 OUTPUT RELAY 5 OUTPUT RELAY 6 Operate output relays upon selection Off = 0 AND BLOCK 2 RUN IN > PICKUP OR Off = 0 Figure 30: Neutral Timed Overcurrent Protection logic diagram BLOCK 3 Off = 0 Message and Event Recorder NTRL TOC OP CT(W2). CT(W2) neutral current computed by the relay Neutral current (IN) LED: PICKUP Message and Event Recorder NTRL TOC PKP CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 897812.

Alarm. when the operating condition clears. The element drops from pickup without operation if the neutral current drops below 97-99% of the pickup value. RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR and RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR Range: Do Not Operate. and will self-reset. or CT(W2) phase inputs. or both. and NTRL IOC operational. NTRL IOC1(2) PKP Range: 0. Until the reset command is initiated. The following path is available using the keypad. For instructions on how to use the keypad. With the NTRL IOC function selected as Alarm .is available only if the Trip setting is selected as a function for the Neutral IOC element. Any or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate no matter whether the Alarm. the NTRL IOC element will use the neutral current computed by the relay based on Winding 1 phase currents and the Winding 1 CT ratings. Trip Default: Disabled The selection of the Alarm. and will stay “ON” after the condition clears. the “ALARM” LED will flash. One or both trip output relays can be selected to operate upon Neutral IOC operation. if Latched Alarm is selected. “RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR”.00 seconds. Latched Alarm or Trip setting enables the Neutral IOC function. or Trip setting is selected. The Neutral IOC pickup flag is asserted when the neutral current is above the PKP value. please refer to Chapter 3 .00 sec This setting provides for selection of the pickup time delay used to delay the operation of the protection. The Neutral IOC operate flag is asserted if the element stays picked up for the time defined by the Neutral IOC Delay setting. If the pickup time delay is set to 0. Operate Default: Do Not Operate The menu for the two trip output relays .00 sec in steps of 0. If CT(W1) is selected. NTRL CT INPUTS Range: CT(W1).Working with the Keypad. the “ALARM” LED will flash during IOC operation.00 to 300.00 x CT This setting sets the neutral instantaneous overcurrent pickup level specified in times CT. If CT(W2) setting is selected.00 x CT in steps of 0. the pickup and operate flags will be asserted at the same time. These output relays will not operate if either Alarm or Latched Alarm is selected as an OC function.01 x CT Default: 1. regardless of the Operate/ Do Not Operate value selected. Latched Alarm.01 sec Default: 0. PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > S3 SETPOINT GROUP 1 (2) > S3 NEUTRAL IOC1(2) NTRL IOC1(2) FUNCTION Range: Disabled.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S3 PROTECTION Neutral instantaneous overcurrent protection The relay has two Instantaneous Overcurrent elements per setpoint group. The settings of this function are applied to the calculated neutral current to produce pickup and trip flags. If the Trip setting is selected. NOTE: NOTE The "RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR" and "RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR" setpoints will be displayed on the OC menu regardless of the selected OC function.05 to 20. the IOC menu allows the user to select the operation of either one of the two trip output relays “RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR”. the relay will use the computed neutral current based on Winding 2 phase currents and Winding 2 CT ratings. Latched Alarm. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–101 .RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR and RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR . The output relays are operational only if the OC function is selected as Trip. NTRL IOC1(2) DELAY Range: 0. CT(W2) Default: CT(W1) The Neutral Overcurrent menu provides selection for either CT (W1).

or Logic Element. The function is blocked if any of the three blocking inputs is detected “high”. Virtual Input. Remote Input 1 to 32. Selection of a block input includes Contact input. Operate Default: Do Not Operate Any or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon the Neutral IOC operation.S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6 Range: Do Not Operate. Alarm. Virtual Input 1 to 32. 6–102 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . The selection of relay outputs operation is available no matter whether the Latched Alarm. or Trip function is selected. Logic Element 1 to 16 Default: Off There are three independent blocking inputs in the Neutral IOC menu. Remote Input. Contact Input 1 to 10. BLOCK 1/2/3 Range: Off.

cdr S3 PROTECTION 6–103 . CT(W2) neutral current computed by the relay Neutral current (IN) LED: PICKUP Message and Event Recorder NTRL TOC PKP 897813.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Command RESET LED: ALARM AND S LATCH R OR SETPOINT AND NTRL IOC FUNCTION 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL OR Disabled = 0 Latched Alarm Alarm LED: TRIP AND Trip SETPOINTS (configurable only if “TRIP” function selected) RLY 1 TRIP W1 BKR RLY 2 TRIP W2 BKR Operate trip output relays upon selection To Breaker Failure Trip SETPOINTS NTRL IOC CT INPUT NTRL IOC PICKUP SETPOINTS NTRL IOC PKP DELAY tPKP IN > PICKUP 0 SETPOINTS BLOCK 1 SETPOINTS: OUTPUT RELAY 3 OUTPUT RELAY 4 OUTPUT RELAY 5 OUTPUT RELAY 6 Operate output relays upon selection Off = 0 AND BLOCK 2 RUN OR Off = 0 BLOCK 3 Figure 31: Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent Protection logic diagram Off = 0 Message and Event Recorder Neutral IOC PKP CT(W2).

multiplied by the selected TD multiplier.5s. if Latched Alarm is selected as a negative sequence TOC function.05 to 20. the NEG SEQ TOC element will use CT ratings associated with transformer winding 1. the “ALARM” LED will flash during the TOC condition. Trip Default: Disabled The selection of the Latched Alarm. and will self-reset when this operating condition clears. NEG SEQ TOC1(2) PKP Range: 0. with the negative sequence TOC function selected as Alarm. The “ALARM” LED will not turn on if the negative sequence TOC function is set to Trip.S3 PROTECTION CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Negative sequence timed overcurrent protection The SR3 relay has two Negative Sequence Overcurrent elements per setpoint group. a pickup of 0. and will stay “ON” after the condition clears. sequence current 6–104 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . where it is calculated as .5 xCT with NEG SEQ CT INPUT = CT(W1) will be equivalent to a pickup of 0. The output relay #1 “Trip” will not operate if the Latched Alarm or Alarm setting is selected.00 x CT in steps of 0. Alarm. PHASE CT INPUTS Range: CT(W1). before the time for operation is reached.1 = 0. If CT(W1) is selected. or Trip. When Definite Time is selected. The element drops from pickup without operation if the measured current drops below 97-99% of the pickup value. The output relay #1 “Trip” will operate if the function Trip is selected. and the negative sequence current computed by the relay. The negative sequence overcurrent elements are uniquely suited to detect phase-phase faults and are not sensitive to balanced loads. The negative sequence overcurrent protection responds to negative sequence |I2|current. Any or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate with the negative sequence TOC function selected as Latched Alarm. or Trip setting enables the Negative Sequence TOC function. For example if CT(W1) = 100:5. the operating time for TOC set to Definite Time and a TDM set to 5 will result in 5*0. The Negative Sequence TOC1(2) Trip (Alarm) Pickup flag is asserted when the negative sequence current is above the PKP value. The same pickup setting with NEG SEQ CT INPUT selected as CT(W2) will lead to a pickup threshold of 250 Amps neg. Until a reset command is initiated. For this reason.5x100 = 50Amps negative sequence current. and the CT(W2)=500:5. While negative sequence elements do not respond to a balanced load.1s. the time for Negative Sequence TOC operation is defined only by the TDM setting. the relay will use the CT ratings associated with transformer winding 2. select an element pickup setting above the maximum expected I2 current due to load unbalance. they do detect the negative sequence current present in an unbalanced load. Alarm. Alarm. CT(W2) Default: CT(W1) The Negative Sequence TOC menu provides selection for either CT(W1) input currents or CT(W2) currents.00 x CT This setting defines the negative sequence TOC pickup level associated with the ratings of the CTs selected under NEG SEQ CT INPUT. sequence TOC operating condition. The selection of Definite Time has a base time delay of 0. is above the NEG SEQ TOC PKP setting for a time greater than the selected time under NEG SEQ TOC DELAY. If the CT(W2) setting is selected. For example. Latched Alarm. The Negative Sequence TOC1(2) Trip (Alarm) operate flag is asserted if the element stays picked-up for the time defined by the selected inverse curve and the magnitude of the current. PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > SETPOINT GROUP 1(2) > NEG SEQ TOC1(2) NEG SEQ TOC1(2) FUNC Range: Disabled. The “ALARM” LED will flash under the neg.01 x CT Default: 1.

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

S3 PROTECTION

NEG SEQ TOC1(2) CURVE Range: - ANSI Extremely/Very/Moderately/Normally Inverse- Definite Time- IEC Curve A/B/ C and Short Inverse- IAC Extremely/Very/Inverse/Short Default: Ext Inverse This setting defines the shape of the selected overcurrent inverse curve. NEG SEQ TOC1(2) TDM Range: 0.05 to 20.00 in steps of 0.01 Default: 1.00 This setting provides a selection for Time Dial Multiplier, which modifies the time response of the selected curve. For example if an ANSI Extremely Inverse curve is selected with TDM = 2, and the fault current was 5 times bigger than the PKP level, the operation of the element will not occur before the elapse of 2.59 seconds from pickup. NEG SEQ TOC1(2) RESET Range: Instantaneous, Linear Default: Instantaneous The reset of the negative sequence timed overcurrent can be selected as either “Instantaneous” or “Linear”. If Instantaneous reset is selected, the Negative Sequence TOC element will reset instantaneously providing that the current drops below 97-98% of the Neg. Seq. TOC PKP level, before the time for operation is reached. When Linear reset is selected, the time to reset is calculated based on the following linear equation:
Eq. 19

where: TRESET - reset time in seconds; E - energy capacity reached (per unit); M - curve multiplier; CR - characteristic constant (5 for ANSI, IAC, Definite Time, User Curve. The 100% “energy capacity” for the TOC element is defined by the selection of PKP, TDM and points from the inverse curve. A memory variable based on actual values currents is monitored for accumulation of energy capacity, where if it reaches a level of 100% of the set energy capacity level, the element operates, and if it goes below 97-98% of this level, the element will tend to reset. The accumulated energy capacity is used as an input for computation of the reset time, when the “Linear” reset is selected as a setting. RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR and RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR Range: Do not operate, Operate Default: Do not operate The menu for the two trip output relays - RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR and RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR - is available only if the Trip setting is selected as a function for the Negative Sequence TOC element. One, or both, trip output relays can be selected to operate under the Negative Sequence TOC operating condition.
NOTE:

NOTE

The "RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR" and "RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR" setpoints will be displayed on the OC menu regardless of the selected OC function. These output relays will not operate if either Alarm or Latched Alarm is selected as an OC function, regardless of the Operate/ Do Not Operate value selected. The output relays are operational only if the OC function is selected as Trip. OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6 Range: Do not operate, Operate Default: Do not operate Any or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon the negative sequence TOC condition. Relay outputs operation is available no matter whether the Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip function is selected.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

6–105

S3 PROTECTION

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

BLOCK 1/2/3 Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic Element 1 to 16 Default: Off Three blocking inputs are provided in the negative sequence TOC menu. Any one of the assigned blocking inputs can block the function. The selections for each block include Contact input, Virtual Input, Remote Input, or Logic Element.

6–106

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

Command RESET

LED: ALARM
AND
S
LATCH

R

OR

SETPOINT

AND

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
OR

NEG SEQ TOC FUNCTN:

Disabled = 0

Latched Alarm

Alarm

LED: TRIP
AND

Trip

SETPOINTS (configurable only if “TRIP” function selected) RLY1 TRIP W1 BKR RLY2 TRIP W2 BKR Operate trip output relays upon selection

SETPOINTS NEG SEQ TOC PICKUP NEG SEQ TOC CURVE NEG SEQ TOC TDM NEG SEQ TOC RESET SETPOINTS OUTPUT RELAY 3 OUTPUT RELAY 4 OUTPUT RELAY 5 OUTPUT RELAY 6

To Breaker Failure Trip

SETPOINTS

BLOCK 1:

Off = 0

AND
RUN I_2 > PICKUP

BLOCK 2:

Figure 32: Negative Sequence Timed Overcurrent logic diagram

OR

Off = 0

I_2 x t =
Adjust PKP

BLOCK 3:

Operate output relays upon selection

Off = 0

Message and Event Recorder LED: PICKUP Message and Event Recorder
NEG SEQ TOC PKP NEG SEQ TOC OP

Calculated Negative Sequence Current

I_2

897807.cdr

S3 PROTECTION

6–107

S4 CONTROLS

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

S4 Controls
Figure 33: Controls menu
S4 CONTROLS CHANGE SETP GROUP VIRTUAL INPUTS LOGIC ELEMENTS ▼ W1 BREAKER FAIL W2 BREAKER FAIL RESET S4 VIRTUAL INPUTS VIRTUAL INPUT 1 ▼ VIRTUAL INPUT 2 ... VIRTUAL INPUT 32 S4 LOGIC ELEMENTS LOGIC ELEMENT 1 LOGIC ELEMENT 2 LOGIC ELEMENT 3 ▼ LOGIC ELEMENT 4 ... LOGIC ELEMENT 16[8] S4 W1 BREAKER FAIL BF FUNCTION ▼ BF CURRENT BF EXT INITIATE BF TIME DELAY 1 BF TIME DELAY 2
897767A1. cdr

S4 CHANGE SETP GROUP SET GROUP 2 ACTIVE ▼ BLK GROUP CHANGE

S4 LOGIC ELEMENT 1 LOGIC E1 NAME ▼ LOGIC E1 FUNCTION LOGIC E1 ASSERTED TRIGGER SOURCE 1 TRIGGER SOURCE 2 TRIGGER SOURCE 3 TRIGGER LOGIC PICKUP TIME DELAY DROPOUT TIME DELAY RLY 1 TRIP W1 BKR RLY 2 TRIP W2 BKR OUTPUT RELAY 3 ... OUTPUT RELAY 6 BLOCK 1 BLOCK 2 BLOCK 3 BLOCK LOGIC

OUTPUT RELAY 3 ... OUTPUT RELAY 6

Change setpoint group
The 345 relay has two identical setpoint groups- Group 1 and Group 2 for all protection elements. Switching between these two groups is available automatically by assigning an input (contact, virtual, remote, logic element), or via communications. Group 1 is the default setpoint group. The relay can automatically switch from Group 1 protections to Group 2 protections, and vice versa, by setting up the switching conditions under “Change Setpoint Group”. Under some application conditions, such as an overcurrent, or voltage element pick up, it may not be desirable to change setpoint groups. A setpoint change can also be prevented if the breaker is open, so that a fault detected before a reclosure will not cause a group change while the breaker is open. In such cases, the user can set a condition under “BLK GROUP CHANGE”, where if asserted, the active setpoint group will stay active, even if the input configured to switch to the other setpoint group is asserted. For example if the active group was Group 1 at the time of a trip, the breaker opens, and the input configured under “BLK GROUP CHANGE” is asserted, the relay

6–108

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS

S4 CONTROLS

will maintain Setpoint Group 1, even if the input “SET GROUP 2 ACTIVE” is asserted. Vice versa, if the “BLK GROUP CHANGE” input is asserted; the relay will not switch from Group 2 to Group 1, even if the input under “SET GROUP 2 ACTIVE” is de-asserted. The relay will default to Setpoint Group 1, if both the input “SET GROUP 2 ACTIVE” and the blocking input “BLK GROUP CHANGE” are de-asserted. PATH: CONTROLS > CHANGE SPNT GROUP SET GROUP 2 ACTIVE Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic Elements 1 to 16 Default: Off This setting selects an input used to change from Setpoint Group 1 to Setpoint Group 2, when asserted. If no group change supervision is selected, Setpoint group 2 will stay active as long as the “SET GROUP 2 ACTIVE” input is asserted, and will revert to Group 1, when this input is de-asserted. BLOCK GROUP CHANGE Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic Elements 1 to 16 Default: Off This setting defines an input that can be used to block changing setpoint groups. When the assigned input is asserted, changing from one setpoint group to the other one is blocked.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL

6–109

one can assign it as a trigger source to a Logic Element with a dropout timer set to the desired pulse time. upon entering “On” command. Refer to the logic diagram in the S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > VIRTUAL INPUTS chapter for more details. 6–110 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . PATH: SETPOINTS > S4 CONTROLS > VIRTUAL INPUTS. If Self-Reset type was selected.S4 CONTROLS CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Figure 34: Switching setpoint groups . For this purpose. To prolong the time of the virtual input pulse. VIRTUAL INPUT 1 Range: Off. On Default: Off The state of each virtual input can be controlled under SETPOINTS > S4 CONTROL > VIRTUAL INPUTS menu.Logic diagram SETPOINT SET GROUP 2 ACTIVE Off LED: Setpoint Group 2 AND OR AND Use Setpoint Group 2 SETPOINT BLK GROUP CHANGE Off AND ACTUAL VALUES Group 1 Active LED: Setpoint Group 1 Default to Setpoint Group 1 OR AND 897791. If “Latched” type is selected. each of the virtual inputs selected for control need be “Enabled” under SETPOINTS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > VIRTUAL INPUTS. and its type “SelfReset” or “Latched” specified. entering “On” command will lead to a pulse of one protection pass. or by using communication protocols. the state of the virtual input will be latched.cdr Virtual inputs There are 32 virtual inputs that can be individually programmed to respond to input commands entered via the relay keypad.

The “ALARM” LED will turn on upon Logic Element operation if the Logic Element function selected is either Alarm. Latched Alarm. the Logic Element can be set to one of four functions: Control. In addition. and the Logic element operates. The “TRIP” LED will turn on upon Logic Element operation if the Logic Element function is selected as Trip. The Trip output relay will be triggered when Trip is selected as a function. or from the output operand of a protection. or Trip. or control element. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–111 . Output relay #1 (Trip) will not be triggered during Logic Element operation if Alarm. or Control is selected. please refer to Chapter 3 . virtual. Referring to the Logic Element logic diagram below. When Trip is selected as a function. or remote input. unless a blocking input is present. will change the state of the Logic Element. or “OFF” state of the programmed element by selecting ASSERTED: “On” or “Off”. Trip Default: Disabled This setting defines the use of the Logic Element. PATH: SETPOINTS > S4 CONTROLS > S4 LOGIC ELEMENTS LE1(16) FUNCTION Range: Disabled. Control. Alarm. the user can define whether to use the “ON”. Latched Alarm. Latched Alarm. the Logic Element will trigger Output Relay # 1 (Trip) upon operation.Working with the Keypad. The following path is available using the keypad. Pickup and dropout timers are available for delaying Logic Element operation and dropout respectively. The option to trigger auxiliary output relays is provided for any of the selected Logic Element functions. and up to three blocking inputs in an “OR” gate for defining the block signal. The logic provides for assigning up to three triggering inputs in an “OR” gate for Logic Element operation. Changing the state of any of the assigned inputs used as trigger sources. or Latched Alarm. Alarm. For instructions on how to use the keypad.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S4 CONTROLS Figure 35: Virtual inputs scheme logic SETPOINT V INPUT FUNCTION Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1 AND S “Virtual Input 1 to ON = 1" From Control menu LATCH “Virtual Input 1 to OFF = 0" AND ACTUAL VALUES V INPUT 1 NAME: (Operand) R OR V Input 1 Status SETPOINT AND V INPUT 1 TYPE Latched Self-Reset 897774.cdr Logic elements The 345 relay has 16 Logic Elements available to build simple logic using the state of any programmed contact. The “PICKUP” LED will turn on upon a Logic Element pickup condition except when the Logic Element function is selected as Control.

When set to “OR” any of the inputs will trigger the Logic Element. Range: 0 to 60000 ms in steps of 1 ms Default: 0 ms This setting specifies the pickup time delay before Logic Element operation. or an output flag from a protection. 6–112 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . This input can be a contact input. The asserted “On” selection provides an output “high” when the LE is "On". then the LE output will be “high”. Alarm. Range: Off. 3 Range: Off. This input can be a contact input. Any input from the list of inputs Default: Off Each of the three trigger sources is configurable by allowing the assigning of an input selected from a list of inputs. When set to “OR” any of the inputs will block the Logic Element. or Trip function is selected. when the LE is “Off”. Latched Alarm. as well as an input from any of the other seven logic inputs. When set to “AND” all three sources must be asserted before the Logic Element is blocked. When set to “AND” all three sources must be asserted before the Logic Element is triggered. AND Default: OR This setting defines block source operation as either “OR” or “AND”. AND Default: OR This setting defines trigger source operation as either “OR” or “AND”. a remote input. a virtual input. or control element. a remote input. TRIGGER SOURCE 1. The selection of auxiliary relay outputs is available no matter whether Control. Range: OR. or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon Logic Element operation. Off Default: Off This setting defines the Logic Element state “On” or “Off” to be used as an output. Range: Do not operate. or control element. Operate Default: Do not operate Any. Range: 0 to 60000 ms in steps of 1 ms Default: 0 ms This setting specifies the time delay from a reset timer that starts upon expiry of the pickup time delay and prolongs the operation of the Logic Element until this time expires. If asserted “Off” is selected. a virtual input. Range: OR. 2. or an output flag from a protection. Any input from the list of inputs Default: Off Each of the three blocks is configurable by allowing the assigning of an input selected from a list of inputs.S4 CONTROLS CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Range: On.

Command RESET CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS LED: ALARM S LATCH AND R OR AND SETPOINT LOGIC EL FUNCTION Disabled = 0 Latched Alarm Alarm LED: TRIP OR Trip Control AND Operate Output Relay1 (TRIP) 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL SETPOINTS OUTPUT RELAY 3 OUTPUT RELAY 4 OUTPUT RELAY 5 SETPOINT SETPOINT LE1 ASSERTED STATE On Off PKP TIME DELAY RST TIME DELAY Message tPKP tRST Logic Elem 1 DPO Logic Elem 1 OP Event Recorder Transient Recorder OUTPUT RELAY 6 Operate output relays upon selection SETPOINT TRIGGER LOGIC OR AND SETPOINT Figure 36: Logic Element logic diagram TRIGGER SOURCE 1 Off TRIGGER SOURCE 2 Off TRIGGER SOURCE 3 Off AND SETPOINT BLOCK LOGIC OR AND SETPOINT LED: PICKUP BLOCK 1 Logic Elem 1 PKP Off BLOCK 2 Off BLOCK 3 897816A1.cdr S4 CONTROLS 6–113 Off .

from the 345 Communications Guide. shows the list of available Logic Inputs.S4 CONTROLS CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS The following table. Code FC134C 0 0x0040 0x0041 0x0042 0x0043 0x0044 0x0045 0x0046 0x0047 0x0048 0x0049 0x0060 0x0061 0x0062 0x0063 0x0064 0x0065 0x0066 0x0067 0x0068 0x0069 0x0080 0x0081 0x0082 0x0083 0x0084 0x0085 0x0086 0x0087 0x0088 0x0089 0x008A 0x008B 0x008C 0x008D 0x008E 0x008F 0x0090 0x0091 0x0092 0x0093 0x0094 0x0095 Type unsigned 16 bits Definition Logic Element Trigger Off Contact IN 1 On Contact IN 2 On Contact IN 3 On Contact IN 4 On Contact IN 5 On Contact IN 6 On Contact IN 7 On Contact IN 8 On Contact IN 9 On Contact IN 10 On Contact IN 1 Off Contact IN 2 Off Contact IN 3 Off Contact IN 4 Off Contact IN 5 Off Contact IN 6 Off Contact IN 7 Off Contact IN 8 Off Contact IN 9 Off Contact IN 10 Off Virtual IN 1 On Virtual IN 2 On Virtual IN 3 On Virtual IN 4 On Virtual IN 5 On Virtual IN 6 On Virtual IN 7 On Virtual IN 8 On Virtual IN 9 On Virtual IN 10 On Virtual IN 11 On Virtual IN 12 On Virtual IN 13 On Virtual IN 14 On Virtual IN 15 On Virtual IN 16 On Virtual IN 17 On Virtual IN 18 On Virtual IN 19 On Virtual IN 20 On Virtual IN 21 On Virtual IN 22 On 6–114 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S4 CONTROLS Code 0x0096 0x0097 0x0098 0x0099 0x009A 0x009B 0x009C 0x009D 0x009E 0x009F 0x00A0 0x00A1 0x00A2 0x00A3 0x00A4 0x00A5 0x00A6 0x00A7 0x00A8 0x00A9 0x00AA 0x00AB 0x00AC 0x00AD 0x00AE 0x00AF 0x00B0 0x00B1 0x00B2 0x00B3 0x00B4 0x00B5 0x00B6 0x00B7 0x00B8 0x00B9 0x00BA 0x00BB 0x00BC 0x00BD 0x00BE 0x00BF 0x01C0 0x01C1 0x01C2 0x01C3 0x01C4 Type Definition Virtual IN 23 On Virtual IN 24 On Virtual IN 25 On Virtual IN 26 On Virtual IN 27 On Virtual IN 28 On Virtual IN 29 On Virtual IN 30 On Virtual IN 31 On Virtual IN 32 On Virtual IN 1 Off Virtual IN 2 Off Virtual IN 3 Off Virtual IN 4 Off Virtual IN 5 Off Virtual IN 6 Off Virtual IN 7 Off Virtual IN 8 Off Virtual IN 9 Off Virtual IN 10 Off Virtual IN 11 Off Virtual IN 12 Off Virtual IN 13 Off Virtual IN 14 Off Virtual IN 15 Off Virtual IN 16 Off Virtual IN 17 Off Virtual IN 18 Off Virtual IN 19 Off Virtual IN 20 Off Virtual IN 21 Off Virtual IN 22 Off Virtual IN 23 Off Virtual IN 24 Off Virtual IN 25 Off Virtual IN 26 Off Virtual IN 27 Off Virtual IN 28 Off Virtual IN 29 Off Virtual IN 30 Off Virtual IN 31 Off Virtual IN 32 Off Remote IN 1 On Remote IN 2 On Remote IN 3 On Remote IN 4 On Remote IN 5 On 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–115 .

S4 CONTROLS CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Code 0x01C5 0x01C6 0x01C7 0x01C8 0x01C9 0x01CA 0x01CB 0x01CC 0x01CD 0x01CE 0x01CF 0x01D0 0x01D1 0x01D2 0x01D3 0x01D4 0x01D5 0x01D6 0x01D7 0x01D8 0x01D9 0x01DA 0x01DB 0x01DC 0x01DD 0x01DE 0x01DF 0x01E0 0x01E1 0x01E2 0x01E3 0x01E4 0x01E5 0x01E6 0x01E7 0x01E8 0x01E9 0x01EA 0x01EB 0x01EC 0x01ED 0x01EE 0x01EF 0x01F0 0x01F1 0x01F2 0x01F3 Type Definition Remote IN 6 On Remote IN 7 On Remote IN 8 On Remote IN 9 On Remote IN 10 On Remote IN 11 On Remote IN 12 On Remote IN 13 On Remote IN 14 On Remote IN 15 On Remote IN 16 On Remote IN 17 On Remote IN 18 On Remote IN 19 On Remote IN 20 On Remote IN 21 On Remote IN 22 On Remote IN 23 On Remote IN 24 On Remote IN 25 On Remote IN 26 On Remote IN 27 On Remote IN 28 On Remote IN 29 On Remote IN 30 On Remote IN 31 On Remote IN 32 On Remote IN 1 Off Remote IN 2 Off Remote IN 3 Off Remote IN 4 Off Remote IN 5 Off Remote IN 6 Off Remote IN 7 Off Remote IN 8 Off Remote IN 9 Off Remote IN 10 Off Remote IN 11 Off Remote IN 12 Off Remote IN 13 Off Remote IN 14 Off Remote IN 15 Off Remote IN 16 Off Remote IN 17 Off Remote IN 18 Off Remote IN 19 Off Remote IN 20 Off 6–116 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S4 CONTROLS Code 0x01F4 0x01F5 0x01F6 0x01F7 0x01F8 0x01F9 0x01FA 0x01FB 0x01FC 0x01FD 0x01FE 0x01FF 0x8002 0x8042 0x8044 0x84C1 0x84C2 0x84C4 0x8501 0x8502 0x8504 0x8541 0x8542 0x8544 0x8581 0x8582 0x8584 0x85C1 0x85C2 0x85C4 0x8601 0x8602 0x8604 0x8641 0x8642 0x8644 0x8681 0x8682 0x8684 0x9001 0x9002 0x9004 0x9041 0x9042 0x9044 0x9081 0x9082 Type Definition Remote IN 21 Off Remote IN 22 Off Remote IN 23 Off Remote IN 24 Off Remote IN 25 Off Remote IN 26 Off Remote IN 27 Off Remote IN 28 Off Remote IN 29 Off Remote IN 30 Off Remote IN 31 Off Remote IN 32 Off Any Trip Therm O/L Trip OP Therm O/L Trip DPO LE 1 Trip PKP LE 1 Trip OP LE 1 Trip DPO LE 2 Trip PKP LE 2 Trip OP LE 2 Trip DPO LE 3 Trip PKP LE 3 Trip OP LE 3 Trip DPO LE 4 Trip PKP LE 4 Trip OP LE 4 Trip DPO LE 5 Trip PKP LE 5 Trip OP LE 5 Trip DPO LE 6 Trip PKP LE 6 Trip OP LE 6 Trip DPO LE 7 Trip PKP LE 7 Trip OP LE 7 Trip DPO LE 8 Trip PKP LE 8 Trip OP LE 8 Trip DPO Ph IOC1 Trip PKP Ph IOC1 Trip OP Ph IOC1 Trip DPO Ntrl IOC1 Trip PKP Ntrl IOC1 Trip OP Ntrl IOC1 Trip DPO Gnd IOC1 Trip PKP Gnd IOC1 Trip OP 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–117 .

S4 CONTROLS CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Code 0x9084 0x90C1 0x90C2 0x90C4 0x9101 0x9102 0x9104 0x9141 0x9142 0x9144 0x9181 0x9182 0x9184 0x91C1 0x91C2 0x91C4 0x9201 0x9202 0x9204 0x9241 0x9242 0x9244 0x9281 0x9282 0x9284 0x92C1 0x92C2 0x92C4 0x9301 0x9302 0x9304 0x9641 0x9642 0x9644 0x9681 0x9682 0x9684 0x9701 0x9702 0x9704 0x9741 0x9742 0x9744 0x9781 0x9782 0x9784 0x97C1 Type Definition Gnd IOC1 Trip DPO Ph TOC1 Trip PKP Ph TOC1 Trip OP Ph TOC1 Trip DPO Ntrl TOC1 Trip PKP Ntrl TOC1 Trip OP Ntrl TOC1 Trip DPO Gnd TOC1 Trip PKP Gnd TOC1 Trip OP Gnd TOC1 Trip DPO Ph IOC2 Trip PKP Ph IOC2 Trip OP Ph IOC2 Trip DPO Ntrl IOC2 Trip PKP Ntrl IOC2 Trip OP Ntrl IOC2 Trip DPO Gnd IOC2 Trip PKP Gnd IOC2 Trip OP Gnd IOC2 Trip DPO Ph TOC2 Trip PKP Ph TOC2 Trip OP Ph TOC2 Trip DPO Ntrl TOC2 Trip PKP Ntrl TOC2 Trip OP Ntrl TOC2 Trip DPO Gnd TOC2 Trip PKP Gnd TOC2 Trip OP Gnd TOC2 Trip DPO SGnd TOC1 Trip PKP SGnd TOC1 Trip OP SGnd TOC1 Trip DPO SGnd IOC1 Trip PKP SGnd IOC1 Trip OP SGnd IOC1 Trip DPO SGnd IOC2 Trip PKP SGnd IOC2 Trip OP SGnd IOC2 Trip DPO Pcnt Diff Trip PKP Pcnt Diff Trip OP Pcnt Diff Trip DPO RGF1 Trip PKP RGF1 Trip OP RGF1 Trip DPO RGF2 Trip PKP RGF2 Trip OP RGF2 Trip DPO Inst Diff Trip PKP 6–118 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S4 CONTROLS Code 0x97C2 0x97C4 0x9801 0x9802 0x9804 0x9841 0x9842 0x9844 0x99C1 0x99C2 0x99C4 0x9C01 0x9C02 0x9C04 0x9C41 0x9C42 0x9C44 0x9C81 0x9C82 0x9C84 0x9CC1 0x9CC2 0x9CC4 0x9D01 0x9D02 0x9D04 0x9D41 0x9D42 0x9D44 0x9D81 0x9D82 0x9D84 0x9DC1 0x9DC2 0x9DC4 0xA002 0xA042 0xA044 0xA4C1 0xA4C2 0xA4C4 0xA501 0xA502 0xA504 0xA541 0xA542 0xA544 Type Definition Inst Diff Trip OP Inst Diff Trip DPO NSeq TOC1 Trip PKP NSeq TOC1 Trip OP NSeq TOC1 Trip DPO NSeq TOC2 Trip PKP NSeq TOC2 Trip OP NSeq TOC2 Trip DPO SGnd TOC2 Trip PKP SGnd TOC2 Trip OP SGnd TOC2 Trip DPO LE 9 Trip PKP LE 9 Trip OP LE 9 Trip DPO LE 10 Trip PKP LE 10 Trip OP LE 10 Trip DPO LE 11 Trip PKP LE 11 Trip OP LE 11 Trip DPO LE 12 Trip PKP LE 12 Trip OP LE 12 Trip DPO LE 13 Trip PKP LE 13 Trip OP LE 13 Trip DPO LE 14 Trip PKP LE 14 Trip OP LE 14 Trip DPO LE 15 Trip PKP LE 15 Trip OP LE 15 Trip DPO LE 16 Trip PKP LE 16 Trip OP LE 16 Trip DPO Any Alarm Therm Lvl Alrm OP Therm Lvl Alrm DPO LE 1 Alarm PKP LE 1 Alarm OP LE 1 Alarm DPO LE 2 Alarm PKP LE 2 Alarm OP LE 2 Alarm DPO LE 3 Alarm PKP LE 3 Alarm OP LE 3 Alarm DPO 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–119 .

S4 CONTROLS CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Code 0xA581 0xA582 0xA584 0xA5C1 0xA5C2 0xA5C4 0xA601 0xA602 0xA604 0xA641 0xA642 0xA644 0xA681 0xA682 0xA684 0xABC1 0xABC2 0xABC4 0xAC01 0xAC02 0xAC04 0xAC41 0xAC42 0xAD01 0xAD02 0xAD04 0xAD41 0xAD42 0xAD44 0xAD81 0xAD82 0xAD84 0xADC2 0xAEC2 0xAF41 0xAF42 0xAF44 0xB001 0xB002 0xB004 0xB041 0xB042 0xB044 0xB081 0xB082 0xB084 0xB0C1 Type Definition LE 4 Alarm PKP LE 4 Alarm OP LE 4 Alarm DPO LE 5 Alarm PKP LE 5 Alarm OP LE 5 Alarm DPO LE 6 Alarm PKP LE 6 Alarm OP LE 6 Alarm DPO LE 7 Alarm PKP LE 7 Alarm OP LE 7 Alarm DPO LE 8 Alarm PKP LE 8 Alarm OP LE 8 Alarm DPO HI Amb Temp PKP HI Amb Temp OP HI Amb Temp DPO LO Amb Temp PKP LO Amb Temp OP LO Amb Temp DPO Self Test Alrm PKP Self Test Alarm OP R1 CoilMonAlrm PKP R1 CoilMonAlrm OP R1 CoilMonAlrm DPO R2 CoilMonAlrm PKP R2 CoilMonAlrm OP R2 CoilMonAlrm DPO BKR1 Fail Alrm PKP BKR1 Fail Alrm OP BKR1 Fail Alrm DPO BKR Stat Fail OP BKR2 Stat Fail OP BKR2 Fail Alrm PKP BKR2 Fail Alrm OP BKR2 Fail Alrm DPO Ph IOC1 Alarm PKP Ph IOC1 Alarm OP Ph IOC1 Alarm DPO Ntrl IOC1 Alrm PKP Ntrl IOC1 Alrm OP Ntrl IOC1 Alrm DPO Gnd IOC1 Alarm PKP Gnd IOC1 Alarm OP Gnd IOC1 Alarm DPO Ph TOC1 Alarm PKP 6–120 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S4 CONTROLS Code 0xB0C2 0xB0C4 0xB101 0xB102 0xB104 0xB141 0xB142 0xB144 0xB181 0xB182 0xB184 0xB1C1 0xB1C2 0xB1C4 0xB201 0xB202 0xB204 0xB241 0xB242 0xB244 0xB281 0xB282 0xB284 0xB2C1 0xB2C2 0xB2C4 0xB301 0xB302 0xB304 0xB641 0xB642 0xB644 0xB681 0xB682 0xB684 0xB701 0xB702 0xB704 0xB741 0xB742 0xB744 0xB781 0xB782 0xB784 0xB7C1 0xB7C2 0xB7C4 Type Definition Ph TOC1 Alarm OP Ph TOC1 Alarm DPO Ntrl TOC1 Alrm PKP Ntrl TOC1 Alrm OP Ntrl TOC1 Alrm DPO Gnd TOC1 Alarm PKP Gnd TOC1 Alarm OP Gnd TOC1 Alarm DPO Ph IOC2 Alarm PKP Ph IOC2 Alarm OP Ph IOC2 Alarm DPO Ntrl IOC2 Alrm PKP Ntrl IOC2 Alrm OP Ntrl IOC2 Alrm DPO Gnd IOC2 Alarm PKP Gnd IOC2 Alarm OP Gnd IOC2 Alarm DPO Ph TOC2 Alarm PKP Ph TOC2 Alarm OP Ph TOC2 Alarm DPO Ntrl TOC2 Alrm PKP Ntrl TOC2 Alrm OP Ntrl TOC2 Alrm DPO Gnd TOC2 Alarm PKP Gnd TOC2 Alarm OP Gnd TOC2 Alarm DPO SGnd TOC1 Alrm PKP SGnd TOC1 Alrm OP SGnd TOC1 Alrm DPO SGnd IOC1 Alrm PKP SGnd IOC1 Alrm OP SGnd IOC1 Alrm DPO SGnd IOC2 Alrm PKP SGnd IOC2 Alrm OP SGnd IOC2 Alrm DPO Pcnt Diff Alrm PKP Pcnt Diff Alrm OP Pcnt Diff Alrm DPO RGF1 Alarm PKP RGF1 Alarm OP RGF1 Alarm DPO RGF2 Alarm PKP RGF2 Alarm OP RGF2 Alarm DPO Inst Diff Alrm PKP Inst Diff Alrm OP Inst Diff Alrm DPO 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–121 .

S4 CONTROLS CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Code 0xB801 0xB802 0xB804 0xB841 0xB842 0xB844 0xB9C1 0xB9C2 0xB9C4 0xBC01 0xBC02 0xBC04 0xBC41 0xBC42 0xBC44 0xBC81 0xBC82 0xBC84 0xBCC1 0xBCC2 0xBCC4 0xBD01 0xBD02 0xBD04 0xBD41 0xBD42 0xBD44 0xBD81 0xBD82 0xBD84 0xBDC1 0xBDC2 0xBDC4 0xC042 0xC082 0xC0C2 0xC102 0xC142 0xC182 0xC1C2 0xC202 0xC2C2 0xC4C1 0xC4C2 0xC4C4 0xC501 0xC502 Type Definition NSeq TOC1 Alrm PKP NSeq TOC1 Alrm OP NSeq TOC1 Alrm DPO NSeq TOC2 Alrm PKP NSeq TOC2 Alrm OP NSeq TOC2 Alrm DPO SGnd TOC2 Alrm PKP SGnd TOC2 Alrm OP SGnd TOC2 Alrm DPO LE 9 Alarm PKP LE 9 Alarm OP LE 9 Alarm DPO LE 10 Alarm PKP LE 10 Alarm OP LE 10 Alarm DPO LE 11 Alarm PKP LE 11 Alarm OP LE 11 Alarm DPO LE 12 Alarm PKP LE 12 Alarm OP LE 12 Alarm DPO LE 13 Alarm PKP LE 13 Alarm OP LE 13 Alarm DPO LE 14 Alarm PKP LE 14 Alarm OP LE 14 Alarm DPO LE 15 Alarm PKP LE 15 Alarm OP LE 15 Alarm DPO LE 16 Alarm PKP LE 16 Alarm OP LE 16 Alarm DPO Output Relay 3 On Output Relay 4 On Output Relay 5 On Output Relay 6 On Self-Test Rly 7 On Output Relay 1 On Output Relay 2 On BKR Connected BKR2 Connected LE 1 PKP LE 1 OP LE 1 DPO LE 2 PKP LE 2 OP 6–122 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S4 CONTROLS Code 0xC504 0xC541 0xC542 0xC544 0xC581 0xC582 0xC584 0xC5C1 0xC5C2 0xC5C4 0xC601 0xC602 0xC604 0xC641 0xC642 0xC644 0xC681 0xC682 0xC684 0xC882 0xCA02 0xCA42 0xCA82 0xCCC2 0xCD02 0xCD42 0xDA02 0xDA42 0xDA82 0xDA84 0xDAC2 0xDAC4 0xDB02 0xDB04 0xDB42 0xDB44 0xDC01 0xDC02 0xDC04 0xDC41 0xDC42 0xDC44 0xDC81 0xDC82 0xDC84 0xDCC1 0xDCC2 Type Definition LE 2 DPO LE 3 PKP LE 3 OP LE 3 DPO LE 4 PKP LE 4 OP LE 4 DPO LE 5 PKP LE 5 OP LE 5 DPO LE 6 PKP LE 6 OP LE 6 DPO LE 7 PKP LE 7 OP LE 7 DPO LE 8 PKP LE 8 OP LE 8 DPO Setpoint Group2 On 52a Contact OP 52b Contact OP Reset OK BKR Stat Open BKR Stat Clsd Setpoint Group1 On BKR2 52a Cont OP BKR2 52b Cont OP BKR2 Stat Open OP BKR2 Stat Open DPO BKR2 Stat Clsd OP BKR2 Stat Clsd DPO Trip BKR 1 OP Trip BKR 1 DPO Trip BKR 2 OP Trip BKR 2 DPO LE 9 PKP LE 9 OP LE 9 DPO LE 10 PKP LE 10 OP LE 10 DPO LE 11 PKP LE 11 OP LE 11 DPO LE 12 PKP LE 12 OP 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–123 .

S4 CONTROLS CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Code 0xDCC4 0xDD01 0xDD02 0xDD04 0xDD41 0xDD42 0xDD44 0xDD81 0xDD82 0xDD84 0xDDC1 0xDDC2 0xDDC4 0xE002 0xE042 0xE182 0xE1C2 0xE882 0xF002 0xF042 0xF082 0xF0C2 0xF102 0xF142 0xF182 0xF1C2 0xF202 0xF242 0xF282 0xF2C2 0xF302 0xF642 0xF682 0xF702 0xF742 0xF782 0xF7C2 0xF802 0xF842 0xF9C2 0xFB02 0xFB42 0xFB82 0xFBC2 Type Definition LE 12 DPO LE 13 PKP LE 13 OP LE 13 DPO LE 14 PKP LE 14 OP LE 14 DPO LE 15 PKP LE 15 OP LE 15 DPO LE 16 PKP LE 16 OP LE 16 DPO Any Block Therm O/L Blck OP Output Relay 1 BLK Output Relay 2 BLK Group Change Blk Ph IOC1 Block Ntrl IOC1 Block Gnd IOC1 Block Ph TOC1 Block Ntrl TOC1 Block Gnd TOC1 Block Ph IOC2 Block Ntrl IOC2 Block Gnd IOC2 Block Ph TOC2 Block Ntrl TOC2 Block Gnd TOC2 Block SGnd TOC1 Block SGnd IOC1 Block SGnd IOC2 Block Pcnt Diff Block RGF1 Block RGF2 Block Inst Diff Block NSeq TOC1 Blk NSeq TOC2 Blk SGnd TOC2 Block Trip BKR1 Blk Trip BKR2 Blk 2nd Hmnc Diff Blk 5th Hmnc Diff Blk 6–124 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

05 to 20. Range: Off. It is strongly recommended that a margin of 1.01 s Default: 0. The ALARM LED turns OFF upon initiation of a "Reset" command. and at least one of the phase currents is above the BF CURRENT setpoint. and will remain ON when the condition clears.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S4 CONTROLS Winding breaker failure There are two Breaker Failure functions. The Breaker Failure scheme also provides the setup for BF initiate from the external input via Contact Input. the ALARM LED will flash upon detection of the Breaker Failure condition. this function is always associated with the Winding 1 breaker. and will operate the selected output relays.Working with the Keypad. and will turn off upon clearing the condition. When the 345 relay allows the configuration of only one breaker failure function.00 to 1.00 x CT This setting selects the current level to be monitored by the BF logic after the programmed time delays. the W2 BREAKER FAIL logic will be triggered only upon operation of a protection element with the function set to Trip. and will be triggered upon operation of any protection element with a FUNCTION setting set to Trip.00 s in steps of 0. Alarm. CT(W1). Latched Alarm Default: Disabled If set to Alarm. one per winding breaker. Contact Input 1 to 10.5 power cycle time is added to the expected breaker time-to-trip time for the BF DELAY1 and BF DELAY 2 timers. For instructions on how to use the keypad.03 to 1. Virtual Input 1 to 32. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–125 . the ALARM LED will flash during the Breaker Failure condition. and the CT INPUT set to CT(W2).00 x CT in steps of 0. Range: 0. Virtual Input.e. please refer to Chapter 3 . Logic Element 1 to 16 Default: Off This setting selects the external initiate signal to launch the Breaker Failure function. The operation of the filter that reduces the overreaching effect of the assymetrical offset currents will cause the measured current to ramp down to zero after the breaker trips. If any phase current is above the set current level after the BF DELAY timer/timers expire.00 s in steps of 0. The following path is available using the keypad. BF TIMER DELAY 1 has expired. Remote Input. Similarly. If Latched Alarm is selected. a Breaker Failure will be declared. The BF function monitors the phase currents after a trip command from a protection element is initiated. and the CT INPUT associated with Winding 1 CT . Range: 0. or Logic Element.01 s Default: 0. Range: 0.01 x CT Default: 1. and the CT INPUT set to CT(W1). PATH: SETPOINTS > S4 CONTROLS > W1(W2) BREAKER FAIL Range: Disabled.i.1 s This timer starts when breaker trip command is issued from any of the protection elements. Remote Input 1 to 32.00 s This timer does not start before a trip condition is recognized. NOTE: NOTE W1 BREAKER FAIL logic is triggered only upon operation of a protection element with a function set to Trip.

S4 CONTROLS CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Range: Do Not Operate. or Trip function is selected. 6–126 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . Operate Default: Do Not Operate Any or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon Breaker Failure detection. The selection of relay outputs operation is available no matter whether the Latched Alarm. Alarm.

Logic Element S4 CONTROLS 6–127 .CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS Command RESET LED: ALARM AND S LATCH SETPOINT R OR BF FUNCTION 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL AND OR Disabled = 0 Latched Alarm Alarm Message and Event Recorder W1(W2) Breaker Failure Figure 37: Breaker Failure logic diagram SETPOINT BF CURRENT : SETPOINT Ia > PICKUP BF TIME DELAY 2 SETPOINTS OUTPUT RELAY 3 Phase Currents Phase A current (Ia) AND OR Phase B current (Ib) Ib > PICKUP Ic > PICKUP RUN tPKP OUTPUT RELAY 4 OUTPUT RELAY 5 OUTPUT RELAY 6 Phase C current (Ic) Operate output relays upon selection From Protection operation Trip SETPOINT BF TIME DELAY 1 SETPOINT OR BF EXT INITIATE RUN tPKP Off = 0 Range: Contact Input. Virtual Input. Remote Input.

84V. which can be used to provide a variety of functions such as for circuit breaker control.. VIRTUAL INPUT 32 S5 VIRTUAL INPUT 32 VI 32 NAME ▼ 897768A1. and it applies for all ten contact inputs... 166V) is selectable. CONTACT INPUT 10 DEBOUNCE TIME . CONTACT INPUT 10 S5 DEBOUNCE TIME CONTACT INPUT 1 ▼ CONTACT INPUT 2 CONTACT INPUT 3 S5 OUTPUT RELAYS RLY 1 W1 BKRTRIP RLY 2 W2 BKRTRIP RELAY 3 AUXILIARY ▼ RELAY 4 AUXILIARY RELAY 5 AUXILIARY RELAY 6 AUXILIARY S5 RLY 2 W2 BKR TRIP RLY 2 SEAL-IN ▼ BLOCK RLY 2 TRIP S5 RELAY 3 AUXILIARY OUTPUT TYPE S5 RLY 1 W1 BKR TRIP RLY 1 SEAL-IN ▼ BLOCK RLY 1 TRIP S5 VIRTUAL INPUTS VIRTUAL INPUT 1 VIRTUAL INPUT 2 VIRTUAL INPUT 3 ▼ VIRTUAL INPUT 4 ..S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S5 Inputs/Outputs Figure 38: Inputs/Outputs menu S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS CONTACT INPUTS OUTPUT RELAYS VIRTUAL INPUTS S5 CONTACT INPUTS SELECT DC VOLTAGE ▼ CONTACT INPUT 1 CONTACT INPUT 2 . The voltage threshold (17V. blocking of protection elements. 33V.cdr S5 VIRTUAL INPUT 1 VI 1 NAME ▼ VI 1 FUNCTION VI 1 TYPE VI 32 FUNCTION VI 32 TYPE Contact inputs The 345 relay is equipped with ten (10) contact inputs. etc. All contact inputs are wet type contacts (refer to the 345 typical wiring diagram) that require an external DC voltage source. external trips.. 6–128 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL ..

The debounce time is adjustable by the user. momentary contacts must have a minimum dwell time greater than half power frequency cycle. Output relays The 345 relay is equipped with seven electromechanical relays: two special relays designed for Winding 1 Breaker trip and Winding 2 Breaker trip. four general purpose relays (Auxiliary Relays 3 to 6). can be named to reflect the function it represents within the application. The state will be recognized if the input is maintained for a period consisting of the protection pass plus the debounce setting. 166 V Default: 84 V CONTACT INPUT 1 Range: Select alpha-numeric name Default: Bkr1 52a (CI#1) CONTACT INPUT 2 Range: Select alpha-numeric name Default: Bkr1 52b (CI#2) CONTACT INPUT 3 Range: Select alpha-numeric name Default: Bkr2 52a (CI#3) CONTACT INPUT 4 Range: Select alpha-numeric name Default: Bkr2 52b (CI#4) CONTACT INPUT X [5 to 10] Range: Select alpha-numeric name Default: Input X DEBOUNCE TIME ↘ CONTACT INPUT X [1 TO 10] Range: 1 to 64 ms Default: 2 ms Each of the contact inputs 5 to 10. PATH: SETPOINTS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > CONTACT INPUTS SELECT DC VOLTAGE Range: 17 V. The debounce time is used to discriminate between oscillating inputs.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS The contact inputs are either open or closed with a programmable debounce time to prevent false operation from induced voltage. Operation of the two Trip output relays is designed to be controlled by the state of the circuit breaker as monitored by a 52a or 52b contact. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–129 . Contact Input 3 and Contact Input 4 are named by the factory as 52a and 52b respectively and are used for monitoring the Winding2 breaker open/close state when wired to the Winding 2 breaker auxiliary contacts 52a and 52b. and a Critical Failure relay. The special purpose relays have fixed operating characteristics and the general purpose relays can be configured by the user. Because of de-bouncing. 33 V. Contact Input 1 and Contact Input 2 are named by the factory as 52a and 52b respectively and are used for monitoring the Winding1 breaker open/close state when wired to the Winding 1 breaker auxiliary contacts 52a and 52b. Up to 18 alpha-numeric characters are available for names. 84 V.

but the breaker does not change state. Remote Input 1 to 32. Trip Relay remains operational until 52a indicates an open breaker. is programmed to a contact input. BLOCK RLY 1 TRIP Range: Disabled. Virtual Input 1 to 32.01 Default: 0.04 s This setting defines the time to be added to the reset time of the Relay 2 Trip output. 52a nor 52b.W1 breaker "Trip" The following path is available using the keypad. • • • 52a Contact Configured Yes Yes No No Output Relay 1 . please refer to Chapter 3 . then this delay is added to the reset time. thus extending its pulse width. When the selected input is asserted. PATH: SETPOINTS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > OUTPUT RELAYS > RLY 1 W1 BKRTRIP RLY1 SEAL-IN Range: 0.00 to 9. This is useful for those applications where the 52 contacts reporting the breaker state are faster than the 52 contacts that are responsible for interrupting the coil current. Logic Elements 1 to 16 Default: Disabled This setting defines a block to the Trip Output relay.00 to 9. 52b Contact Configured Yes No Yes No Relay Operation Trip Relay remains operational until 52b indicates an open breaker. Trip Relay remains operational until 52b indicates an open breaker. If a delay is programmed for the Trip contact seal-in time. 6–130 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .01 Default: 0.99 s in steps of 0. For instructions on how to use the keypad. Output Relay 2 . the Trip Output relay will be blocked. the output relay will be reset after a default interval of 2 seconds. If the initiating feature resets.S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS • The Trip relays reset after the breaker is detected in a state corresponding to the command.W2 breaker "Trip" PATH: SETPOINTS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > OUTPUT RELAYS > RLY 2 W2 BKRTRIP RLY2 SEAL-IN Range: 0. thus extending its pulse width.04 s This setting defines the time to be added to the reset time of the Relay 1 Trip output. or 100 ms after the feature causing the trip resets. the Trip Relay is de-energized after either the delay programmed in the Breaker Failure feature.Working with the Keypad. Note that the default setting for the seal-in time is 40 ms.99 s in steps of 0. This is useful for those applications where the 52 contacts reporting the breaker state are faster than the 52 contacts that are responsible for interrupting the coil current. Trip Relay operates until either the Breaker Failure delay expires (if the Breaker Failure element is enabled). it will remain operational until the requested change of breaker state is confirmed by a breaker auxiliary contact and the initiating condition has reset. Contact Input 1 to 10. When a relay feature sends a command to one of these special relays. or a default interval of 100 ms after the initiating input resets. If neither of the breaker auxiliary contacts.

345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–131 .CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS BLOCK RLY 2 TRIP Range: Disabled. Remote Input 1 to 32. When the selected input is asserted. Virtual Input 1 to 32. the Close Output relay will be blocked. The block function can be useful for breaker maintenance purposes. Contact Input 1 to 10. Logic Elements 1 to 16 Default: Disabled This setting defines a block to the Close Output relay.

Controls) Local Open (Relay Keypad) Trip request timed reset timer RUN OR Remote Open TRIP To Breaker Failure 100 ms LED: TRIP SETPOINT (BF) BF FUNCTION: Disabled = 0 RESET (Relay Keypad) SETPOINT (BF) BF TIME DELAYS RESET (Communications) OR OR Alarm Latched Alarm OR AND RESET (Input) Breaker Control RUN 897775.6–132 AND S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS SETPOINT (BREAKER) 52b CONTACT Contact input LED: BREAKER OPEN 52b contact (Breaker Open = 1) Breaker Open OR SETPOINT (BREAKER) OR 52a CONTACT AND timer 2 sec SETPOINT Trip Output Seal-In time OR Contact input No feedback change AND AND 52a contact (Breaker Close = 1) tRST SETPOINT BLOCK TRIP RLY Disbaled = 0 At least one contact programmed OR AND (Selected Input. ON = 1) LED: TRIP OR OR Relay ( Ready = 1) OR OR TRIP TRIP Operate Output Relay 1 (TRIP) AND Figure 39: Relay 1 "TRIP" and Relay #2 "TRIP" logic diagram TRIP (Protection.cdr tRST CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

or maintenance features. after the element dropout. Latched Default: Self Reset Figure 40: Auxiliary relays RESET (Relay Keypad) RESET (Communications) OR RESET (Input) Breaker Control AND SETPOINT OR RELAY (3-6) AUXILIARY OUTPUT TYPE Latched Self-Reset Operate Aux Output Relay ( 3 . or by using communication protocols. the output relay will stay energized. PATH: SETPOINTS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > VIRTUAL INPUTS 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL OR 897777. or Latched.cdr 6–133 . If the SelfReset type is selected.6 ) AND AND OR Message & Event Recorder Relay( Ready = 1) AND Assigned aux.Working with the Keypad. For instructions on how to use the keypad. The following path is available using the keypad. please refer to Chapter 3 . outputs: From Protection Feature From Control Feature From Maintenance Feature Virtual inputs There are 32 virtual inputs that can be individually programmed to respond to input commands entered via the relay keypad. PATH: SETPOINTS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > OUTPUT RELAYS > RELAY 3(6) AUXILIARY OUTPUT TYPE Range: Self Reset. Each auxiliary relay can be selected as either Self-Reset. All these relays are available for selection for operation of protection. control.CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS Auxiliary Output Relays 3 to 6 The 345 relay is equipped with four auxiliary output relays numbered from 3 to 6. and will be de-energized upon the reset command. the output relay will be energized as long as the element is in operating mode and will reset when the element drops out. If the Latched type is selected.

Latched Default: Self-reset When the Self-Reset type is selected. NOTE: NOTE Figure 41: Virtual inputs scheme logic SETPOINT V INPUT FUNCTION Disabled = 0 Enabled = 1 AND S “Virtual Input 1 to ON = 1" From Control menu LATCH “Virtual Input 1 to OFF = 0" AND ACTUAL VALUES V INPUT 1 NAME: (Operand) R OR V Input 1 Status SETPOINT AND V INPUT 1 TYPE Latched Self-Reset 897774. All virtual inputs will appear under the S4 CONTROLS > SETPOINTS > S4 VIRTUAL INPUTS menu. will latch the virtual input state. Selecting the Latched type. the virtual input is evaluated as a pulse at a rate of one protection pass. one can assign it as a trigger source to a logic element with a dropout timer set to the desired pulse time. To prolong the time of the virtual input pulse. upon “On” initiation and it will reset. When Self-Reset is selected and the “On” command is executed. when the “On” command is executed.cdr 6–134 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . When the Latched type is selected. the user can assign a command On/Off to the enabled Virtual Input under SETPOINTS > S4 CONTROLS > S4 VIRTUAL INPUTS. the Virtual Input will be evaluated for one protection pass only. on how to trigger a virtual input signal state. VI x TYPE Range: Self-Reset. NOTE Virtual input programming begins with enabling the Virtual Input Function. a Virtual Input type can be selected to be either Self-Reset. Referring to the Virtual Inputs logic diagram below. The "On" state of the Virtual Input will not be retained in the case of cycling of the relay control power supply. NOTE: See also the Virtual Inputs section under S4 CONTROLS. the virtual input will keep the state “On” until reset command “Off” is initiated.S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS VI x NAME Range: Select Alpha-Numeric Name Default: Virtual IN x VI x FUNCTION Range: Disabled/Enabled Default: Disabled The Virtual Input is enabled and ready to be triggered when set to Enabled. or Latched. and selecting the Virtual Input Type Self-Reset or Latched under SETPOINTS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > VIRTUAL INPUTS. Next.

CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS Remote inputs Remote Inputs are available for programming under the EnerVista SR3 Setup software. Refer to the 345 Communications Guide for details. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 6–135 . Refer to the 345 Communications Guide for details. Remote outputs Remote Inputs are available for programming under the EnerVista SR3 Setup software.

S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS 6–136 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

Figure 1: Maintenance main menu 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–1 .Digital Energy 345 Transformer Protection System Chapter 7: Maintenance Maintenance Information about the relay and the breaker can be obtained through the features included in the Maintenance page.

. OUTPUT RELAY 6 M3 W2 BKRTRIP COIL RLY2 COIL FUNCTION ▼ RLY2 COIL DELAY BYPASS BKR STATUS OUTPUT RELAY 3 . OUTPUT RELAY 6 M3 BKR MAINTENANCE W1 BKRTRIP COIL W2 BKRTRIP COIL M4 BKR MONITOR M5 AMBIENT TEMP AMBIENT TEMP ▼ HI ALARM LEVEL LOW ALARM LEVEL HYSTERESIS LEVEL TIME DELAY OUTPUT RELAY 3 OUTPUT RELAY 4 OUTPUT RELAY 5 OUTPUT RELAY 6 W1 BKR TRIP COIL ▼ W2 BKR TRIP COIL M5 RELAY MAINT AMBIENT TEMP M6 FACTORY SERVICE 897761A1..cdr ENTER FACT. PSWD 7–2 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE M1 RELAY INFO M3 BKR MAINTENANCE M4 BKR MONITOR ▼ M5 RELAY MAINT M6 FACTORY SERVICE M1 RELAY INFO RELAY NAME ▼ ORDER CODE MAIN FIRMWARE REV MAIN BUILD DATE MAIN BUILD TIME MAIN BOOT REVISION MAIN BOOT DATE MAIN BOOT TIME COMM FIRMWARE REV COMM BUILD DATE COMM BUILD TIME COMM BOOT REVISION COMM BOOT DATE COMM BOOT TIME SERIAL NUMBER ETHERNET MAC ADR FPGA VERSION M3 W1 BKRTRIP COIL RLY1 COIL FUNCTION ▼ RLY1 COIL DELAY BYPASS BKR STATUS OUTPUT RELAY 3 ...

40 This screen shows the relay communication firmware revision. MAIN BOOT DATE Dec 11 2009 This screen shows the relay boot code date. MAIN BOOT TIME 10:44:54 This screen shows the relay boot code time. MAIN FIRMWARE REV 1. COMM BOOT REVISION 1.30 This screen shows the relay communication boot code revision. COMM FIRMWARE REV 1. COMM BUILD DATE Aug 16 2010 This screen shows the relay communication firmware build date. MAIN BUILD TIME 16:12:32 This screen shows the relay firmware build time.41 This screen shows the relay firmware revision.CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE M1 RELAY INFORMATION M1 Relay information PATH: MAINTENANCE > M1 RELAY INFO RELAY NAME Range: alpha-numeric name of up to 18 characters Default: Transformer Name ORDER CODE 345-EP0G0HEMNN3EDN This screen shows the relay order code. COMM BUILD TIME 16:59:27 This screen shows the relay communication firmware build time. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–3 . MAIN BUILD DATE Aug 16 2010 This screen shows the relay firmware build date.20 This screen shows the relay boot code revision. MAIN BOOT REVISION 1. COMM BOOT DATE Apr 7 2010 This screen shows the relay communication boot code date.

SERIAL NUMBER ML0T09000001 Each 345 relay has a unique Serial Number.F4.08.00 7–4 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . FPGA VERSION 1.E9 Each 345 relay has a unique Mac Address.A0.A0. ETHERNET MAC ADR 00.M1 RELAY INFORMATION CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE COMM BOOT TIME 16:22:41 This screen shows the relay communication boot code time.

the circuit integrity for the Trip coil is effectively normal. As long as the current through the Voltage Monitor is above the threshold of the trickle currents (see Technical Specification for Form A output relays). If the Trip coil circuit gets disconnected. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–5 . a Trip alarm will be set and the “ALARM” and “MAINTENANCE” LEDs will be on. or if in general a high resistance is detected in the circuitry. This can be achieved by connecting a suitable resistor (see the table) across breaker auxiliary contact 52a in the trip circuit.CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE M3 BREAKER MAINTENANCE M3 Breaker maintenance W1 (W2) Breaker trip coil The Trip coil monitoring is performed by a built-in voltage monitor on the Form A output relays: RLY1 W1 BKR TRIP and RLY2 W2 BKR TRIP. An external jumper must be made between terminals “A2” and “A3” for Output Relay 1 (RLY1 W1 BKR TRIP) coil monitoring and "B$" and "B5" for Output Relay 2 (RLY2 W2 BKR TRIP) coil monitoring. The voltage monitor is connected across the Form A contact. For these applications the setting for “BYPASS BKR STATUS” should be set to ENABLED. Figure 2: Trip Coil circuit with voltage monitoring DC + DC + Output Relay 1 (TRIP) A2 B3 External jumper Output Relay 2 (TRIP) B4 A4 External jumper V A3 V B5 52a contact 52a contact Trip Coil 897786. regardless of the breaker position (open or closed). With such connections.cdr Trip Coil DC - DC - Example 2: Some applications require that the Trip coil be monitored continuously. the trickle current will be maintained by the resistor when the breaker is open. and effectively the relay detects healthy current through the circuit. Example 1: The figure below shows the connections of the breaker trip coil to the relay’s trip output relay for voltage monitoring of the trip circuit.

when the condition clears. The “ALARM” and “MAINTENANCE” LEDs will light up upon detection of a RLY1(2) coil circuitry problem. Alarm. Any or all of output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate when the RLY1(2) Coil Monitor function is selected as Alarm. and will self-reset.Working with the Keypad. For instructions on how to use the keypad. 7–6 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL . If Latched Alarm is selected. The “ALARM” LED will flash upon RLY1(2) Coil Monitor operating condition.cdr DC - The following path is available using the keypad. or Latched Alarm. enables the RLY1(2) Coil Monitor monitoring function. Latched Alarm Default: Disabled Selecting Alarm.cdr Output Relay 2 (TRIP) B4 A4 External jumper V B5 52a contact R By-pass resistor Trip Coil 897788. please refer to Chapter 3 . the “ALARM” LED will flash during the RLY1(2) Coil Monitor condition. and will stay “ON” after the condition clears. with the RLY1(2) Coil Monitor function selected as Alarm. PATH: MAINTENANCE > M3 BKR MAINTENANCE > W1(W2) BKR TRIP RLY1(2) COIL FUNCTION Range: Disabled.M3 BREAKER MAINTENANCE CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE Figure 3: Trip circuits with continuous monitoring DC + Output Relay 1 (TRIP) A2 B3 External jumper V A3 52a contact R By-pass resistor Trip Coil DC DC + 897787. until the reset command is initiated. or Latched Alarm.

or all. of output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon detection of RLY1(2) Coil. The circuits will be monitored regardless of breaker position. Operate Default: Do not operate Any. The selection of the relay outputs operation is available no matter whether the Alarm. and selected output relays operate. Enabled Default: Disabled Set the “BYPASS BKR STATE” to Enabled when a by-pass resistor is connected across the breaker auxiliary contact for continuous RLY1(2) circuit integrity monitoring. “ALARM” and “MAINTENANCE” LEDs light up on the front panel. or Latched Alarm. When “BYPASS BKR STATE” is set to Disabled. monitoring of the RLY1(2) coil will be blocked when the breaker is open.CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE M3 BREAKER MAINTENANCE RLY1(2) COIL DELAY Range: 1 to 10 sec in steps of 1 sec Default: 5 s This setting defines the RLY1(2) Coil Monitor Delay. 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–7 . or a RLY1(2) coil circuitry problem. function is selected. BYPASS BKR STATUS Range: Disabled. OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6 Range: Do not operate. before targets appear on the display.

7–8 Command RESET LED: ALARM AND S LATCH M3 BREAKER MAINTENANCE SETPOINT R OR TRIP COIL FUNCTION: AND Disabled = 0 Latched Alarm OR Message Trip Coil Montr OP Figure 4: Trip coil monitoring logic diagram Alarm Trip Coil current above threshold SETPOINT TRIP COIL DELAY: LED: MAINTENANCE SETPOINT: OUTPUT RELAY 3 OUTPUT RELAY 4 Operate output relays upon selection OUTPUT RELAY 5 OUTPUT RELAY 6 From output relay 1(2) AND tPKP Trip AND Breaker Closed 52a/b INPUTS OR SETPOINT Event Recorder Message Trip Coil Montr PKP BYPASS BKR STATE Enabled = 1 Transient Recorder 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE Disable = 0 898020.cdr .

Unhealthy 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL 7–9 . as well as the trip circuits.CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE M4 BREAKER MONITOR M4 Breaker monitor The status of the breaker trip coils. PATH: MAINTENANCE > M4 BKR MONITOR W1 BKR TRIP COIL Healthy Range: Healthy. In the case where a breaker coil or circuit fails. Unhealthy W2 BKR TRIP COIL Healthy Range: Healthy. can be monitored under MAINTENANCE > M4 BKR MONITOR. the relay will display the message "Unhealthy" for the corresponding coil.

The relay extrapolates the ambient temperature from an internal temperature sensor inside the product. VT. Any assignable output relays can be selected to operate when this function is enabled. The alarm will occur when the temperature remains below this level. The alarm will occur when the temperature remains above this level. and will automatically reset when the condition clears. HYSTERESIS LEVEL Range: 2°C to 10°C in steps of 1°C Default: 2°C This setting allows the user to select the dropout level for the feature. inputs. the LED “ALARM” will flash upon the activating condition. heating or ventilation system should be checked. Latched Alarm Default: Disabled This setting enables the ambient temperature functionality. Alarm. LOW ALARM LEVEL Range: -40°C to 20°C in steps of 1°C Default: 10°C This setting specifies the temperature level monitored by the Ambient Temperature Alarm low logic. If the operating condition is satisfied when Alarm is selected as the function. Installation of the relay should be for normal operation (CT. The purpose of the feature is to measure the immediate temperature around the product. PATH: MAINTENANCE > M5 RELAY MAINTENANCE > AMBIENT TEMP AMBIENT TEMPERATURE Range: Disabled. There are several factors that can alter the measurement that need to be considered for the application of this feature. For example the air conditioning. If Latched Alarm is selected. TIME DELAY Range: 1 to 60 min in steps of 1 min Default: 1 sec This timer starts when either the high or low level thresholds have exceeded their respective levels. This feature can be used to signal the customer that the product is being subjected to temperatures that can degrade the product life and proper action should be initiated. the “ALARM” LED will flash upon the activating condition. • • Any forced air flow or obstructions that can interrupt even distribution of the ambient temperature. HI ALARM LEVEL Range: 20°C to 80°C in steps of 1°C Default: 60°C This setting specifies the temperature level monitored by the Ambient Temperature Alarm high logic. and will stay “ON” after the condition clears. until a reset command is initiated. outputs).M5 RELAY MAINTENANCE CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE M5 Relay maintenance Ambient temperature The SR3 has a temperature monitor feature that measures the ambient temperature around the chassis of the relay. 7–10 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

Operate Default: Do Not Operate Hi Alarm Level Low Alarm Level Output Relay 5 Output Relay 6 RUN T > High Temp OR RUN T < Low Temp tRST SETTING TIME DELAY RUN AND AND LOGIC OPERAND Amb Temp HI Alarm PKP S LATCH R OR Any Alarm OP Amb Temp HI Alarm OP TARGET MESSAGE Amb Temp HI Alarm State: Pickup Amb Temp HI Alarm State: Operate Figure 5: Ambient Temperature Alarm logic diagram KEYPAD RESET INPUTS AND AND AND OR LOGIC OPERAND Amb Temp LO Alarm PKP AND AND Emergency Restart Input Lockout Reset Input Remote Reset Input S LATCH R OR Any Alarm OP Amb Temp LO Alarm OP SETTINGS S4 CONTROLS Emergency Restart Off = 0 Lockout Reset Off = 0 Remote Reset Off = 0 TARGET MESSAGE Amb Temp LO Alarm State: Pickup Amb Temp LO Alarm State: Operate Any assignable output relay can be selected to operate upon Ambient Temperature Alarm operation.CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE SETTING AMB TEMP ALARM Disabled = 0 OR Alarm Latched Alarm SETTINGS AMB TEMP ALARM 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL ASSIGNABLE AUX RELAYS Output Relay 3 Output Relay 4 Operate output relays upon selection OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6 Range: Do Not Operate. 897771.cdr M5 RELAY MAINTENANCE 7–11 .

M5 RELAY MAINTENANCE CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE 7–12 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .

1 . mounting and wiring for non-drawout unit Minor Corrections Table 3: Major Updates to SR345-A6 Page Number CHANGES Change manual revision number to A6 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL appendix .Digital Energy 345 Transformer Protection System Appendix Change notes Manual Revision history Table 1: Revision History MANUAL P/N RELEASE DATE 1601-9098-A1 1601-9098-A2 1601-9098-A5 1601-9098-A6 1601-9098-A7 12 February 2010 6 December 2010 9 December 2011 29 February 2012 14 September 2012 Table 2: Major Updates to SR345-A7 Page Number CHANGES Change manual revision number to A7 Chapter 1 Chapter 2 General Add Case design option N (relay with non-drawout design) Add dimensions.

CHANGE NOTES APPENDIX Table 3: Major Updates to SR345-A6 Page Number CHANGES Chapter 2 Revise Control Power parameters Table 4: Major Updates to SR345-A5 Page Number CHANGES Change manual revision number to A5 Chapter 1 Chapter 7 General General General Add Comm option 3E to Order Code Table Add Ambient Temp section (Ch 7 .2 345 TRANSFORMER PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL .Maintenance) Increase number of Logic Elements to 16 Minor Corrections Add support for additional safety/protection elements Table 5: Major Updates for SR345-A3 and A4 Page Number CHANGES Minor changes appendix .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful